Pro Engineering Book (Best book ever)

Introduction to Pro/ENGINEERWildfire 4.0T2169-360-0I

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Copyright © 2008 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, itssubsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”), and their respective licensors. This softwareis provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets andproprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States andother countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed tothird parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreementexcept with written prior approval from PTC.UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT INCIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyrightlaws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreementthat restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants tothe licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentationif provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordancewith the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copymade shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice providedby PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent ofPTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced toany form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by anymeans without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to makecopies for such purposes.Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject tochange without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment byPTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that mayappear in this document.For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information seebackside of this guide.

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

Education Services Registration in North America• Tel: (888) 782-3773• Fax: (781) 370-5553

Technical Support (Monday - Friday)• Tel: (800) 477-6435 (U.S.)• (781) 370-5332 or (781) 370-5523 (outside U.S.)• Fax: (781) 370-5650

License Management• Tel: (800) 216-8945 (U.S.)• (781) 370-5559 (outside U.S.)• Fax: (781) 370-5795

Contracts• Tel: (800) 791-9966 (U.S.)• (781) 370-5700 (outside U.S.)In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Website contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directionsto training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technicalsupport, and register for online service options such as knowledge basesearches, reference libraries and documentation. You can also find generalinformation about PTC, Pro/ENGINEER, Windchill, Consulting Services,Customer Support, and PTC Partners.

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Precision Learning

The Precision Learning MethodologyPTC developed the Precision Learning methodology to provide you with aneffective, comprehensive learning experience. This methodology is based ona cycle of learn, assess and improve.• Learning via PTC courses available in multiple formats, including:– Live Classroom (either in-center or on-site)– Virtual Class (live training delivered over the Web)– Web-based Training

• Assessing using Pro/FICIENCY, PTC’s Web-based skills assessment anddevelopment planning tool.

• Improving through the review of self-paced learning materials available inPTC University.

This methodology is continued in PTC University subscriptions, offeringa comprehensive library of self-paced and virtual courses correspondingto PTC products.Precision Learning Programs offer you the ability to create a customizedtraining program, focused on measuring the increase in your effectivenesswith PTC products.More information is available for all of these offerings in the training section ofPTC.com at http://www.ptc.com/services/training/index.htm.

Precision Learning In The ClassroomPTC’s classes are based on the proven instructional design principal of ‘TellMe, Show Me, Let Me Do’:• Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the keyconcepts.

• These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in thesoftware application.

• You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided in order for you toassess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will alsoidentify the class topics that require further review.

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessmentvia your PTC University account, or your instructor will provide training onhow to do this after the class.

Precision Learning After the ClassEach student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University account. Thisaccount will be automatically created if you do not already have one. As partof the class, you receive additional content in your account:• A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates aRecommended Learning Report based on your results.

• A Web-based training version of the course, based on the sameinstructional approach of lecture, demonstration and exercise. TheRecommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this trainingthat you may want to review.

Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after thelive class.

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Precision Learning Recommendations

PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associatedtraining are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps areavailable for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section ofPTC.com at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.

Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language andthat the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the mapcorresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructorrecommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training thatcorresponds to your role and job functions.

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Training Agenda

Day 1Module 01 ― Introduction to the Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Basic Modeling

ProcessModule 02 ― Understanding Pro/ENGINEER ConceptsModule 03 ― Using the Pro/ENGINEER InterfaceModule 04 ― Selecting and EditingModule 05 ― Creating Sketcher Geometry

Day 2Module 06 ― Using Sketcher ToolsModule 07 ― Creating Sketches for FeaturesModule 08 ― Creating Datum Features: Planes and AxesModule 09 ― Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and RibsModule 10 ― Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded DatumsModule 11 ― Creating Sweeps and Blends

Day 3Module 12 ― Creating Holes and ShellsModule 13 ― Creating Rounds and ChamfersModule 14 ― Group, Copy, and Mirror ToolsModule 15 ― Creating PatternsModule 16 ― Assembling with ConstraintsModule 17 ― Assembling with Connections

Day 4Module 18 ― Exploding AssembliesModule 19 ― Creating Drawing ViewsModule 20 ― Creating Drawing DetailsModule 21 ― Measuring and Inspecting ModelsModule 22 ― Using LayersModule 23 ― Investigating Parent/Child Relationships

Day 5Module 24 ― Capturing and Managing Design IntentModule 25 ― Resolving Failures and Seeking HelpModule 26 ― Project

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Table of Contents

Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 4.0Introduction to the Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Basic Modeling Process 1-1

Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Basic Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Understanding Feature-Based Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Understanding Parametric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Understanding Associative Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Understanding Model-Centric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Recognizing File Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Using the Pro/ENGINEER Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Understanding the Main Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Understanding the Folder Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Understanding the Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Understanding the Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files . . . . . 3-10Managing Files in Pro/ENGINEER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Understanding Basic Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Understanding the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Creating and Managing View Orientations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Creating Style States using the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Understanding Basic Color and Appearance Options . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35Setting Up New Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Selecting and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Using Drag Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Using Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Understanding the Model Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Renaming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Understanding Model Tree Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Understanding Basic Model Tree Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Selecting Items using Direct Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Understanding Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Using the Smart Selection Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Selecting Items using Query Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Editing Features and Regenerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Activating and Editing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using the Search Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Deleting and Suppressing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Editing Feature and Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Creating Sketcher Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Reviewing Sketcher Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Understanding Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Modifying the Sketcher Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Utilizing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Sketching Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Sketching Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Sketching Rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Sketching Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Sketching Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Sketching Circular Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Using Sketcher Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Understanding Construction Geometry Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Sketching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17Sketcher Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20Creating New Sketch Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23Placing Sections into Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

Creating Sketches for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Creating Sketches (’Sketch’ Feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Specifying the Sketch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Utilizing Sketch References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Creating Datum Features Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Creating Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Creating Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Creating Solid Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Creating Solid Revolve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Creating Rib Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded Datums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Creating Internal Sketches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Creating Embedded Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Creating Sweeps and Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11Creating a Parallel Blend Protrusion or Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13Experimenting with Parallel Blend Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17Analyzing Parallel Blend Section Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19

Creating Holes and Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2Creating Coaxial Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Creating Linear Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8Creating Radial and Diameter Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12Exploring Hole Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16Creating Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20

Creating Rounds and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1Creating Rounds Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Creating Full Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11Creating Round Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19Creating Chamfer Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1Creating Local Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Copying and Pasting Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6Moving and Rotating Copied Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10Mirroring Selected Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14Mirroring All Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16Creating Mirrored Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

Creating Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1Direction Patterning in the First Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2Direction Patterning in the Second Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6Axis Patterning in the First Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10Axis Patterning in the Second Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14Creating Reference Patterns of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18Creating Reference Patterns of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25Assembling with Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Understanding Assembly Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2Creating New Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4Understanding Assembly Constraint Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8Assembling Components using the Default Constraint . . . . . . . . . 16-10Analyzing Basic Component Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12Understanding Constraint Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15Constraining Components using Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17Constraining Components using Mate Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20Constraining Components using Align Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23Constraining Components using Align and Mate Offset. . . . . . . . . 16-27Constraining Components using Align and Mate Oriented . . . . . . 16-30Constraining Components using Align and Mate Angle. . . . . . . . . 16-33Constraining Components using the Automatic Option . . . . . . . . . 16-36Using Temporary Component Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-41

Assembling with Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1Understanding Connection Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2Assembling Components using the Slider Connection . . . . . . . . . . 17-4Assembling Components using the Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7Assembling Components using the Cylinder Connection . . . . . . . 17-10Dragging Connected Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12Analyzing Collision Detection Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15

Exploding Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1Creating and Managing Explode States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2Creating Offset Lines Between Exploded Components . . . . . . . . . . 18-6

Creating Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1Analyzing Drawing Concepts and Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2Analyzing Basic 2-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3Creating New Drawings and Applying Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11Creating and Orienting General Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-14Adding Drawing Models and Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17Creating Projection Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21Modifying Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-24Creating Assembly and Exploded Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-28Creating Cross-Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-32Creating Detailed Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-36Creating Auxiliary Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-40

Creating Drawing Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1Analyzing Detail Concepts and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Showing and Erasing Detail Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3Cleaning Up Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7Manipulating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10Creating Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14Creating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-18Creating a Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22Analyzing Drawing Associativity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-25

Measuring and Inspecting Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1Measuring Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6Analyzing Model Units and Mass Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10Measuring Global Interference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-14

Using Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1Understanding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2Creating and Managing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4Utilizing Layers in Part Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9

Investigating Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1Understanding Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2Viewing Part Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information . . . . . . . . . . 23-14

Capturing and Managing Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2Reordering Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6Inserting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9Redefining Features and Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13Capturing Design Intent in Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-17Capturing Design Intent in Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-19Capturing Design Intent in Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-21Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-23

Resolving Failures and Seeking Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1Understanding Resolve Mode Theory and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2Analyzing Geometry Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4Analyzing Open Section Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8Analyzing Missing Part References Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11Analyzing Missing Component Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-21Using Pro/ENGINEER Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-25

Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

The Air Circulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2Piston Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3Crankshaft, Engine Block, and Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5Engine Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6Completing the Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

For Students: How to Use this Course Handbook

Guide LayoutThe information in this guide is organized as topics to aid students in findinginformation after the class is complete. Each topic is divided into the followingsections:• Concept — This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and ispresented during the class lecture.

• Theory — This section provides detailed information introduced in theConcept.

• Procedure — This section provides step-by-step instructions on how tocomplete the topic within Pro/ENGINEER. Procedures are short, focused,and simple exercises that cover the specific topics to which they apply.Procedures are found in this Student Handbook only. Not every topic has aProcedure as there are knowledge topics that can not be exercised.

• Exercise — Exercises are longer than procedures, and may cover multipletopics, so not every topic will have an associated exercise. Exercises aretypically more involved and use more complicated models. Exercises arefound in the printed Exercise Guide and the online exercise HTML files.

Additionally, topics are organized into modules. Except for the first module,all modules are grouped to keep similar functionality together.The first module is typically a process module. In this module, you areintroduced to the generic high-level processes used during the course andafter the course is completed.

Running Course Handbook Procedures and ExercisesTo make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as labs for theremainder of this section) as concise as possible, each begins with a header.The header lists the name of the lab and a brief scenario. The header liststhe working directory, the file you are to open, and the initial datum display.An example of a Procedure is shown below, but Exercises follow the samegeneral rules:

The following gives a brief description of the items highlighted above:1. Procedure/Exercise Name — This is the name of the lab.2. Scenario — This briefly describes what will be done in the lab.3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed — This indicates that you should

close any open files and erase them from memory. Click the CloseWindow icon until the icon is disabled and then click the Erase NotDisplayed icon and click OK. These icons have been added to theleft side of the main toolbar.

4. Folder Name— This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files arestored on a module by module basis. Within each module, you will findsub-directories for each lab. In this example, Extrude_Features is theworking directory. To set the working directory, select the folder fromthe browser, right-click and select Set Working Directory

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

5. Model to Open— This is the file to be opened from the working directory(extrude.prt for example). In the browser, right-click on the file andselect Open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, etc. Also,if you are expected to create a model, you will see Create New here.

6. Datum Display Setting — The initial datum display is shown here.

For example, means that you should display datumplanes but not display datum axes, datum points and datum coordinatesystems. Before beginning the lab, set the icons in the datum displaytoolbar to match those shown in the header.

7. Task Name — Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be oneor more tasks within a lab.

8. Lab Steps — These are the individual steps required to complete a task.Two other items of note for labs:• Saving — Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unlessotherwise stated.

• Erasing models from memory — You should always erase models frommemory when a lab is complete.

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module1Introduction to the Pro/ENGINEER WildfireBasic Modeling Process

Module OverviewIn this module, you learn about the basic modeling process that is typicallyused to scope, model, assemble, and document a Pro/ENGINEER solidmodel. This simplified process is fundamentally used at most companies,although your specific company process may differ. The process is supportedthroughout the course modules and again followed in a course project.This module also introduces you to various fundamental Pro/ENGINEERconcepts including feature-based modeling and associativity between partmodels, assemblies, and drawings. You will learn more detail about theseand other concepts in subsequent modules.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Prepare for a part model design by scoping the design parameters of anadjoining part.

• Create a new part model by following the required design parameters.• Create an assembly by assembling the new part model with existing partmodels.

• Create a 2-D drawing of the new part model that includes views,dimensions, and a title block.

© 2007 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Basic Modeling ProcessThe Basic Modeling Process can be summarized in fourhigh-level steps:

1. Preparing for Part Model Design2. Creating a New Part Model

3. Creating a New Assembly byAssembling the Part Models

4. Creating a Drawing of the NewPart Model

Preparing for Part Model DesignOften, before you create a new part model design, it is necessary to knowinformation about the components that will surround it in an assembly.Consequently, you may want to open and inspect these parts beforebeginning the new design. At your company, this preparation stage mayoccur at the same time as the new part model design, or it may not occur atall. Either way, having knowledge of adjoining parts can help in the newpart model design.

Creating a New Part ModelA new part model accurately captures a design from a concept through solidfeature-based modeling. A part model enables you to graphically view theproduct before it is manufactured. A part model can be used to:• Capture mass property information.• Vary design parameters to determine the best options.

Module 1 | Page 2 © 2007 PTC

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Graphically visualize what a model will look like before it is manufactured.

Creating a New Assembly by Assembling the Part ModelsAn assembly is created from one or more parts. The parts are located andassembled with respect to one another just as they are on a real product.An assembly can be used to:• Check for fit between parts.• Check for interference between parts.• Capture bill of material information.• Calculate the total weight of an assembly.

Creating a Drawing of the AssemblyOnce a part or assembly has been modeled, it is usually necessary todocument that part or assembly by creating a 2-D drawing of it. The 2-Ddrawing usually contains views of the part or assembly, dimensions, and atitle block. The drawing may also contain notes, tables, and further designinformation. Not every company requires that a drawing be created of amodel.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Process Exercise

ObjectivesAfter successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Scope the design parameters of an existing part.• Create a new part model using required design parameters.• Create a new assembly by assembling part models.• Create a new drawing of the new part model.

ScenarioBefore you can begin modeling the key handle, you need to scope the designon the adjoining key base model. You know from experience that the hole inthe key base is not large enough in diameter for a strong key handle, and thekey base does not provide enough clearance to use the tool.Once you have properly scoped the design, you can create the key handlepart and assemble it with the key base. Finally, you can document the keyhandle design by creating a 2-D drawing.

Step 1: Preparing for part model design — Open and edit the dimensionsof an existing part model to watch the geometry updateautomatically.

1. To open the KEY_BASE.PRTpart model, do the following:

• Click Open from themain toolbar at the top of theinterface.

• In the File Open dialog box,clickWorking Directory .

• Double-click the Module_01folder to view its contents.

• Right-click folderBasicModelingProcessand select Set WorkingDirectory.

• Double-click theBasicModelingProcessfolder to view its contents.

• Select KEY_BASE.PRT.• Click Open.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

2. Click Plane Display , Axis

Display , Point Display

, and Csys Displayfrom the main toolbar at the topof the interface to disable theirdisplay.

3. To edit the hole diameter from3.5 to 5, do the following:• Click on the hole in the modelto select it. It should outlinein red.

• Right-click and select Edit.• Double-click the 3.5 value toedit it.

• Edit the value from 3.5 to 5and press ENTER.

• Click Regenerate fromthe main toolbar at the topof the interface to update themodel geometry to the newdiameter value.

4. Click Named View List from the main toolbar at the top of theinterface and select FRONT.

5. To edit the shaft height from 25to 35, do the following:• Click on the shaft in the modelto select it. It should outlinein red.

• In the graphics windowcontaining the model,right-click and select Edit.

• Double-click the 25 value toedit it.

• Edit the value from 25 to 35and press ENTER.

• Click Regenerate fromthe main toolbar at the topof the interface to update themodel geometry to the longershaft value.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. Click Named View List fromthe main toolbar at the top of theinterface and select StandardOrientation.

7. Click Plane Display and

Axis Display from the maintoolbar at the top of the interfaceto enable their display.

8. To save the KEY_BASE.PRT part model and close the window, dothe following:

• Click Save from the main toolbar at the top of the interface.• In the Save Object dialog box, click OK.

• Click Close Window from the main toolbar at the top of theinterface to close the window containing KEY_BASE.PRT.

Step 2: Creating a new part model — Create a new part model namedKEY_HANDLE.PRT and model its geometry.

1. To create a new part model, dothe following:

• Click New from the maintoolbar at the top of theinterface.

• In the New dialog box, selectPart as the Type and Solid asthe Sub-type.

• Type KEY_HANDLE as theName and click OK.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

2. To start a new Sketch feature,do the following:

• Start the Sketch Toolfrom the feature toolbar on theright side of the interface.

• In the graphics window, clickon datum plane FRONT toselect it. The Sketch dialogbox should now show thatthe Sketch Plane is datumplane FRONT and the SketchOrientation is datum planeRIGHT, oriented to the right.

• Click Sketch from the Sketchdialog box.

3. To sketch a circle and edit itsdiameter to 5, do the following:• Click Center and PointCircle from the Sketchertoolbar on the right side of theinterface.

• In the graphics window, cursorover the intersection of thevertical and horizontal lines.The cursor will snap to thecenter. Click to place thecircle at the intersection, dragyour mouse outward to startsketching the circle, and clickagain to complete the circle.

• Click Select One By Onefrom the Sketcher toolbar onthe right side of the interface.A diameter dimension appearsfor the circle.

• Double-click the diameterdimension, edit its value to 5,and press ENTER.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

4. Click Done Section fromthe Sketcher toolbar on the rightside of the interface.

5. Click Named View Listfrom the main toolbar and selectStandard Orientation.

6. To create an Extrude featureusing the sketch you justcreated, do the following:• With the Sketch feature stillselected (it should be red, ifnot, click on it to select it), startthe Extrude Tool fromthe feature toolbar on the rightside of the interface.

• In the dashboard at the bottomof the interface, edit the depthfrom Specified Depth toBoth Sides .

• In the dashboard, edit thedepth value to 12 and pressENTER. The yellow geometrydepth increases. Yellowgeometry is preview geometryand is representative of howthe feature will appear when itis completed.

• Click Complete Featurefrom the dashboard.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. To start a second new Sketchfeature, do the following:

• Start the Sketch Toolfrom the feature toolbar on theright side of the interface.

• In the graphics window, clickon the front surface of thecylinder geometry to select itas the sketching plane for thenew Sketch feature.

• Click Sketch from the Sketchdialog box.

8. To sketch a circle and edit itsdiameter to 7, do the following:• Click Center and PointCircle from the Sketchertoolbar on the right side of theinterface.

• In the graphics window, cursorover the intersection of thevertical and horizontal lines.The cursor will snap to thecenter. Click to place thecircle at the intersection, dragyour mouse outward to startsketching the circle, and clickagain to complete the circle.

• Click Select One By Onefrom the Sketcher toolbar onthe right side of the interface.A diameter dimension appearsfor the circle.

• Double-click the diameterdimension, edit its value to 7,and press ENTER.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

9. Click Done Section from theSketcher toolbar.

10. Click Named View Listfrom the main toolbar and selectStandard Orientation.

11. To create a second Extrudefeature using the secondsketch you just created, do thefollowing:• With the second Sketchfeature still selected (it shouldbe red, if not, click on it toselect it), start the ExtrudeTool from the featuretoolbar on the right side of theinterface.

• In the graphics window, clickand drag the small white,square drag handle to changethe depth to 5.

• In the dashboard at the bottomof the interface, click ChangeDepth Direction to flip theyellow preview geometry intothe existing geometry.


12. Click Plane Display and Axis Display from the main toolbarat the top of the interface to disable their display.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

13. To round two edges of thegeometry, do the following:

• Start the Round Toolfrom the feature toolbar on theright side of the interface.

• In the graphics window, pressand hold CTRL and click onthe two edges to be roundedto select them.

• In the dashboard, edit theround radius to 0.5 and pressENTER.


14. Click in the background of thegraphics window to deselect thecompleted round feature.

15. To mirror the part, do thefollowing:• In the model tree on the leftside of the interface, pressand hold CTRL and clickon features Extrude 2 andRound 1 to select them.

• Start the Mirror Tool fromthe feature toolbar on the rightside of the interface.

• In the model tree, click ondatum plane FRONT to selectit as the datum to mirror thegeometry about.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

16. To modify geometry dimensionsto their proper length andregenerate the model, do thefollowing:• In the model tree, on the leftside of the interface, right-clickon feature Extrude 1 andselect Edit.

• In the graphics window,double-click the 12 dimension,edit it to 60, and press ENTER.

• Click Regenerate fromthe main toolbar. Notice thatthe model geometry growslong.

17. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT part model, do the following:

• Click Save from the main toolbar at the top of the interface.• In the Save Object dialog box, click OK.

Step 3: Creating a new assembly by assembling the part models —Create a new assembly CHUCK_KEY.ASM and assemble theKEY_HANDLE.PRT and KEY_BASE.PRT.

1. Click Plane Display from the main toolbar at the top of theinterface to enable their display.

2. To create the CHUCK_KEY.ASMassembly model, do thefollowing:

• Click New from the maintoolbar at the top of theinterface.

• In the New dialog box, selectAssembly as the Type andverify that Design is theSub-type.

• Edit the Name toCHUCK_KEY.

• Click OK.

You will need to resize the new assembly window that appears.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

3. To assemble theKEY_BASE.PRT, do thefollowing:

• Click Assemble from thefeature toolbar at the right sideof the interface.

• In the Open dialog box, selectcomponent KEY_BASE.PRTand click Open.

• In the dashboard, edit theconstraint in the drop-down listfrom Automatic to Default .


4. Click Plane Display from the main toolbar at the top of theinterface to disable their display.

5. To start assemblingKEY_HANDLE.PRT by creatingthe Insert constraint, do thefollowing

• Click Assemble from thefeature toolbar.

• In the Open dialog box,click on componentKEY_HANDLE.PRT to selectit and click Open.

• In the graphics window, clickon the inside hole surface onKEY_BASE.PRT to select itas the assembly reference.

• Click on the shaft surface onKEY_HANDLE.PRT to selectit as the component reference.The KEY_HANDLE.PRT willreposition itself through thehole in KEY_BASE.PRT, andthe Insert constraint is created.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. To continue assemblingKEY_HANDLE.PRT by creatingthe Mate constraint, do thefollowing:• In the graphics window,click on the flat surface onKEY_HANDLE.PRT to selectit as the component reference.

• Cursor over the upperleft of the top surfaceof KEY_BASE.PRT topre-highlight it. Right-click toquery the back, flat surfaceof KEY_BASE.PRT andclick to select it as theassembly reference. TheMate constraint is created.

7. To edit the Mateconstraint offset value andcomplete the assembly ofKEY_HANDLE.PRT, do thefollowing:• In the graphics window, clickand drag the small white,square drag handle to editthe offset value of the Mateconstraint to 6.

• Click Complete Componentfrom the dashboard.

8. To edit the shaft length ofKEY_HANDLE.PRT within theassembly, do the following:• In the model tree, clickthe “+” icon next toKEY_HANDLE.PRT to expandits list of features.

• Right-click on Extrude 1 in themodel tree and select Edit.

• In the graphics window,double-click the 60 dimensionto edit it.

• Edit the 60 dimension value to45 and press ENTER.

• Click Regenerate fromthe main toolbar to update thegeometry to the new length.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

9. To verify the geometrylength change in theKEY_HANDLE.PRT, do thefollowing:• In the main menu,click Window >KEY_HANDLE.PRT toswitch windows from theCHUCK_KEY.ASM assemblyto the KEY_HANDLE.PRTpart model.

• In the model tree, right-clickon Extrude 1 and select Edit.Notice that the shaft length isnow 45, even though it wasedited in the assembly.

• Click in the background of thegraphics window to clear thedimensions.

Step 4: Creating a drawing of the new part model — Create a new drawingKEY_HANDLE.DRW for the part model KEY_HANDLE.PRT.

1. To create the newKEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing,do the following:

• Click New from the maintoolbar.

• In the New dialog box, selectDrawing as the Type.

• Edit the Name toKEY_HANDLE.

• Clear the Use defaulttemplate check box.

• Click OK.• In the New Drawing dialogbox, verify that the defaultmodel is KEY_HANDLE.PRT.

• Select the Use templateoption and click Browseto browse for the drawingtemplate.

• In the Open dialog box, selectthe student_template.drwtemplate and click Open.

• Click OK from the NewDrawing dialog box.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

2. The message window at thebottom of the interface promptsyou for the drawn_by parameter.Type your first initial, followedby your surname, and pressENTER. Your name is enteredinto the title block as the drawingdisplays in the graphics window.

3. To change the drawing scale, dothe following:• In the bottom-left corner of thegraphics window, double-clickthe Scale value to edit it.

• The message window promptsyou to enter the new value forscale. Type 5 as the new scalevalue and press ENTER. Thedrawing views automaticallyrescale to the new value of 5.

4. To move the Ø7 diameterdimension to the other drawingview, do the following:• Click on the Ø7 diameterdimension in the right drawingview to select it. It will highlightred.

• Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Move Itemto View.

• Select the left drawing view.The dimension is moved tothis new drawing view.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

5. To move the Ø5 diameterdimension to another locationin the drawing view, do thefollowing:• In the graphics window, clickon the Ø5 dimension in theright drawing view to select it.It will highlight red.

• Cursor over the highlighteddimension. The cursor willappear as four arrows. This isan indication that you can nowclick and drag this dimensionto move it to another locationon the drawing. Click anddrag to move the Ø5 diameterdimension to the center of thedrawing view.

6. Click Window > KEY_HANDLE.PRT to switch to the windowcontaining KEY_HANDLE.PRT.

7. To edit the KEY_HANDLE.PRTshaft length and save it, do thefollowing:• Right-click on Extrude 1 in themodel tree and select Edit.

• In the graphics window,double-click the 45 dimensionto edit it.

• Edit the 45 dimension value to60 and press ENTER.

• Click Regenerate fromthe main toolbar.

8. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and close the window, do thefollowing:

• Click Save from the main toolbar.• Click OK from the Save Object dialog box.

• In the main toolbar, click Close Window to close theKEY_HANDLE.PRT window.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

9. To activate theCHUCK_KEY.ASM assem-bly, save it, and close thewindow, do the following:• Click Window >CHUCK_KEY.ASM fromthe main menu to switch to theassembly and activate it.

• Click Save from the maintoolbar.

• Click OK from the Save Objectdialog box.

• In the main toolbar, clickClose Window to closethe CHUCK_KEY.ASMwindow.

Note that the geometryand dimension in thedrawing have bothupdated.

10. To save the KEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing, close the window, anderase all files from session memory, do the following:

• Click Save from the main toolbar.• Click OK from the Save Object dialog box.

• In the main menu, click Close Window to close theKEY_HANDLE.DRW window.

• Click Erase Not Displayed from the main toolbar along thetop of the interface.

• Click OK from the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

This completes the procedure.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module2Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Concepts

Module OverviewIn this module, you will first learn about basic concepts and benefits of solidmodeling using Pro/ENGINEER. You will then learn how complex modelscan be easily created using a combination of simple features. Parametriccapabilities that are native to Pro/ENGINEER enable you to easily add designintent and make design changes. Associativity means that a change made toyour design solid model will be automatically propagated to all referencedobjects such as drawings, assemblies, and so on. You will also learn how amodel-centric modeler enables downstream deliverables to be created withreferences to and driven by the design model.Finally, you will learn how to recognize some of the basic file extensions usedto identify different types of Pro/ENGINEER objects.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand solid modeling concepts.• Understand feature based concepts.• Understand parametric concepts.• Understand associative concepts.• Understand model-centric concepts.• Recognize basic Pro/ENGINEER file extensions.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Solid Modeling ConceptsPro/ENGINEER Wildfire enables you to create solid modelrepresentations of your part and assembly models.

Solid Models:• Contain properties such as mass, volume, and center of gravity.• Can also be used to check for interferences in an assembly.• Are realistic visual representation of designs.

Interference Check Mass Properties

Solid ModelsPro/ENGINEER enables you to create realistic solid model representationsof your part and assembly models. These virtual design models can beused to easily visualize and evaluate your design before costly prototypesare manufactured.The models contain material properties such as mass, volume, center ofgravity, and surface area. As features are added or removed from the model,these properties update. For example, if you add a hole to a model, thenthe mass of the model decreases.In addition, solid models enable tolerance analysis and clearance/interferencechecking when placed into assemblies.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Feature-Based ConceptsPro/ENGINEER is a feature-based product development tool.

With Feature-Based Modeling:• You build one simple feature at a time.• Each new feature can reference previous features.

Connecting Rod Features

Feature-Based ModelingPro/ENGINEER is a feature-based product development tool. The modelsare constructed using a series of easy to understand features rather thanconfusing mathematical shapes and entities.The geometric definition of a model is defined by the type of features usedand by the order in which each feature is placed. Each feature builds uponthe previous feature and can reference any of the preceding features; thisenables design intent to be built into the model.Individually, each feature is typically simple but as they are added togetherthey form complex parts and assemblies.In this example, we have a connecting rod in seven stages of its creation:• First, an extrusion is created, which forms the overall shape and size ofthe model.

• An additional extrusion is created at the top of the model.• A third extrusion is created at the bottom of the model.• A hole is created at the top of the model.• Another hole is created at the bottom of the model.• A round is created on the four inside edges.• A small radial hole is created at the top of the model.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Parametric ConceptsThe parametric nature and feature-to-feature relationships inPro/ENGINEER enable you to easily capture design intent andmake design changes.

Parametric:• Model geometry is controlled by parameters and dimensions.• When you modify dimension values, relevant geometry is automaticallyupdated.

Feature Relationships:• Features referenced during creation become parents.• If parent features change, child features accordingly and predictivelychange as well.

Parametric Feature Relationships

ParametricPro/ENGINEER models are value driven, using dimensions and parametersto define the size and location of features within the model. If you change thevalue of a feature dimension, that feature will update according to the change.The change then automatically propagates through to related features inthe model, updating the entire part.

Feature RelationshipsRelationships between features in Pro/ENGINEER provide a powerful tool forcapturing design intent. During the modeling process, design intent is addedas one feature is created with reference to another.When creating a new feature, any feature referenced during its creationbecomes a parent of the new feature. The new feature referencing the parentis referred to as a child of the parent. If the parent feature is updated, anychildren of the parent update accordingly. These relationships are referred toas parent/child relationships.This example shows a piston model intersected with a hole feature. In themiddle figure, the piston height is modified from 18.5 to 25. Notice that thehole moves upward as the piston height increases. The design intent of thepiston is to have the hole located a specified distance from the top of thepiston. The hole will maintain that distance no matter how tall the piston


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

becomes. This intent was added by dimensioning the hole to the top surfaceof the piston.Alternatively, if the intent of the design is to have the hole located a specifieddistance from the bottom of the piston, the hole would be dimensioned fromthe bottom surface of the piston, yielding a different result when the height ofthe piston is modified.The right most figure shows modifications made to the location and diameterof the hole.

Best PracticesWhen creating features in your model, try to reference features and geometrythat are robust, will likely not be deleted, and provide the desired designintent. While this is not always possible, striving to do so will help you buildrobust, easy to modify models. Later in this course, you learn about thePro/ENGINEER tools that are used to easily change feature relationshipsand design intent.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Associative ConceptsPro/ENGINEER is a bi-directionally associative productdevelopment tool.

Associativity

AssociativityBi-directional associativity means that all changes made to an object in anymode of Pro/ENGINEER are automatically reflected in every related mode.For example, a change made in a drawing is reflected in the part beingdocumented in the drawing. That same change is also reflected in everyassembly using that part model.It is important to understand that the associativity between different modes ispossible because the part shown in a drawing is not copied into the drawing,but rather associatively linked to the drawing. Likewise, an assembly is nota large file containing copies of every part in the assembly, but rather a filecontaining associative links to every model used in the assembly.

Best PracticesBecause drawing and assembly files have associative links to the modelscontained in them, these objects cannot be opened without the models theycontain being present.In other words, you cannot send your colleague only a drawing file to open,he or she must have the drawing file along with any model referenced in thedrawing. For an assembly, he or she must have the assembly file and allmodels used in the assembly.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Model-Centric ConceptsIn Pro/ENGINEER, the model is the center of all downstreamdeliverables.

Model-Centric• Assemblies reference the models being assembled.• The drawing references the model being documented.• The FEM model references the model being meshed.• The mold tool references the model being molded.

Model-Centric

Model-CentricIn a model-centric product development tool, the design model is the commonsource for all deliverables making use of that design model. This means thatall downstream deliverables point directly to a common design model. Themodel is referenced as components in assemblies, views in a drawing, thecavity of a mold, geometry meshed in a FEM model, and so on.The benefit of using a model-centric development tool is that a changemade to the design model will automatically update all related downstreamdeliverables.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Recognizing File ExtensionsEach Pro/ENGINEER object type has a unique file extensionused to identify it.

The following are common Pro/ENGINEER fileextensions:• .prt - Part File• .asm - Assembly File• .drw - Drawing File

Part File

Drawing File Assembly File

Pro/ENGINEER File ExtensionsThe following are three file extensions used to identify three commonPro/ENGINEER object types: parts, assemblies, and drawings.• .prt - This extension represents a part object.• .asm - This extension represents an assembly object. An assembly filecontains pointers and instructions that identify and position a collection ofparts and subassemblies.

• .drw - This extension represents a 2-D drawing. The drawing file containspointers, instructions, and detail items for documenting part and assemblymodels in a drawing.

Each time an object is saved, the system creates a new, iterated"dot number" version of that object, adding the iteration number tothe end of the file name.For example, filename.prt.1, filename.prt.2, filename.prt.3, and soon.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module3Using the Pro/ENGINEER Interface

Module OverviewPro/ENGINEER’s user interface is an intuitive, user-friendly experience. Thesystem is designed to make the most of its available space by displayingcertain information at the right time, and then using that space to displaydifferent information at a different time.This module introduces you to the main user interface and defines eacharea and how you will use it. You will gain an understanding of basic skillsincluding file manipulation and management, as well as setting the workingdirectory and saving and opening files. You will learn basic Pro/ENGINEERdisplay options for datum display that will aid you throughout this course. Youwill also learn about 3-D view orientations and style representations, as wellas understand how to create and apply basic color and appearance options.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand Pro/ENGINEER’s main interface, folder browser, Web browser,and menu system.

• Set the working directory manage files in Pro/ENGINEER, including how toopen and save files.

• Understand basic Pro/ENGINEER display options including model displayand datum display.

• Analyze, create, and manage basic 3-D orientations.• Create style representations using the view manager.• Understand Pro/ENGINEER basic color and appearance options.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding the Main InterfaceThe Main Interface includes the following areas:

• Graphics Window• Main Menu• Toolbars• Dashboard

• Message Window• Dialog Boxes• Menu Manager

The Main Interface

Main Interface TheoryThere are many different areas of the Pro/ENGINEER user interface that youuse when creating models. The areas that display depend upon the functionbeing performed. Areas of the main interface include:

• Graphics Window — The workingarea of Pro/ENGINEER Wildfirein which you create and modifyPro/ENGINEER models such asparts, assemblies, and drawings.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Main Menu — Located at the top of the interface, the main menucontains standard options such as File, Edit, and View.

• Toolbars — Toolbars contain icons for commonly used tools and

functions.

• Message Window — Themessage window provides youwith prompts, feedback, andmessages from Pro/ENGINEERWildfire.

• Dashboard — Located, by default, at the bottom of the user interface,the Dashboard appears when you create or edit the definition of afeature. The Dashboard provides you with controls, inputs, status, andguidance for carrying out a task, such as creating or editing a feature.Changes are immediately visible on the screen. Various dashboard tabsare available with additional feature options. Dashboard icons on the leftinclude feature controls while the Pause, Preview, Create Feature, andCancel Feature options are on the right. When the dashboard is open,the message window is integrated into it.

• Dialog Boxes — Arecontent-sensitive windowsthat appear, displaying andprompting you for information.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Menu Manager — A cascadingmenu that appears on the far rightduring the use of certain functionsand modes within Pro/ENGINEERWildfire. You work from top tobottom in this menu; however,clicking “Done” is done frombottom to top. Bold menu optionswill be automatically selectedif the middle mouse button isclicked.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding the Folder BrowserThe Folder Browser is a pane in the Navigator that enables youto browse the folders on your computer and network.

The Folder Browser is divided into:• Common Folders• Folder Tree

The Folder Browser enables you to:• Browse folders.• View In Session objects.• View contents of your Desktop,My Documents, and NetworkNeighborhood.

• Browse directly to the WorkingDirectory.

• Resize the width by dragging thesash control.

• Click the sash arrows to close theNavigator.

The Folder Browser Pane

Folder Browser TheoryThe Navigator is a pane in Pro/ENGINEER user interface that contains aseries of tabs across the top. One of those tabs is the Folder Browser. Bydefault, Pro/ENGINEER launches with the Folder Browser open. The FolderBrowser enables you to browse the folders on your computer and network.You can resize the Folder Browser width by dragging the sash control orclose the Navigator entirely by clicking the sash arrows.The Folder Browser is divided into the Common Folders and the Folder Tree.

The Common FoldersThe Common Folders area of the Navigator contains folders that, whenselected, direct you to the folder location in the Folder Tree or Browser. Toadd a folder to this area of the interface, right-click the folder in the FolderTree or Browser and select Add to common folders. The six standardCommon Folders include:• In Session - View all files currently In Session.• Desktop - View the contents of your Desktop.• My Documents - View the contents of your My Documents folder.• Working Directory - View the contents of the current Working Directory.• Network Neighborhood - View the contents of your Network Neighborhood.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Favorites - View the folders or Web sites you have designated as favorites.To access your favorites you could also select the Favorites tab from thetop of the Navigator.

The Folder TreeThe Folder Tree enables you to browse your computer’s folder structure. Bydefault, the Folder Tree is collapsed at the bottom of the Folder Browserwindow. You can also use the Folder Tree to set a new working directory, addfolders to the Common Folders, as well as add, delete, and rename folderson your computer. The contents of a folder selected in the Folder Tree aredisplayed in the Browser.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding the Web BrowserThe Web Browser is an embedded Pro/ENGINEER window thatenables you to perform context-sensitive tasks.

You can perform thefollowing tasks:• Browse the file system.• PreviewPro/ENGINEERmodels.

• Open Pro/ENGINEERmodels.

• Browse Web pages.• Set the WorkingDirectory.

• Cut/Copy/Paste/Deletefolders and objects.

The Web Browser

Web Browser TheoryThe browser is an integrated content viewer within Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire.It works in conjunction with the Folder Browser so you can find files on yourcomputer as well as browse Web pages. The browser is embedded in thePro/ENGINEER interface, and slides over the graphics window. The Webbrowser is divided into four sections: file list, preview window, browsercontrols, and sash.

• File List — Displays the contentsof a folder selected in the FolderBrowser. You can set either Listor Details display, filter the listbased on file type, or displayinstances and/or all versions ofa file. Double-click a folder tosee its contents or double-click afile to open it in Pro/ENGINEER.Select a file to preview it in thepreview window or drag and dropit into the graphics window toopen it. You can also cut, copy,paste, and delete folders andobjects in the File List.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Preview Window — When amodel is selected from the file list,you can dynamically preview it byexpanding the preview window.You can Spin, Pan, and Zoom inthe preview window to observemodel geometry. You can alsoedit the model display. By default,the preview window is collapsedat the bottom of the browser.

• Browser Controls — The Web browser contains standard controlbuttons: Back, Forward, Home, Refresh, and Stop. Type a Web addressin the Address field or select a sub-folder to view its contents in thebrowser. Click the down arrow next to a folder in the Address field toview its contents or begin typing the name of the desired file or folder inthe Search field to dynamically filter the folder’s contents in the browser.

• Sash — To open or close thebrowser, click the arrows on thesash. You can adjust the widthof the browser by dragging thewindow sash.

The Web browser also displays other context-sensitive information,including model and feature information.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding the Window MenuThe Window Menu contains commands for activating, opening,closing, and re-sizing Pro/ENGINEER widows. You can alsoswitch between open windows.

• A window must be active to useall applicable Pro/ENGINEERfeatures.

• The word Active appears on thetitle bar of the active window nextto the model name.

• The active model has a black dotnext to its name in the Windowmenu. The Window Menu

Switching Between Open Windows An Active Window

The Importance of the Active ModelPro/ENGINEER enables you to have multiple windows open at the sametime, each containing a different model. This is a common occurrenceduring the design process. However, at any given moment, all applicablefunctionality is available only on the active model. Click Window > Activateto activate the model in the window you selected the Window menu, or clickWindow > MODEL_NAME to activate a different open window. You candetermine which window is active in two different ways:• The word Active appears on the title bar of the active window next to themodel name.

• The active model has a black dot next to its name in the Window menu.

Other Window Menu FunctionsIn addition to activating windows and switching between open windows, thefollowing additional functions are available in the Window menu:• Create a new window — When a part or assembly is open, click Window> New to create a new window with the current object present in the newwindow. This new window becomes the active window.

• Close a window — Clicking Window > Close closes the active window.If there was an object in that window, the object remains in memory. Ifonly one window was open, the object is removed from the window andthe window remains open.– Resize a window — You can resize the Pro/ENGINEER window by

clicking Window > Maximize, Window > Default Size, and Window> Restore. You can also click the maximize or minimize buttons in thewindow’s title bar.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Setting the Working Directory and Opening andSaving FilesThe Working Directory is the location for opening files from andsaving new files to.

• Pro/ENGINEER is started indefault working directory.

• Different working directories canbe set.

• New working directory locationsare not saved upon exitingPro/ENGINEER.

Working Directory Common Folder

Set Working Directory in Folder Tree

Set Working Directory File Menu

Working Directory TheoryThe working directory is the designated location for opening and savingfiles. Typically, the default working directory is the directory from whichPro/ENGINEER is started. However, there are three methods to define anew working directory:• From the Folder Tree or Browser — Right-click the folder that is to be thenew working directory and select Set Working Directory.

• From the File menu — Click File > Set Working Directory and browse toand select the directory that is to be the new working directory. Click OK.

• From the File Open dialog box - Right-click the folder that is to be the newworking directory and select Set Working Directory.

You can browse directly to the working directory at any time byselecting theWorking Directory common folder from the Navigator.

The new working directory setting is not saved upon exitingPro/ENGINEER.

Opening FilesYou can use any of the following methods to open a file:


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Browse to the desired folder using the Navigator (either with CommonFolders or through the Folder Tree) to display its contents in the browser.Then, you can either double-click the file in the file list, or right-click thefile in the file list and select Open.

• You can also drag the file from the file list onto the graphics window.

• Click File > Open from the main menu or Open from the main toolbarand the File Open dialog box appears. Browse to the file, select it, andeither double-click it or click Open.

The File Open dialog box is the equivalent of the Navigator andBrowser combination in the main interface.

Saving FilesYou can use any of the following methods to save a file:• Click File > Save from the main menu.• Click Save from the main toolbar. By default, a file is saved to thecurrent working directory. However, if a file is retrieved from a directoryother than the working directory and then saved, the file saves to thedirectory from which it was retrieved.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Setting the Working Directory andOpening and Saving Files

ScenarioSet the working directory, and open and save a file.

Task 1: Set the working directory, open a file, and then save it.

1. In the Folder Browser , clickWorking Directory .• Click Folder Tree to expand it.• Expand the Intro_ProE_WF4folder and double-clickModule_03 to view itscontents in the Browser.

• Right-click the Sample_Topicfolder and select Set WorkingDirectory.

For each exercise inthis course, the workingdirectory to be set isspecified in the header atthe top.

2. In the Browser, double-clickSample_Topic to view itscontents.• Select NUT.PRT.• Click Preview to open thepreview window.

• Double-click NUT.PRT to openit.

3. Click Save from the main toolbar.• Click OK.

4. Click Close Window from the main menu.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Set a new working directory, open a new model, and then save it.

1. In the Folder Tree, expand theSample_Topic folder.

2. Right-click Sample_Subfolderand select Set WorkingDirectory.

3. Double-click Sample_Subolderto view its contents in theBrowser.

4. Double-click SCREW.PRT toopen it.

5. Click the Folder Browser .

6. In the Folder Tree, right-clickthe Sample_Topic folder andselect Set Working Directory.

7. Click Save .• Notice that even though theworking directory is set toSample_Topic, the file issaved to Sample_Subfolder.

• Click OK.

8. Click Close Window fromthe main toolbar.

9. Close the Folder Tree in the Folder Browser .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Managing Files in Pro/ENGINEERPro/ENGINEER is a memory-based system.

An object in system memory is InSession.Erasing Memory (RAM)• Erase — Current• Erase — Not DisplayedVersion Numbers are increased byone each time you save the model.Deleting Models• Delete — All Versions• Delete — Old VersionsRenaming Models• Rename — On Disk and InSession

• Rename — In Session

In Session in the Folder Browserand File Open Dialog Box

The Rename Dialog BoxModel Versions

Understanding In Session Memory and Erasing Models from ItPro/ENGINEER Wildfire is a memory-based system, which means that filesyou create and edit are stored within system memory (RAM) while you areworking on them. It is important to remember that until you save your files,you risk losing them if there is a power outage or system crash. When amodel is in system memory, it is referred to as being In Session.Models are stored In Session (in system memory, or RAM) until you eithererase them or exit Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire. When you close the window thatcontains a model, the model is still In Session. This is especially importantif you are working on files that have the same name but are in variousstages of completion, such as in this course. Both the Folder Browser andFile Open dialog boxes have an icon that will cause only models In Sessionto be displayed.There are two different methods to erase models from session:• Current — Only the model in the current window is erased from systemmemory (and the window closed). You can click File > Erase > Current


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

from the main menu to erase the current window’s contents from systemmemory.

• Not Displayed — Only erases from system memory those models thatare not found in any Pro/ENGINEER windows. You can click Erase NotDisplayed from the main toolbar or you can click File > Erase > NotDisplayed from the main menu.

Erasing models does not delete them from the hard drive or network storagearea; it only removes them from that session.

Understanding Version NumbersEvery time you save an object, you write it to disk. Rather than overwritingthe current file on disk, the system creates a new version of the file on diskand gives it a version number that increments each time the file is saved.This is also known as a dot number, and can be seen in the lower-right figure.

Deleting ModelsDeleting files permanently removes them from the working directory on yourhard drive or network storage area. Be careful when deleting files; youcannot undo deleted files.There are two different methods to delete models:• Old Versions — The system deletes all but the latest version of the givenfile.

• All Versions — The system delete all versions of the given file.

Renaming ModelsIf you need to edit the name of any model, you can rename it from directlywithin Pro/ENGINEER.There are two different methods to rename models:• On Disk and In Session — The system renames the file both in systemmemory and on the hard drive.

• In Session — The system renames the file only in system memory.

Problems can result if you rename a file on disk and then retrievea model (not already in session) that depends on the previous filename; for example, a part cannot be found for an assembly.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Managing Files in Pro/ENGINEER

ScenarioErase files from memory and rename a part.

Managing_Files drill_bit_1.prt

Task 1: Open and close files to understand the In Session concept.

1. With DRILL_BIT_1.PRT already

open, click Folder Browserfrom the top of the model tree.

2. Click Working Directoryto view the working directorycontents in the Browser.

3. In the Browser, double-clickDRILL_BIT_2.PRT to open it.

4. Click Close Windowfrom the main toolbar toclose the window containingDRILL_BIT_2.PRT. This leavesDRILL_BIT_1.PRT still open.

5. Resize the Browser window ifnecessary by dragging the sashcontrol.

6. Click Folder Browser fromthe top of the model tree.

7. In the Folder Browser, click InSession to view in sessioncontents in the Browser.• Right-click DRILL_BIT_2.PRTand select Open.

8. Click Close Window fromthe main toolbar.

9. Click Erase Not Displayedfrom the main toolbar.

10. Click OK from the Erase NotDisplayed dialog box to eraseDRILL_BIT_2.PRT from systemmemory.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. Click Folder Browser fromthe top of the model tree.

12. Click In Session from theFolder Browser. Notice thatDRILL_BIT_2.PRT is no longerin session memory.

13. Close the Browser by clickingthe sash control.

Task 2: Rename DRILL_BIT_1.PRT and erase it from session.

1. Click File > Rename from themain menu.

2. In the Rename dialog box, editthe new name to DRILL_BIT_3.

3. Verify that the Rename ondisk and in session option isselected.

4. Click OK to complete therename.

5. Click OK from the RenameSuccess dialog box.

6. Click Close Window .

7. Click Erase Not Displayedfrom the main toolbar.

8. Click OK from the Erase NotDisplayed dialog box.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Basic Display Options

Datum Display Options

Display is controlled independentlyfor the following datum options:• Datum Planes• Datum Axes• Datum Points• Coordinate Systems

There are four different modeldisplay options:• Shaded• No Hidden• Hidden Line• Wireframe

Repaint redraws the screen.

Model Display Options

Setting Datum DisplayDatum entities are 2-D reference geometry that you use for building featuregeometry, orienting models, dimensioning, measuring, and assembling.There are four main datum types:• Datum Planes• Datum Axes• Datum Points• Coordinate SystemsThe display of each of these datum types is controlled independently by usingthe following icons on the main toolbar:

• Plane Display — Enable/Disable datum plane display.

• Axis Display — Enable/Disable datum axis display.

• Point Display — Enable/Disable datum point display.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Csys Display — Enable/Disable datum coordinate system display.

The initial datum display for a given exercise is included afterthe specified file to be used for that exercise. For example,

means that you should display datum planesonly, and that you should not display datum axes, datum points,and datum coordinate systems.

Setting Model DisplayThere are four different 3-D model display options in the graphics window:

• Shading — The model is shaded according to the view orientation.Hidden lines are not visible in shaded view display.

• No hidden — Hidden lines in the model are not displayed.

• Hidden line — Hidden lines in the model are displayed, by default, in aslightly darker color than visible lines.

• Wireframe — Hidden lines are displayed as regular lines. That is,all lines are the same color.

In the lower-right figure, the same model is displayed in four different ways.Clockwise from the top left, the display is Shaded, No Hidden, Wireframe,and Hidden Line.

Repainting the ScreenYou can repaint a view to remove all temporarily displayed information.Repainting redraws the screen, and is done either by clicking View > Repaint

from the main menu or Repaint from the main toolbar.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Understanding Basic Display Options

ScenarioEdit the datum entity display and model display.

Basic_Display basic_display.prt

Task 1: Edit the datum display.

1. Click Axis Display , Point

Display , and Csys Display

from the main toolbar todisable their display.

2. Click Plane Display fromthe main toolbar to disable theirdisplay.

3. Click Axis Display fromthe main toolbar to enable theirdisplay.

4. Click Axis Display todisable their display.

5. Click Point Display toenable their display.

6. Click Point Display todisable their display.

7. Click Csys Display toenable their display.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

8. Click Csys Display todisable their display.

Task 2: Edit the model display.

1. Click No hidden from themain toolbar.

2. Click Hidden line .

3. Click Wireframe .

4. Click Shading .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Basic 3-D OrientationManipulate the 3-D orientation of your design models in thePro/ENGINEER Wildfire graphics window.

3-D Orientations using the Keyboard andMouse

Keyboard/MouseOrientation:• Spin• Pan• Zoom• Turn• Wheel Zoom

Additional OrientationOptions:• Previous• Refit• Saved View List• Spin Center

The Spin Center

Orientation using Keyboard and Mouse CombinationsTo view a model in a specific orientation, you can spin, pan, and zoom themodel using a combination of keyboard and mouse functions. For eachorientation, you press and hold a key and click the appropriate mouse button,as shown in the following table.

Orientation Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Spin

Pan


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


Zoom

Turn

Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function usesthe cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scrollwheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using thescroll wheel, as shown in the following table:

Zoom Level Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Zoom

Fine Zoom

Coarse Zoom

Additional Orientation OptionsIn addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the followingadditional model orientation options are available:• Previous— Reverts the model to the previously displayed orientation byclicking View > Orientation > Previous.

• Refit — Refits the entire model in the graphics window.

• Named View List — Displays a list of saved view orientationsavailable for a given model. Select the name of the desired saved view,and the model reorients to the selected view.

• Spin Center — Enables and disables the spin center. When enabled,the model spins about the location of the spin center. When disabled, themodel spins about the location of the mouse pointer. Disabling the spincenter can be useful when orienting a long model, like a shaft.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation

ScenarioPractice using saved views, the spin center, and basic keyboard and mousemodel orientation.

Basic_3D_Orientation orient.asm

Task 1: Use saved views.

1. Click Named View List fromthe main toolbar and select TOP.

2. Click Named View List andselect LEFT.

3. Click Named View List andselect Default Orientation.

Task 2: Use the spin center.

1. Middle-click and drag to spin the assembly.2. Spin the assembly again in a different direction.3. Spin the assembly in a third direction.

The assembly is spinning about the spin center.

4. Click Named View List and select Standard Orientation.

5. Click Spin Center from the main toolbar to disable it.

6. Cursor over the lower portionof the assembly, near theCHUCK_2.PRT, and spin theassembly.

7. Click View > Orientation >Previous from the main menu.

8. Cursor over the upper portionof the assembly and spin theassembly. Notice that the centerof rotation is the cursor location.

9. Click Spin Center from themain toolbar to enable it.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 3: Pan the assembly.

1. Press and hold SHIFT, thenmiddle-click and drag to pan theassembly.

2. Click Named View List andselect Standard Orientation.

Task 4: Turn the assembly.

1. Press and hold CTRL, thenmiddle-click and drag to theleft to turn the assemblycounter-clockwise.

2. Press and hold CTRL, thenmiddle-click and drag to the rightto turn the assembly clockwise.


Task 5: Zoom in and out of the assembly.

1. Press and hold CTRL, then middle-click and drag upward to zoomout.

2. Press and hold CTRL, then middle-click and drag downward to zoomin.

3. If your mouse is equipped with a wheel:• Roll the mouse wheel away from you to zoom out.• Roll the mouse wheel towards you to zoom in.• Press and hold CTRL, then roll the mouse wheel away from you tocoarsely zoom out.

• Press and hold SHIFT, then roll the mouse wheel towards from youto finely zoom in.


5. Cursor over the hole next to theteeth. Press and hold CTRL,then middle-click and dragdownward to zoom in to the hole.

6. Click Refit from the main toolbar to refit the model.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding the View ManagerThe view manager is a powerful content-sensitive dialog boxthat enables you to edit how a model displays in the graphicswindow.

Use the view manager to createand manage:• View orientations• Style states• Cross-sections• Explode states

The View Manager

Understanding the View ManagerThe view manager is a powerful content-sensitive dialog box that enablesyou to edit how a model displays in the graphics window. The view managercontains numerous tabs that enable you to create and manage the following:• View orientations• Style states• Cross-sections• Explode statesSome important facts about the view manager include:• The active item is indicated by a red arrow next to its name. In the figure,the active view orientation is the Front.

• A plus sign after the name of the active item indicates that it has changed.You can either save the modified item to capture what has changed, ordouble-click it or another item to dismiss the changes. In the figure, vieworientation Front has been modified from how it was saved.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating and Managing View OrientationsYou can create and edit view orientations using the ViewManager and Orientation dialog boxes.

Orientation Dialog Box• Orient by reference.• Two references and two directionsrequired.

Typical TOP View Orientation

Typical LEFT View Orientation Typical FRONT View Orientation

Saved View Orientation TheoryA model displays in a certain view orientation when it is first created andany time it is retrieved. In addition to using mouse and keyboard methodsto orient a model, you can create predefined view orientations and savethem as part of the model. This enables you to set the model orientation in arepeatable, consistent manner for company standards, drawing creation, andquick navigation. Not only does a saved view capture the model’s orientation,it also captures the model’s level of zoom in the graphics window.

Creating a New View OrientationYou can create a new view orientation using the view manager or theOrientation dialog box. When you create a new view orientation, a defaultname is created for your view. If desired, you can edit the view name. Thenew view orientation is automatically created at the current model orientation.You can edit the view orientation by redefining it. The Orientation dialog box


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

enables you to specifically define your model orientation, compared to usingkeyboard and mouse functions, which are more approximate.

The view orientations that display in the Orient tab of the viewmanager are the same as those that are displayed in the Named

View List and Orientation dialog box.

Orient by ReferenceOne method of changing the model orientation in the Orientation dialog box isto Orient by Reference. The Orient by Reference option enables you to selectreferences by which to orient the model. Two directions and two referencesare required to orient a model.You can click Undo from the Orientation dialog box to undo any changes youmade. The model returns to its most current view state.

Creating View Orientations in the Orientation Dialog BoxYou can click Reorient from the main toolbar to open the Orientationdialog box directly. This method will display the saved views directly insideof the dialog box. Therefore, you can Orient by Reference and save a newview orientation directly within the dialog box, which is an alternative to usingthe view manager.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing View Orientations

ScenarioCreate and access saved view orientations.

Manage_Orient manage_orient.asm

Task 1: Create view orientations with the view manager.

1. Orient the model.

2. Start the View Managerfrom the main toolbar.• Select the Orient tab and clickNew.

• Edit the name to 3D-1 andpress ENTER.

3. In the view manager, double-click Default Orientation, thendouble-click 3D-1.

4. Zoom in on the assembly.5. In the view manager, click New.

• Edit the Orientation nameto CONN_ROD and pressENTER.

• Click Close.

Task 2: Create view orientations with the Reorient dialog box.

1. Click Named View List and select Default Orientation.

2. Click Reorient from themain toolbar.

3. Select the surface in the upperfigure as Reference 1.

4. Select the surface in the lowerfigure as Reference 2.

5. Edit the Reference 2 directionfrom Top to Left.

6. Spin the assembly as necessaryand select the surface in thelower figure again as Reference2.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. In the Orientation dialog box,expand the Saved Views area ifnecessary.• In the Name field, type thename of the saved view asCYL_HOLE.

• Click Save and OK.

Task 3: Redefine view orientations with the view manager.

1. Click View Manager .• Double-click 3D-1.

2. Orient the model.3. In the view manager, right-click

on 3D-1 and click Save.4. Click OK from the Save Display

Elements dialog box.

5. In the view manager,double-click CYL_HOLE.• Right-click CYL_HOLE andselect Redefine.

6. Orient the assembly.7. Select the surface shown in

the upper figure as the newReference 1.• In the graphics window, selectthe surface shown in the lowerfigure as the new Reference 2.

• Click OK from the Orientationdialog box.

8. Click Close from the viewmanager.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Style States using the View ManagerCreate a style state in an assembly to capture components invarious displays and visibilities.

• Style states are only in assemblies.• Show or blank models.• Set individual model display (shaded, transparent, wireframe, hiddenline, no hidden).

Style State Example

Style States TheoryA style state is a captured state of component display and visibility in anassembly. Component display and visibility are varied independently of othercomponents in two ways:• Determine whether a component is shown — You can blank, or turn off, thedisplay of any component in an assembly.

• Set the model display — You can set one component to be displayed asshaded, while another can be displayed as wireframe, and still another canbe displayed as no hidden.

Creating a Style StateTo create a new style state, click New in the Style tab of the view manager. Ifdesired, edit the default style name and press ENTER. The Edit dialog boxopens, enabling you to blank (or, in other words, turn off) components fromthe graphics window. You can select components either from the graphicswindow or from the model tree. You can also select the Show tab and thenset the method of model display. As you select components, their modeldisplay changes to the method currently selected in the Edit dialog box.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

As you define component visibilities and displays, the model tree displayswhich settings have been specified for the components. When you finishcreating the style state, the graphics window displays the name of the stylestate.You can also create style states by first editing component displays, and thencapturing the displays in a style state.There are two default style states in every assembly: Default Style andMaster Style. The Master Style cannot be modified, but the Default Stylecan be modified.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Style States using the ViewManager

ScenarioCreate style states.

Style_States style_states.asm

Task 1: Create a style state using the view manager.

1. In the graphics window, selectthe CYLINDER_4.PRT.

2. In the main menu, click View >Display Style > No Hidden.

3. Start the View Managerfrom the main toolbar.

4. In the view manager, select theStyle tab.• Right-click Master Style andselect Save.

5. In the Save Display Elementsdialog box, edit the Style nameto CYL_NO_HIDDEN and clickOK.

6. In the view manager, double-click Master Style.• Double-click CYL_NO_HIDDEN.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Create another style state based on the CYL_NO_HIDDEN stylestate.

1. In the graphics window, pressand hold CTRL and select theENG_BLOCK_FRONT_4.PRTandENG_BLOCK_REAR_4.PRT.

2. Click View > Display Style> Transparent from the mainmenu.

3. In the view manager, right-clickCYL_NO_HIDDEN and selectSave.

4. In the Save Display Elementsdialog box, edit the Style nameto CASTINGS_TRANSPARENTand click OK.

5. In the view manager,double-click Master Style.

6. Click Close.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Basic Color and AppearanceOptionsYou can change the color and appearance of your models inPro/ENGINEER.

• Pro/ENGINEER assigns a default color.• Company-standard appearance file is common.• An appearance consists of both color and transparency.• Assign appearances to parts, surfaces, or components.

Dark Blue Color Assigned to SurfaceDark Blue Transparent Color

Assignment

Color and Appearance TheoryA new model is assigned a greyish-blue, solid appearance by default. Theappearance palette can be used to set a new appearance for an entire model,surface, or component in an assembly. The appearance palette contains alist of user-defined colors that a company typically creates and distributes asa standard. Your company-specific appearance palette is usually loadedautomatically as the default palette when you launch Pro/ENGINEER.

Creating a New AppearanceAn appearance consists of both color and transparency. You can create yourown appearances and select the color and level of transparency for eachusing the Appearance Editor. Select the new color either by entering the RGBvalues or by selecting the color from the Color Wheel. Edit the transparencyfrom Opaque to Clear, or any percentage in between.

Assigning a New AppearanceOnce an appearance has been created, it can be assigned to entire partmodels, part surfaces, or components in an assembly. If an appearance isassigned to a part at the assembly level, the appearance is saved in thecontext of the assembly and does not change the appearance of the partat the part level.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Understanding Basic Color andAppearance OptionsScenarioCreate appearances and apply them.

Color_Appear appearance.asm

Task 1: Create a basic and transparent appearance.

1. Click View > Color andAppearance from the mainmenu.

2. In the Appearance Editordialog box, select the upper-leftappearance sphere, ref_color1.• Click + to copy the ref_color1appearance.

• Edit the new appearancename to MyColor1 and pressENTER.

3. Click the blue color rectangle to edit the color.• Expand the color wheel, RGB, or HSV sections and either select acolor or drag the sliders.

• Edit the RGB colors to 127, 137, and 145, respectively.• Click Close.

4. In the Appearance Editor dialog box, select the upper-left appearancesphere, ref_color1.• Click + to copy the ref_color1 appearance.• Edit the appearance name to MyColor2 and press ENTER.• Select the Advanced tab.• Drag the Transparency slider to 70 and click Close.

Task 2: Change a part appearance.

1. In the graphics window, select CHUCK_5.PRT.2. Right-click and select Open.3. Click View > Color and Appearance.4. Select the MyColor1 appearance and click Apply.

5. Click Close.

6. Click Close Window to viewthe new part appearance in theassembly.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 3: Change a surface appearance.

1. In the graphics window, select CHUCK_COLLAR_5.PRT.2. Right-click and select Open.

3. Click View > Color and Appearance.• Select the Black appearance.• Select Surfaces from the assignment drop-down list.

4. Press and hold CTRL, and selectthe four surfaces shown.

5. Click OK from the Select dialogbox.

6. Click Apply from theAppearance Editor dialogbox and click Close.

7. Click Close Window to viewthe new part surface appearancein the assembly.

Task 4: Change a component appearance.

1. Click View > Color andAppearance.• Select MyColor2.• Select Components from theassignment drop-down list.

• Press and hold CTRL and se-lect GEARBOX_REAR_5.PRTandGEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT.


3. Click Apply from theAppearance Editor dialogbox.• Click Close.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Setting Up New Part ModelsYour company can create customized templates that can beused to create new part models.

New Part Created using Template

Create new parts using the Newdialog box.

Use customized part templates.

Part templates include:• Datums• Layers• Units• Parameters• View Orientations

Examples of Parameters

Layers Created from Part Template

Creating New PartsCreate new part models within Pro/ENGINEER either by using File > New,or clicking New . You type the name of the part and select whether youwant to use a default template or not use a template. Unless you select theEmpty template, the new part will display in the graphics window with somedefault datum features.

Using TemplatesNew models should be created using a template. Your company will likelyhave created customized templates to be used. Using a template to create anew model is beneficial because it means that, regardless of who created it,the model will contain the same consistent set of information, including:• Datums - Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and defaultcoordinate system, all named appropriately.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Layers - When every model contains the same layers, management of boththe layers and items on the layer is easier.

• Units - Most companies have a company standard for units in their models.Creating every model with the same set of units ensures that no mistakesare made.

• Parameters - Every model can have the same standard metadatainformation.

• View Orientations - Having every model contain the same standard vieworientations aids the modeling process.

Creating ParametersParameters are metadata information that can be included in a modeltemplate or created by a user in his own part or assembly. Parameters areimportant because they enable you to add additional information into part andassembly models. Parameters have several uses:• Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be drivenby relations.

• Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, theparameter Cost might have a different value for each instance.

• Parameter values can be reported in drawings, or viewed with datamanagement tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions.

• User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, orcomponent) or to a feature or pattern.

You can create parameters that accept the following types of values:• Real Number - Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667, 10.5E3,and PI.

• Integer - Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257.• String - Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (lettersor numbers).

• Yes/No - Accepts either the YES or NO value.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Setting Up New Part Models

ScenarioCreate new part models.

New_Part_Models Create New

Task 1: Create a new part using the default template.

1. Click File > New from the mainmenu.• Select Part as the Type andSolid as the Sub-type.

• Edit the Name to NEW_PART.• Notice that the Use defaulttemplate check box isselected.

• Click OK.2. Explore the default datum

features created in the graphicswindow and model tree.

3. In the model tree, click Show > Layer Tree. Notice the default layers.

4. Click Edit > Setup from the mainmenu.

5. Click Units from the menumanager. Notice the units thatare set.

6. Click Close.

7. Click Tools > Parameters from the main menu.8. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter

Value field.• Edit the value to NEW PART and press ENTER.• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED.• Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default value of NO.• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PART_NUMBER.• Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289.• Click OK.

9. Click Named View List . Notice the default view orientations.

10. Click Named View List again to close it.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Create a new part by selecting a different template.

1. Click New from the maintoolbar.• Edit the Name toSELECT_TEMPLATE.


• Click OK.2. In the New File Options dialog

box, select the inlbs_part_solidtemplate.• Click OK.

3. Again, notice the datum features.

4. Click Edit > Setup.5. Click Units. Notice the units that

are set.6. Click Close.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module4Selecting and Editing

Module OverviewBefore you can edit design models or create new features on models, youhave to be able to select within Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire. Selection enablesyou to choose features, geometry in a part model, or components in anassembly. Once a selection is made, you can perform a variety of operationsincluding editing. Editing enables you to modify not only dimensions ofexisting design models or features, but you can also edit shape, size,location, and visibility.In this module, you learn the different ways to select different items inPro/ENGINEER as well as understand the feedback the system provides youboth before and after item selection.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand the basic Pro/ENGINEER mouse controls, keyboard shortcuts,and color feedback.

• Understand the purpose of the model tree, its basic columns, and availabledisplay filters.

• Select items using Direct Selection, Query Selection, and the Search Tool.• Filter the selection of items using Selection Filters.• Select edge chains and surface sets manually.• Activate, edit, hide/unhide, suppress/resume, delete, and regeneratemodels and features.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Basic ControlsThe graphics window provides you with color-based feedback tomouse and keyboard inputs.

System Color Assignments in thegraphics window:• Cyan — Preselection Highlight• Red — Selected Geometry• Yellow — Preview Geometry

Keyboard and mouse actionsperform different functions:• Cursor Over (Highlight)• Query to Next Item• Select• Clear Selection

Preselection Highlighting

Preview Geometry Selected Geometry

Understanding Color-Based FeedbackPro/ENGINEER provides you with color-based feedback during variousoperations you are performing on models in the graphics window. Thefollowing list explains the system color assignments:• Cyan: Preselection Highlighting — When you cursor over a model or anarea of a model, various geometry will outline in the cyan color. This iscalled Preselection Highlighting, which is an indicator of what would beselected if you were to click that location.

• Red: Selected Geometry — Once you cursor over and select geometry, itchanges to red.

• Yellow: Preview Geometry — New geometry in a model displays in yellow,enabling you to preview the completed model. In an assembly, a newcomponent being assembled displays in light yellow and once it is fullyconstrained displays in darker yellow. This yellow preview color is verybeneficial; it provides you feedback when you create valid geometry duringcreation.

These same three colors apply for both features created in a partand components in an assembly.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Mouse and Keyboard Controls for Making SelectionsDifferent combinations of keyboard and mouse controls enable you to usedifferent methods to make different selections. The following table displaysthe keyboard and mouse selections that comprise various selection types:

Selection Type Keyboard and MouseSelection

Preselection Highlighting (Cyan color) Over Geometry

Query to Next Item (Feature orComponent Beneath) Until Highlighted

Select Highlighted Geometry (Redcolor)

Add or Remove Items from Selection

Select Range of Geometry (Chain / SetSelection)

Clear Selection On Background


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using Drag HandlesDrag handles are graphical objects used to manipulate geometryor components during creation or redefinition in real time.

Drag handles are used to:• Resize geometry.• Reorient geometry.• Move geometry.• Reference geometry.• Adjust component offset.• Access context-sensitive rightmouse button options.

Dragging Piston Extrude Depth

Adjusting Piston Pin ComponentOffset Dragging Copied Ring Groove Cut

Drag Handle TheoryDrag handles are small, white squares that display in the graphics window.These graphical objects are used to manipulate geometry during creationor redefinition in real time. Using your mouse, drag the handles to resize,reorient, move feature geometry in a model, or reference geometry. In anassembly, drag the handle to adjust component offset. Your changes displaydynamically in the graphics window. Right-click a drag handle to accesscontext-sensitive menu options.You can use various keyboard and mouse combinations to modify how thedrag handle is used. The following table displays dragging options comprisedof various keyboard and mouse combinations on a drag handle.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Dragging Option Keyboard and MouseSelection

Adjust Drag Handle — Resize, reorient,move, and reference geometry; adjustcomponent offset.

Snap Drag Handle — Referencegeometry such as a datum plane, edge,point, vertex, or surface.

Access context-sensitive menu options.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using Keyboard ShortcutsKeyboard shortcuts are used to quickly perform commonly usedfunctions.

The CTRL Key

Keyboard shortcuts can be used for:• Common file operations• Common edit operations• Common view operations

Keyboard and Mouse

Keyboard Shortcuts TheoryYou can use various keyboard shortcuts to quickly perform commonly usedfunctions. Keyboard shortcuts facilitate a more efficient experience in theuser-interface by eliminating the need to move the mouse to make icon ormenu selections.Except for the Delete operation, all keyboard shortcuts use the CTRLkey on your keyboard in conjunction with another letter key. There arekeyboard shortcuts for various areas of Pro/ENGINEER usage, including fileoperations, edit operations, and view operations.The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various file operations.

Keyboard Shortcut File Operation

CTRL + N New

CTRL + O Open

CTRL + S Save

The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various edit operations.

Keyboard Shortcut Edit Operation

CTRL + G Regenerate


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Keyboard Shortcut Edit Operation

CTRL + F Find, or Search

DEL Delete

CTRL + C Copy

CTRL + V Paste

CTRL + Z Undo

CTRL + Y Redo

The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various view operations.

Keyboard Shortcut View Operation

CTRL + R Repaint

CTRL + D Reorient to Standard View


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding the Model TreeThe model tree lists the features in a model, in the order in whichthey were created. The model tree also displays the order of theparts and sub-assemblies in an assembly.

The Model Tree

Model tree basics:• Visualize model features• Visualize feature order• Selection• Editing

Show options:• Layer/Model tree• Expand/Collapse all• Preselection highlighting• Highlight geometry

Layer Tree andOther ShowOptions

Model Tree BasicsThe model tree is part of the Navigator window and, by default, displays alongthe left side of the main interface. When you open a part model, assembly, ordrawing, the Navigator automatically changes its display to the model tree.The model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in theorder created as well as the display status (hidden/unhidden, suppressed)of those features and components. The model tree can also be customizedto display other information.The model tree can be used in the following ways:• Visualize model features/assembly components — The model tree displaysall features that comprise a model. For assemblies, the model tree alsodisplays the components that comprise that assembly, as well as theassembly constraints for each assembled component.

• Visualize feature order/component assembly order — A model’s featuresare displayed in the order in which they were created, from top to bottom.Similarly, an assembly’s components are displayed in the order in whichthey were assembled, from top to bottom.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Selection — Selecting a feature or component in the model tree causesthat feature or component to become selected in the graphics window.

• Editing — The model tree can be used to edit features or components,their display, or their name.

Since the model tree is part of the Navigator, it has a sash that can controlthe width or whether the model tree window is open or closed. The sashcontrol can be seen in the top image of the slide.

Model Tree Show OptionsThe Show menu is located at the top of the model tree, as shown in the topfigure on the slide. The Show menu contains the following options:• Layer/Model Tree — Shown in the left side of the lower image on theslide, this option toggles the model tree to the layer tree so that all layersassociated with a model, assembly, or drawing are displayed. If the layertree is displayed and the Show menu is selected, the Layer Tree menuselection is replaced by the Model Tree menu selection.

• Expand All — Fully expands every branch within the model tree andmechanism tree.

• Collapse All — Fully collapses every branch within the model tree andmechanism tree.

• Preselection Highlighting — Toggles on or off preselection highlighting. Ifon, when you cursor over an item in the model tree it is preselected inthe graphics window.

• Highlight Geometry — Toggles on or off Highlight Geometry. If on, whenyou select an item the model tree it is also selected (in red) in the graphicswindow.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Renaming ObjectsRename objects to more descriptive names so that they areeasily recognized in the model tree.

Objects that can be renamed include:• Features• Components• Detail Items• Other

Features Before and After Rename

The Rename Dialog Box andName Setup Menu Connecting Rod

Renaming FeaturesWhen you create a feature in a part model, it is automatically assigned ageneric name based on its type. For example, the feature may be called“Sketch 1” or “Extrude 2”, or “Revolve 3”. While these names describe thetype of feature, they do not describe what the feature is in the context of thedesign. Consequently, it can be helpful to rename the feature to somethingmore descriptive. The top-right image in the slide shows the model treebefore and after feature renaming has occurred. You can see that the modeltree is more intuitive once the features have been renamed to a descriptivename. It is much easier to find a feature that needs to be edited.You can rename model features by using either of the following methods:• Select the feature in the model tree or graphics window, then right-click andselect Rename from either the graphics window or model tree.

• Select the feature to be renamed in the model tree. Once selected, select itagain from the model tree.

Names can contain up to 31 characters and may not include spaces.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Renaming ComponentsTo avoid assembly failures, you must rename components within the contextof the assembly instead of using Windows Explorer to rename componentson the hard drive.You can rename components by using either of the following methods:• On Disk and In Session — The system renames the component both insystem memory and on the hard drive.

• In Session — The system renames the component only in system memory.Click File > Rename from the main menu to rename components. Within theRename dialog box, shown in the lower-left figure, you can click CommandsAnd Settings , and then select the component to be renamed from eitherthe model tree or graphics window. You can also rename the assembly inthis dialog box. In fact, this is the default item to be renamed when thisdialog box appears.

Renaming Detail ItemsClick Edit > Setup from the main menu. Then, click Name > Detail Item fromthe menu manager to rename detail items like surface finish symbols andgeometric tolerances.

Renaming Other ItemsClick Edit > Setup from the main menu. Then, click Name > Other from themenu manager to rename a variety of other items, including:• Datum axes that were created as part of another feature, such as a hole.• Curve segments that make up composite curves.• Datum points.• Surface features.• Feature edges.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Model Tree FiltersUse model tree filters to control both item and feature typedisplay.

Model Tree Items Dialog Box

Model Tree Features Filter Beforeand After

Model Tree Used SketchesBefore and After

Model Tree with SuppressedObjects Turned On

Model Tree Filters TheoryThe model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in theorder created. You can filter what is displayed in the model tree both interms of item display and feature types. The filtering of item display andfeature types is controlled by the Model Tree Items dialog box, shown in thetop-left image in the slide. Open the Model Tree Items dialog box by clickingSettings > Tree Filters from the top of the model tree.The filters applied to the model tree are unique to each window except in thecase of assemblies, where applied filters only propagate to sub-assembliesof assemblies.

Controlling Model Tree Item DisplayThe display of the following specific types of items is controlled on the leftside of the Model Tree Items dialog box:


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Features — The top-right image on the slide shows the model tree with thedisplay of features turned on and off. Notice that when features are turnedoff, they are turned off in both the assembly and part levels of the modeltree. When features are turned off in the assembly, you can only see thecomponents that are assembled, but nothing more granular.

• Placement folders — Toggles the display of component placementconstraints within assembly components.

• Annotations — Toggles the display of annotations.• Suppressed Objects — Toggles the display of suppressed features andcomponents. Suppressed objects in the model tree are preceded with ablack square. In the bottom-right image on the slide, the EDGE_ROUNDSand LUBE_HOLE features are suppressed. If the display of suppressedobjects was turned off, these two features would not be visible in the modeltree.

• Incomplete Objects — Toggles the display of incomplete features.• Excluded Objects — Toggles the display of excluded components.• Blanked Objects — Toggles the display of blanked mold/cast components.• Envelope Components — Toggles the display of envelope components.• Copied References — Toggles the display of copied references.

Controlling Model Tree Feature Types DisplayThe display of feature types is a more granular method of determining whichlevel of feature display you want. In the Feature Types section of the ModelTree Items dialog box, you can control specifically which features to displayor not display in the model tree:• Datum Planes• Datum Axes• Curves• Datum Points• Coordinate Systems• Rounds• Auto Round Members• Cosmetics• Sketches• Used Sketches - Used sketch features are those sketches that are usedin another feature, like an Extrude or Revolve feature. When a sketch isused it is automatically changed to a hidden status, as shown in the lowerleft figure in the slide.

Saving Model Tree DisplayThe model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. ClickSettings > Save Settings File from the top of the model tree to savethe current model tree display. The default save location is the workingdirectory, and the default settings file name is tree.cfg. You can configurePro/ENGINEER to always consider tree.cfg as the default model tree display.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Basic Model Tree ColumnsAdd additional columns of information to the model tree display.

Adding Columns to the Model Tree

Basic information columns that canbe added include:• Feat #• Feat ID

Viewing Added Columns inthe Model Tree

Basic Model Tree Columns TheoryYou can add informational columns to the model tree, including:• Feat # — Displays the feature number of each feature in the model tree.The first feature created in a model is feature number one, and eachconsecutive feature is assigned an ascending integer increment.

• Feat ID — Displays the feature ID of each feature in the model tree. Thefeature ID is a unique number that is assigned by Pro/ENGINEER to eachfeature that is created.

The information displayed in these columns can be obtained using othermethods, but this particular method ensures that it is always displayeddirectly with no querying required. You can add other informational columnsin addition to Feat # and Feat ID. In addition, you can add other columntypes of information including model parameters, feature parameters, layerinformation, and mass property information. You access the Model TreeColumns dialog box by clicking Settings > Tree Columns from the top of the


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

model tree. The order of column display and the width of a displayed columncan be changed in the Model Tree Columns dialog box.The columns displayed in the model tree are unique to each window exceptin the case of assemblies, where displayed model tree columns propagate tosub-assemblies of assemblies.

Saving Model Tree Column DisplayThe model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. Onceyou have added the desired columns to the model tree, click Settings >Save Settings File from the top of the model tree. The default save locationis the working directory, and the default settings file name is tree.cfg. Youcan configure Pro/ENGINEER to always consider tree.cfg as the defaultmodel tree display.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Selecting Items using Direct SelectionDirect selection occurs when you place the mouse cursor over afeature or component and click to select.

You can direct select:• Components• Features

You can perform direct selection in:• The graphics window• The model tree

Select multiple items using CTRL.

Multiple ways to de-select.

The CTRL Key

Select Components in Model Treeor Graphics Window

Select Features in Model Tree orGraphics Window

Direct Selection TheoryAfter selecting features, geometry, or components in a model, assembly, ordrawing, you are able to make modifications to the selected items. Directselection is one of the three basic methods of selection.Direct selection occurs when you place your mouse cursor over a feature orcomponent and click to select it. Some key factors about direct selectioninclude:• You can perform direct selection on both components in an assembly andfeatures in a model.

• You can perform direct selection in both the graphics window on a modelor assembly, and in the model tree. When you initially cursor over amodel in the Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire graphics window, the component orfeature preselects in the cyan color. When you select the item, it becomeshighlighted in red.The selected item is dependent on whether you have a part assemblyopen. If you have a part open, a selected feature highlights in a redwireframe. If you have an assembly open, the selected componenthighlights in a red wireframe.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• You can select multiple items by using the CTRL key.• You can de-select components or features three different ways:– Press CTRL and click the selected item again.– Select the graphics window background.– Click Edit > Select > Deselect All from the main menu.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Selecting Items using Direct Selection

ScenarioSelect items using the direct selection method.

Direct_Select direct_selection.asm

Task 1: Select components using direct selection.

1. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT fromthe graphics window.

2. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select thecomponent.

3. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT fromthe model tree.

4. De-select the component.

5. Press CTRL and selectENG_BLOCK_FRONT_6.PRTandENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRTfrom the graphics window.

6. Press CTRL and selectENG_BLOCK_FRONT_6.PRTfrom the graphics window tode-select it.

7. Press CTRL and selectENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRTfrom the model tree to de-selectit.

8. Press CTRL and select thetwo BOLT_5-18_6.PRT and thethree BOLT_5-28_6.PRT fromthe model tree.

9. Click Edit > Select > DeselectAll from the main menu.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Select features using direct selection.

1. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT fromthe graphics window, right-click,and select Open.

2. Select the hole from thegraphics window. Notice thatthe feature highlights in thegraphics window and modeltree, and that the feature nameis SPARK_PLUG_HOLE.

3. De-select the feature.

4. Press CTRL and selectSPARK_PLUG_HOLE andBASE_ROUND from thegraphics window.

5. Press CTRL and selectSPARK_PLUG_HOLE fromthe graphics window to de-selectit.

6. Press CTRL and selectBASE_ROUND from themodel tree to de-select it.

7. Press CTRL and select the fourmount hole features from themodel tree.

8. Click Edit > Select > DeselectAll.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Selection FiltersThe selection filter provides various filters to help you selectitems.

Filters include:• Parts• Features• Geometry• Datums• Quilts• Annotation

The Selection Filter

The Selection Filter is Located Along the Bottom-Right Side of the Interface

Selection Filters TheoryEach filter in the selection filter narrows the item types that you can select,enabling you to easily select the item you are looking for. All filters arecontext-sensitive, so that only those filters that are valid for the geometricalcontext are available. For example, the Parts filter would not be availablewhile working in a part; rather it would be available while working in anassembly. Pro/ENGINEER automatically selects the best filter according tothe context. However, you can always change the filter by simply selecting itfrom the selection filter.The following filters are available in Part mode and Assembly mode:• Parts — Available in Assembly mode only, enables you to only selectcomponents in the assembly.

• Features — Enables you to only select features in a part or componentin the assembly.

• Geometry — Enables you to only select geometry, such as edges,surfaces, and vertices.

• Datums — Enables you to only select datum features, including datumplanes, datum axes, datum points, and coordinate systems.

• Quilts — Enables you to only select surface quilts.• Annotation — Enables you to only select annotation features.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Understanding Selection Filters

ScenarioUnderstand how to use the selection filter for parts and assemblies.

Select_Filters selection_filters.asm

Task 1: Use the selection filter in an assembly.

1. Edit the selection filter to Parts.2. Select BOLT_5-18_7.PRT from

the graphics window.

3. Select CRANKSHAFT_7.PRTfrom the graphics window.

4. Select FLYWHEEL_7.PRT fromthe graphics window.

5. De-select theFLYWHEEL_7.PRT compo-nent.

6. Edit the selection filter toFeatures.

7. Press CTRL and select the tworound features.

8. De-select the rounds.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

9. Press CTRL and select the twohole features.

10. De-select the holes.

11. Edit the selection filter toGeometry.

12. Select the front surface ofENG_BLOCK_FRONT_7.PRT.

13. Zoom in on theBOLT_5-18_7.PRT component.

14. Select the inner planarsurface on the hex ofBOLT_5-18_7.PRT, as shownon the left.

15. Select the top edge on the hexof BOLT_5-18_7.PRT, as shownon the right.

16. Select the top vertex on the hexof BOLT_5-18_7.PRT.

17. De-select the vertex.

18. Click Plane Display to enable their display.

19. Click Axis Display to enable their display.

20. Edit the selection filter toDatums.

21. Press CTRL and select datumaxis A_4 and datum plane TOP.

22. De-select the datum plane.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using the Smart Selection FilterThe smart filter enables you to select the most common types ofitems that are valid for the current geometrical context.

Smart Filter:• The selection of features, geometry, or components is a nested process.• Select specific items of interest after the initial selection.

Smart filter selection levels:• Feature/Component level.• Geometry level (surfaces, edges, or vertices).

Example of Smart Filter Selection Levels

Smart Selection Filter TheoryPro/ENGINEER automatically selects the Smart selection filter, if it isavailable. When using the Smart selection filter, the selection of features,geometry, or components is a nested process. This means you can selectspecific items of interest after the initial selection. There are two levels ofselection when using the Smart Filter:• Feature/Component Level• Geometry LevelWhen selecting a part in the graphics window, your initial selection highlightsa feature in a red wireframe. The Smart selection filter then automaticallynarrows the selection scope, enabling you to select specific items on thatfeature that you wish to either modify or use to create another feature. Forexample, you can select an edge where you wish to add a chamfer. Thethree specific items that you may wish to select highlight differently, as shownin the slide. Selected surfaces highlight as red-shaded items; selectededges highlight in bold red; and selected vertices highlight in red. The entireselection process occurs automatically.Assemblies have a similar selection scheme. Components are selectedinitially, followed by geometry such as surfaces, edges, and vertices.

The Smart selection filter is not available if you disable preselectionhighlighting.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Using the Smart Selection Filter

ScenarioUse the smart selection filter in an assembly and part model.

Smart_Filter smart_filter.asm

Task 1: Use the smart selection filter in an assembly.

1. In the graphics window,select componentENG_BLOCK_FRONT_8.PRT.

2. Zoom in to the tab on theupper-left area of the part.

3. Select the planar tab surface.

4. Select the cylindrical tab surface.

5. Select the edge of the hole inthe tab.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. Select the vertex on the edge ofthe hole.

7. De-select the vertex.

Task 2: Use the smart selection filter in a part model.

1. Press CTRL + D to orientthe assembly to the standardorientation.

2. In the graphics window, selectthe BOLT_5-18_8.PRT model,right-click, and select Open.

3. Select the hex cut feature.4. Select the edge of the hex cut

feature.5. De-select the hex cut edge.

6. Select the top protrusion feature.7. Select the front cylindrical

surface of the top protrusionfeature.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Selecting Items using Query SelectionQuery selection enables selection of features, geometry, orcomponents that are hidden beneath another item.

Query Selection:• Select by querying the model.• Select using the Pick From List.

Pick From List

Original Model, Cursor Over to Highlight, Query to Highlight, Select

Query Selection TheoryQuery selection is one of the three basic methods of selection. Queryselection enables you to select features, geometry, or components thatare hidden beneath another feature or model. For example, in the engineillustration in the slide, you may want to select the piston so you can changethe overall height of the part. However, the cylinder part obstructs yourattempts to click and select the piston. In this situation, you can easily queryand select the piston. There are two methods of query selection:• Select by querying the model — When you select a model directly in thePro/ENGINEER Wildfire graphics window, the blue edges designate apreselected item. By right-clicking the preselected model or feature, youcan query directly through the initial model or feature to the next model orfeature. You can continue to right-click to query the next model or feature.When you have queried to the desired model or feature, you then click tomake your selection.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Select using the Pick From List — The Pick From List is similar to queryingthe model, except that all of the query possibilities are listed in the dialogbox for the cursor location. To activate the Pick From List, you cursor overthe location you want to query and right-click and select Pick From List.Items highlighted in the Pick From List menu also preselect in the graphicswindow.

Remember:Cursor over to highlight, right-click to query, and click to select.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Selecting Items using Query Selection

ScenarioUse query selection in an assembly and part model.

Query_Select query_select.asm

Task 1: Use query selection in an assembly.

1. Cursor over the assembly.

2. Right-click to query until thePISTON_9.PRT highlights, andthen click to select it.

3. Move the cursor down slightlyuntil the CYLINDER_9.PRTmodel preselects.

4. Press CTRL, then right-click andselect Pick From List.

5. Still pressing CTRL, selectCONNECTING_ROD_9.PRTfrom the Pick From List dialogbox.

6. Click OK from the Pick From Listdialog box.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. Press CTRL and cursor overPISTON_9.PRT. Right-click toquery until the PISTON_9.PRThighlights, and then select it.

8. This de-selects the component.

Task 2: Use query selection in a part model.

1. In the graphics window, select CYLINDER_9.PRT. Right-click andselect Open.

2. Cursor over the bottom, center area of the CYLINDER_9.PRT.Right-click and select Pick From List.

3. In the Pick From List dialog box,click the down arrow.

4. In the graphics window,right-click the location fromwhich you first opened the PickFrom List dialog box. Anotherfeature in that area of thegraphics window will preselect.

5. Continue to right-click to queryuntil the CYLINDER_CUTfeature is preselected.

6. Click OK from the Pick From Listdialog box.


8. Cursor over the area wherethe CYLINDER_CUT feature islocated, right-click to query untilthe CYLINDER_CUT featurehighlights, and then select it.

9. Orient the model to observe theCYLINDER_CUT feature.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Editing Features and RegeneratingEdit enables you to alter dimensions of a selected feature orcomponent. Edit Definition enables you to modify feature type,size, shape, location, references, or options.

Edit:• Enter a value directly on themodel.

• Use the Most Recently Usedoption.

Edit Definition using:• Dashboard.• Drag handles.• Context-sensitive right mousebutton options.

Regenerate to update themodel.

Undo / Redo capability.

Editing a Model

Editing Features using EditEdit is a menu selection available from the model tree, pop-up menu, orthe drop-down menu. After choosing Edit, the dimensions of the selectedfeatures or components display in the graphics window.Using Edit, you can quickly change the dimensions of a selected featureusing one of the two following methods:• Edit directly on the model - To edit directly on the model, double-click thedimension. Type the new dimensional value and regenerate the model.

• Edit using the Most Recently Used option - When you edit a model, youcan also use the most recently used option. When you double-clicka dimension, a drop-down list displays the most recent values of themodel, as shown in the middle image. You can select a suitable valueand regenerate the model.

The most recently used option only displays recent values fromthe current session. It does not display values used in a previousPro/ENGINEER Wildfire session.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Editing Features using Edit DefinitionUsing Edit Definition, you can significantly change the model by redefiningthe feature:• Type – Change a protrusion into a cut, for example.• Size – Make a feature larger or smaller.• Shape – Change a round cut into a square cut, for example.• Location – Move a cut from one reference to a different reference.• References – Change the location of the feature or change the dimensionalreferences.

• Options – Change the additional details of the feature, such as its depth.In Edit Definition, you can modify the model by:1. Editing with the dashboard. This is the graphical area in which you can

change a feature’s type, size, shape, and location.2. Editing with drag handles. You can directly change features on a model

by manipulating the drag handle. Your changes display dynamically inthe graphics window.

3. Using the various context-sensitive right mouse button options on thedynamic preview or drag handles.

Regeneration Theory

The Regenerate function recalculates the model geometry, incorporatingany changes made since the last time the model was saved or regenerated.It is necessary to regenerate a model after you have edited it. However, if youedit the definition of a feature, the regeneration is done for you.

Undo/Redo FunctionalityYou can undo and redo most of the operations performed on a model. Theoperations are sequentially stacked in memory. Operations include creatingand deleting, editing, redefining, suppressing and resuming, creating anddeleting patterns, and reordering.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Editing Features and Regenerating

ScenarioEdit the UPPER and BASE features of a part model.

Edit_Regenerate edit_regenerate.prt

Task 1: Edit the features of a part model.

1. In the model tree, right-clickUPPER and select Edit.

2. Double-click the rear 4dimension, edit it to 8, andpress ENTER.

3. Click Regenerate toregenerate the geometry.

4. In the model tree, right-clickBASE and select Edit.

5. Double-click the 8 dimension,edit it to 16, and press ENTER.

6. Click Regenerate .

7. In the model tree, right-clickBASE and select EditDefinition.

8. Drag the drag handle to 12.9. Click Complete Feature from

the dashboard.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. In the model tree, right-clickUPPER and select EditDefinition.

11. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Edit the Side 1 depth to ToSelected .

• Select the lower front surface.• Edit the Side 2 depth to ToSelected .

• Query select the lower rearsurface.

12. Click Complete Feature .

13. In the model tree, right-clickBASE and select Edit.

14. Double-click the 12 dimensionand select 16 from thedrop-down list.


16. Click Undo from the main toolbar three times.17. Click Redo from the main toolbar three times.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Activating and Editing ModelsYou can activate components and sub-assemblies within atop-level assembly and edit their features and components,respectively.

From an assembly, you can activate:• Components• Sub-assemblies

You can do the following to the activecomponent or subassembly:• Edit• Edit Definition• Create features Viewing the Activated Component

Editing the Definition of a Chamferin the Activated Crankshaft

Editing the Number of Fins inthe Activated Flywheel

Activating and Editing Models TheoryFrom an open assembly, you can activate individual components orsub-assemblies within the assembly. You can then perform Edit and EditDefinition operations on features of the activated component or componentsof an activated subassembly. You can also create features on the activatedpart or sub-assembly in the context of the top-level assembly.

Activating a component or sub-assembly in an assembly is differentthan activating a window using the Window menu.

An active component or sub-assembly is denoted in the Pro/ENGINEERinterface in three ways:• A green symbol displays in the model tree next to the active component.• Text in the graphics window states which component is active.• All other non-active components become grayed out in the graphicswindow.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Activating and Editing Models

ScenarioActivate assembly components and edit their features.

Activate_Edit activate_edit.asm

Task 1: Activate assembly components and edit their features.

1. In the model tree, expand theCRANK_10.ASM sub-assembly.• Right-clickFLYWHEEL_10.PRT andselect Activate.

2. Click Settings > Tree Filtersfrom the model tree.

3. Verify that the Features checkbox is selected and click OK.

4. Expand the features forFLYWHEEL_10.PRT in themodel tree.• Right-click PATTERN_FINSand select Edit.

5. Double-click the 16FIN_ROUNDS value, edit itto 10, and press ENTER.


7. Click Window > Activate toactivate the top-level assembly.

You can also right-clickthe top-level assemblyin the model tree andselect Activate.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

8. In the model tree, right-clickCRANKSHAFT_10.PRT andselect Activate.

9. Zoom in to the end of theCRANKSHAFT_10.PRT.

10. Select the chamfer, right-click,and select Edit Definition.

11. Drag the drag handle to a valueof 1.


13. In the model tree, right-click ACTIVATE_EDIT.ASM and selectActivate.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using the Search ToolThe Search Tool is a powerful method for selecting many typesof objects.

Search by various methods andthen select items.• Look For• Look By• Look In• Name• Found/Selected Objects

The Search Tool

The Found and Selected Lists

Search Tool Results

Using the Search ToolThe Search Tool is the third basic method of selection. It includes severaloptions to search models by a variety of criteria including:• Look For - Specify the type of items you want to search for. For example,you can search for only datum planes, components, or axes.

• Look By - Specify the types of items you want to search by. This is afurther refinement to the Look for option, and is context-sensitive based onthe Look for option specified.

• Look In - Specifies which model or models the search will be conductedagainst. If an assembly or sub-assembly is specified as the Look in object,you can choose whether sub-models are included. You can set the Lookin object either by selecting it from the drop-down list in the Search Tool


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

dialog box, or you can click Select Model and select the model fromthe graphics window.

• Name - You can refine the search by typing in part or all of the name ofwhat you want to search for. You can also use wildcards, both at thebeginning and end of the name search string.

The items that fulfill the criteria specified display in the Found list on the leftside of the Search Tool. If you select items in the Found list they will preselectin the graphics window. You can select multiple items using CTRL or SHIFT,or you can select all items by pressing CTRL + A. Move items to the Selectedlist on the right to select them in the graphics window and therefore performoperations.The Search Tool becomes invaluable as the complexity of your modelincreases.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Using the Search Tool

ScenarioUsing the Search Tool.

Search_Tool search_tool.asm

Task 1: Use the Search Tool in an assembly model.

1. Start the Find Tool from the main toolbar.

2. In the Search Tool dialog box,edit the Look for value toComponent.• Type *gear_shaft_11 as theCriteria Value.

• Click Find Now.• In the Found list, select thefirst component, press andhold CTRL, and select thesecond and third components.

• SelectREDUCTION_GEAR_SHAFT_11and click Add Item .

• Click Close.• De-select the component.

3. Start the Find Tool .4. In the Search Tool dialog box,

edit Look for to Feature.• Edit the Criteria Value to *.• Click Find Now.• Edit Look in toDRILL_CHUCK_11.ASM.

• Click Find Now.• In the Found list, select thefirst feature and press CTRL +A to select all the features.

• Click Add Item .• Click Close.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Use the Search Tool in a part model.

1. OpenGEARBOX_FRONT_11.PRT.


edit Look for to Feature.• Edit the Criteria Value toreduction*

• Click Find Now.• SelectREDUCTION_GEAR_HOLEand click Add Item .

• Click Close.



edit Look for to Datum Plane.• Edit the Criteria Value to rib*• Click Find Now.• Select RIB_PLANE_3 andclick Add Item .

• Click Close.7. De-select the datum plane

8. Click Repaint .


edit Look for to Axis.• Edit the Criteria Value to *pin*• Click Find Now.• SelectALIGNMENT_PIN_TOP andclick Add Item .

• Click Close.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Deleting and Suppressing ItemsSuppressing an item removes it from the graphics display andregeneration cycle, but the item can be resumed. Deleting anitem is permanent.

Delete:• Is permanent.• Follows Parent/Child Rels.

Suppress:• Items can be restored via Resume.• Follows Parent/Child Rels.

Resume:• Selected items.• All items.

Viewing Children of Item toBe Suppressed

Suppressed Items in the ModelTree

Both Parents and ChildrenSuppressed

Deleting and Suppressing Items TheoryIf you delete an item from a model and save it, that item is permanentlyremoved from the graphical display and regeneration cycle of the model.Suppressing an item also removes it from the graphical display andregeneration cycle. However, you can restore a suppressed item by resumingit. Resuming a suppressed item returns it to the graphical display andregeneration cycle.• Suppressed items are denoted in the model tree by a black square,although they can be filtered from the model tree. The upper-left figureshows two suppressed items.

• Suppressing items causes regeneration speed to increase. However,suppressing items is not meant to be a technique for managing complexmodels or large assemblies.

• You can resume all suppressed items by clicking Edit > Resume >Resume All from the main menu.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• You can select an object and either delete or suppress from that object tothe end of the model using Edit > Delete > Delete to End of Model or Edit> Suppress > Suppress to End of Model.

• You can select an object and either delete or suppress all objects other thanthe selected one and its parents using Edit > Delete > Delete UnrelatedItems or Edit > Suppress > Suppress Unrelated Items.

Handling Parent/Child RelationshipsIf you suppress an item that is a parent to another item, the child itemhighlights in green and the system warns you that the child item will besuppressed, too. In the lower-left figure, the gear is a parent to the drillchuck sub-assembly in how it was assembled. Therefore, when the gearis suppressed, the chuck assembly is also suppressed, as shown in thelower-right figure. The same parent/child relationships hold true if you try todelete an item that is a parent to another item. Again, the child item highlightsin green and the system warns you that the child item will need to be deleted,too.

Best PracticesIt is recommended that you use Suppress/Resume to temporarily removefeatures or components in the graphics window to test design variations. Itis a best practice to remove (delete) all suppressed features or componentsbefore saving your final design.If you want to remove non-solid features or components in the graphicswindow for the long-term, it is a best practice to use layers or simplifiedrepresentations.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Deleting and Suppressing Items

ScenarioDelete and suppress items in an assembly.

Del_Suppress delete_suppress.asm

Task 1: Delete, suppress, and resume items from an assembly.

1. In the model tree, selectDRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM.

2. Click Edit > Delete > Deletefrom the main menu.

3. Click OK from the Delete dialogbox.

4. Click Undo .5. Select DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM

again.6. Click Edit > Suppress >

Suppress from the main menu.7. Click OK from the Suppress

dialog box.8. Click Undo .

9. Query select theFINAL_GEAR_SHAFT_12.PRT.

10. Right-click and select Delete.11. Click Cancel from the Delete

dialog box.12. Right-click and select Suppress.13. Click OK from the Suppress

dialog box.

14. Press CTRL and select both suppressed components from the modeltree.

15. Right-click and select Resume.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Delete and suppress items in a part.

1. Open CHUCK_12.PRT.2. Select FRONT_ROUND and

press Delete on your keyboard.3. Click OK.4. Click Undo .5. Select FRONT_ROUND again.6. Right-click and select Suppress.7. Click OK.

8. Select the radial hole.9. Right-click and select Delete.10. Click OK.11. Click Undo .12. Select the radial hole again.13. Right-click and select Suppress.14. Click OK.15. Click Undo .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Editing Feature and Component VisibilityThe Hide and Unhide features respectively remove and displaycomponents or non-solid feature geometry from the graphicdisplay.

Hide/Unhide:• Components in an assembly• Datum features• Solid features• Surface features

Changes are not saved by default.• Save Status

Hiding Components

Hidden Features in the Model Tree

Hiding Datum Features

Editing Feature and Component VisibilityThe Hide and Unhide features respectively remove and display componentsor non-solid feature geometry from the graphic display. You can hide items toenable easier selection and visualization while completing tasks. You maythen unhide items to return them to the display after your tasks are complete.• Hidden objects are grayed out in the model tree. The datum features inthe upper-right figure are hidden.

• Hiding objects does not affect parent/child relationships with othercomponents or features.

• Hiding solid geometry features in a part does not remove the geometryfrom the display; rather, it hides just the non-solid components of thefeature (such as the axis of a hole) from the display.

• Hidden items are placed in the Hidden Items layer in the Layer tree.• You can unhide all hidden objects at once by clicking View > Visibility >Unhide All. Unhide All does not unhide items that were automatically


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

hidden by Pro/ENGINEER, such as datums created on the fly or usedsketches.

Saving Feature and Component VisibilityIf you want hidden items to open in their still-hidden state the next time thefile is opened (once it has been erased from session), you must use theSave Status option in the View > Visibility menu to save changes to theHide/Unhide status before saving the model; changes to the Hide/Unhidestatus are not saved with the model by default.

Best PracticesIt is recommended that you use Hide/Unhide to temporarily remove non-solidfeatures or components in the graphics window. If you want to removenon-solid features or components in the graphics window for the long-term, itis a best practice to use layers or simplified representations.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Editing Feature and Component Visibility

ScenarioEdit feature and component visibility in assemblies and parts.

Visibility feat_comp_visibility.asm

Task 1: Edit component visibility in an assembly.

1. Press CTRL and selectGEARBOX_FRONT_13.PRTand GEARBOX_REAR_13.PRT.

2. Click View > Visibility > Hidefrom the main menu.

3. Press CTRL and select allfour BOLT_5-18_13.PRTcomponents.

4. Right-click and select Hide.

5. Click Named View Listfrom the main toolbar and selectLEFT.


Notice the warning in the message window stating that the layerdisplay status was not saved.

7. Click View > Visibility > Save Status from the main menu.


Task 2: Edit feature visibility in a part.

1. Open CHUCK_13.PRT.2. Ensure that Plane Display

and Axis Display areenabled in the main toolbar.

3. Press CTRL and select datumplanes RIGHT, TOP, andFRONT from the graphicswindow.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

5. Expand the first Pattern (Hole)feature in the model tree.• Select each Hole feature tohighlight it.

• Select the first Hole id 156,right-click, and select Hide.

The axis is hidden, but thereis no effect on the hole itself.

6. Press CTRL and select the othertwo Hole features.





For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module5Creating Sketcher Geometry

Module OverviewMost 3-D geometry created in Pro/ENGINEER begins with a 2-D sketchedsection. Consequently, sketching is one of the most fundamental, consistentlyperformed operations.In this module, you review the theory behind sketching and learn what goesinto creating a robust, predictable sketch. You also learn the tools availablefor creating sketch geometry.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Review sketcher theory and understand design intent.• Modify the sketcher display.• Learn and use constraints.• Learn how to sketch lines, centerlines, rectangles, circles, arcs, and fillets.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Reviewing Sketcher TheoryA sketch is a 2-D entity that graphically captures an idea withlines, constraints, and dimensions.

2-D Sketch

2-D sketches are:• Placed on a 3-D model.• Used to create solid features.

Sketches are Used to Create SolidFeatures Sketch Placed on a 3-D Model

Reviewing Sketcher TheoryIn Pro/ENGINEER, you use the 2-D Sketcher mode to capture yourengineering idea. You sketch your idea using various types of lines whichare then trimmed, constrained, dimensioned, and modified accordingly. Anexample of a sketch is shown in the upper-right figure.This 2-D sketch is then placed into a 3-D model, as shown in the lower-rightfigure. Once the sketch is placed, it can be used to create solid features, asshown in the figures on the left. Notice that the same sketch can be used tocreate two completely different types of geometry.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Design IntentDesign Intent in Sketcher is to create, constrain, and dimensiona sketch in a manner that will cause it to update predictably ifmodified.

Design intent is captured in sketchesby:• How it is constrained.• How it is dimensioned.

Capture design intent by using theIntent Manager to:• Maintain fully defined sketches atall times.

• Maintain weak/strong items.

Design Intent Captured withDimensions

Freehand Sketch and DesiredSketch

Design Intent Captured withConstraints

Understanding Design Intent TheoryWhen creating models with Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire, it is critical that youcapture the design intent of the model. Design intent ensures predictableresults when a model is modified. Creating sketch features enables youto capture design intent. Design intent is captured and can be varied insketches by:• How it is constrained - Changing how a sketch is constrained affects thepredictable behavior of the sketch, thereby varying design intent.

• How it is dimensioned - Changing how a sketch is dimensioned affects thepredictable behavior of the sketch, again varying design intent.

Using the Intent Manager to Capture Design IntentThe upper-right image shows a freehand sketch. No design intent has beenapplied to it. When you edit the sketch, it is not known how it will behave.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

The middle-right image shows the desired sketch to be achieved. The IntentManager helps you apply design intent to your sketch so it appears as themiddle image, not the top image.Start by sketching the rough shape of your desired sketch. The IntentManager will begin to dynamically apply constraints to help you lock in yoursketch. For example, if you sketch a line approximately vertical, the IntentManager will dynamically apply a vertical constraint to that line, helping youlock in design intent. When you stop sketching, a series of gray dimensionsappears in addition to your constraints.• The Intent Manager must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times. Thedimensions and constraints maintain the size, shape, and location of allsketched items, which helps you capture design intent. Modify the defaultdimension scheme if needed by editing or adding dimensions so youproperly capture your intended design intent.

• The Intent Manager contains both Weak and Strong items.– Weak items are gray, whereas Strong items are white.– Dimensions and constraints can be Weak or Strong.– Weak items are those created by the system to maintain a fully

constrained sketch.– The system will add or remove Weak items as necessary to maintain

the fully constrained sketch.– You cannot delete Weak items.– Strong items are Weak items that were made strong either directly or

by modifying them.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Modifying the Sketcher DisplayYou can modify the Sketcher Display to enable easiervisualization when completing tasks.

The following display options areavailable in Sketcher:• Dimensions• Constraints• Grid• Section vertices

Orienting parallel to the screen.

Switch Dimensions.

Switched Dimensions

Sketcher Display Options

Sketcher Display OptionsWhen you enter Sketcher mode, there are four different Sketcher Displaytypes that can be controlled to aid visualization while completing tasks:

• Display Dimensions - Toggles the display of dimensions on or off.

• Display Constraints - Toggles the display of constraints on or off.

• Display Grid - Toggles the display of the grid on or off.

• Display Vertices - Toggles the display of section vertices on or off.

The Sketcher Display for a given exercise is included within theprocedure and exercise steps where applicable. When you see thesketcher display icons in exercises, you should set your sketcher

display to match. For example, indicates thatyou should display dimensions, constraints, and section vertices.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Orienting the Sketch Parallel to the ScreenIf you reorient the sketch while in Sketcher mode for any reason, you can

click Sketch Orientation . This causes the sketch to reorient parallel tothe screen.

Switching DimensionsClick Info > Switch Dimensions from the main menu to switch thedimensions from their numerical values to their names. This is shown inthe upper-right figure. You can use the dimension name in a variety ofsituations including drawings, parameters, writing relations, and creatinganalysis features.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Utilizing ConstraintsConstraints are rules enforced by Pro/ENGINEER on yoursketched entities.

Constraints Dialog Box

Constraint typesinclude:• Vertical• Horizontal• Perpendicular• Tangent• Midpoint• Point on Entity• Symmetric• Equal• Parallel

Sketch Before and After Constraints Applied

Utilizing Constraints TheoryConstraining the sketch is an important means to capture design intent. Asyou add constraints, you add logic to your sketches. You also minimize thenumber of dimensions required to document your design intent. This is whyit is important to constrain your sketched entities before dimensioning yoursketch.The following table lists the available constraints, which can be activated by

clicking Constrain from the Sketcher toolbar:

Constraint Description

Vertical Makes lines vertical or aligns points vertically.

Horizontal Makes lines horizontal or aligns points horizontally.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Constraint Description

Perpendicular Makes lines perpendicular to one another.

Tangent Makes lines tangent to arcs and circles.

Midpoint Places an existing vertex or Sketcher point at themidpoint of a line.

Same Point Aligns two entities or vertices to the same point. Alsocreates Collinear and Point on Entity constraints.

Symmetric Makes points symmetric about a centerline.

Equal Makes lines equal length or gives arcs/circles equalradii.

Parallel Makes lines parallel to one another.

At any time, you can select a constraint from the Sketcher and click Explain.The message window provides an explanation of what the constraint does.

Managing Constraints (Shortcuts)When sketching, you can manipulate constraints dynamically. The followingtable lists the options available:

Mouse/Keyboard Operation Constraint Manipulation

Right-click Disables the Constraint

SHIFT + right-click Locks the Constraint

TAB Toggles the Active Constraint


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Constraints

ScenarioRedefine sketches to apply constraints.

Utilizing_Constraints constraints.prt

Task 1: Apply the equal, horizontal, and same point constraints to theSketch 1 feature.

1. In the model tree, right-clickSketch 1 and select EditDefinition.

2. Sketcher display:

3. Click Constrain from theSketcher toolbar.

4. In the Constraints dialog box,click Equal .• Select the small circle, thenthe larger circle.

5. In the Constraints dialog box,click Horizontal and selectthe center of each circle.

6. Click Select One By Onefrom the Sketcher toolbar.

7. Drag the circle centers to testthe Horizontal constraint.

8. Drag the circle radii to test theEqual Radii constraint.

9. Click Undo from the maintoolbar twice.

10. Click Constrain .• Click Same Point andselect one circle center andthe horizontal reference.

• Click Close.11. Click Done Section from the

Sketcher toolbar.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Apply the midpoint and same point constraints to the Sketch 2feature.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2.

2. Click Constrain .

3. Click Midpoint from theConstraints dialog box.

4. Select the circle center, thenselect the vertical line it lies on.

5. In the Constraints dialog box,click Same Point .• Select the circle radius,then select the upper-rightrectangle vertex.

• Click Close.6. Click Done Section .

Task 3: Apply the perpendicular, equal, vertical, and same pointconstraints to the Sketch 3 feature.


2. Click Constrain .3. Click Perpendicular and

select the upper and right lines.• Click Parallel and selectthe upper and lower lines.

4. In the Constraints dialog box,click Equal and select theupper and lower lines.• Click Vertical and select theleft line.

5. In the Constraints dialog box,click Same Point andselect the right line and verticalreference.• Click Same Point andselect the lower line and thehorizontal reference.

• Click Close.6. Click Done Section .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 4: Apply the same point, tangent, and symmetric constraints to theSketch 4 feature.


2. Click Constrain .3. In the Constraints dialog box,

click Same Point and selectthe line endpoints on either sideof the gap.

• Click Tangent and selectthe right arc and the upperline.

4. In the Constraints dialog box,click Symmetric and selectthe upper vertex of the right arc,the upper vertex of the left arc,and then the vertical centerline.• Click Close.

5. Drag the centerline to the right.6. Click Done Section .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Sketching LinesSketched entities are the basis for a solid face or surface of a3-D model.

There are two types of lines:• 2 Point Line• 2 Tangent Line

2 Point Line

2 Tangent Line

Sketching Lines TheoryThere are two main types of lines available in Sketcher:

• 2 Point Line - Click Line from the Sketcher toolbar or right-click andselect Line to create a line between two points. Each time you click themouse you start a line point or endpoint. You can continue clicking themouse to create lines that are chained together. That is, the endpoint ofone line is the starting point of the next line. You can either middle-click orselect another function from the Sketcher toolbar to terminate line creation.

• 2 Tangent Line - Click Line Tangent from the Sketcher toolbar tocreate a line that is tangent to two circles, two arcs, or a circle and arc. Youcan only select arcs or circles when creating a 2 Tangent Line.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Sketching Lines

ScenarioSketch lines in Sketcher.

Sketching_Lines sketch_lines.prt

Task 1: Sketch line entities in Sketcher.

1. In the model tree, right-clickLINE and select Edit Definition.


3. Click Line from the Sketchertoolbar.

4. Click on the existing lineendpoint. Move the cursordown, and click again at thevertical and horizontal referenceintersection. Notice the Verticalconstraint.

5. Move the cursor to the right, andnotice the Horizontal constraint.

6. Continue to move the cursor tothe right and you will see theEqual Length constraint.

7. Continue to move the cursorto the right until you see theVertical Alignment constraint.

8. Click again to complete thehorizontal line.

9. Move your cursor up and to theright to create a diagonal line.Continue to move the cursorupward until you see the Parallelconstraint.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. Continue to move the cursorto increase the line length untilthe Equal Length constraintappears.

11. Press TAB to toggle the activeconstraint to the Parallelconstraint.

12. Press TAB again to toggle theactive constraint back to theEqual Length constraint.

13. Right-click to disable the EqualLength constraint.

14. Keeping the line parallel,continue to move the cursor toincrease the line length.

15. Press TAB to activate theParallel constraint.

16. Press SHIFT and right-click tolock the Parallel constraint.

17. Move the cursor to further extendthe line length and click to finishthe line creation.

18. Move the cursor upward. Noticethe Vertical constraint.

19. Click to finish the vertical linecreation.

20. Move the cursor to the left andnotice the Horizontal constraint.Drag the line horizontally to theleft until the Vertical Alignmentconstraint appears.

21. Click to finish the horizontal linecreation.

22. Move the cursor down and dragthe line vertically until it snaps tothe arc endpoint. Click to finishthe vertical line creation.

23. Middle-click to stop sketching.24. Click Done Section from the

Sketcher toolbar to complete thesketch.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Sketch tangent lines in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of 2-TANGENT_LINE.

2. Click Line Tangent from the flyout in the Sketcher toolbar.

3. Click on the bottom of thesmaller circle to begin sketchinga line.

4. Move the cursor around thecircle, and notice that the linestays tangent to the circle.

5. Click the top of the larger circleto complete the line. Notice theTangent constraints.

6. Click Select One By One from the Sketcher toolbar.7. Select the tangent line and press DELETE.

8. Click Line Tangent .9. Sketch another tangent line.

10. Sketch a third tangent line.11. Middle-click to stop tangent line

creation.12. Click Done Section .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Sketching CenterlinesCenterlines are used to enforce symmetry in a sketch and areselected as the Axis of Revolution in a Revolve feature.

There are two types of Centerlines:• Centerline• 2 Tangent Centerline

Symmetry Created using Centerline

Sketch with Centerline Revolve Feature

Sketching Centerlines TheoryCenterlines are used to define a line of symmetry with a sketch. They are alsoused to define the axis of revolution in a Revolve feature. Centerlines must befully constrained by using dimensions or constraints like any other sketchedentity. They have infinite length and are not used to create feature geometry.There are two types of Centerlines:

• Centerline - Click Centerline from the Sketcher toolbar or right-click andselect Centerline to create a Centerline through two points.

• 2 Tangent Centerline - Click Sketch > Line > Centerline Tangent from themain menu to create a centerline that is tangent to two circles, two arcs,or a circle and arc. You can only select arcs or circles when creating a 2Tangent Centerline.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Sketching Centerlines

ScenarioSketch centerlines in Sketcher.

Centerlines sketch_centerlines.prt

Task 1: Sketching centerlines in Sketcher.

1. In the model tree, selectCENTERLINE, right-click,and select Edit Definition.Notice that the horizontal line isasymmetric about the verticalreference. Notice also thedimensioning scheme for theangled line.

2. Sketcher display:3. Click and drag a window around

the two lines.4. Press DELETE.

5. Click Centerline from the Line flyout in the Sketcher toolbar.6. Click on the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references to

start sketching a centerline.7. Move the cursor upwards and click on the vertical reference to create

a vertical centerline on top of the vertical reference.

8. Click on the intersection ofthe vertical and horizontalreferences to start sketching asecond centerline.

9. Drag the centerline so itmeasures approximately 70°from vertical, and click to placeit.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. Click Line from the Sketchertoolbar.

11. Click in the top left quadrantof the graphics window to startsketching a line.

12. Move the cursor horizontally tothe right side of the verticalcenterline until it snapssymmetric about the verticalcenterline and click to place it.

13. Middle-click to stop line creation.

14. Click Select One By One from the Sketcher toolbar, and click anddrag one of the line endpoints to resize it to a length of approximately13. Notice that the line stays symmetrical about the vertical centerlineas it is resized.

15. Click Line from the Sketchertoolbar and click the rightendpoint of the horizontal line.

16. Move the cursor down tothe angled centerline, movethe cursor up and down on thecenterline until the Perpendicularconstraint appears, and click tocomplete the line.

17. Middle-click to stop line creation.

18. Click Select One By Oneand click and drag the angledcenterline to approximately60°. Notice that the angledline always stays perpendicularabout the angled centerline.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Sketching RectanglesSelect two diagonal corners to create a rectangle.

• The four lines are independent.• You can delete, trim, and aligneach line individually.

• Create symmetric rectangles usingcenterlines.

Selecting the Upper Line ofa Rectangle

Sketching a Symmetric Rectangle

Sketching Rectangles TheoryYou can create a Rectangle using the Rectangle icon in the Sketchertoolbar or by right-clicking in the Sketcher and selecting Rectangle. Whenyou sketch a rectangle you click twice to place the two opposite cornersin Sketcher.• The four lines of the rectangle are independent. You can delete, trim, andalign each line individually.

• You can use centerlines to create symmetric rectangles.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Sketching Rectangles

ScenarioSketch Rectangles in Sketcher.

Rectangles sketch_rectangles.prt

Task 1: Create rectangles in Sketcher.

1. In the model tree, right-clickRECTANGLE and select EditDefinition.

2. Sketcher display:3. Select the upper line of the

rectangle and press DELETE.

4. Click and drag a window aroundthe remaining lines.

5. Press CTRL and deselect thetwo centerlines.

6. Press DELETE.

7. Click Rectangle from theSketcher toolbar.

8. Click in the upper-left quadrantto start the rectangle. Movethe cursor to the lower-rightquadrant, making sure that therectangle is symmetric aboutthe vertical and horizontalcenterlines.

9. Click to complete the rectangle.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. Click on the intersection of thehorizontal reference and theright rectangle line to beginsketching a second rectangle.

11. Move the cursor to the right untilthe second rectangle snaps toequal length of the first rectangle.Move the cursor down until itsnaps to the bottom of the firstrectangle and click to completethe rectangle.

12. Click on the upper-right vertexof the second rectangle to beginsketching a third rectangle.

13. Move the cursor up until theheight is equal length of the firstrectangle.

14. Move the cursor to the left untilit snaps to the midpoint of thesecond rectangle and click tocomplete the rectangle.

15. Middle-click to stop sketching.16. Click Done Section from the Sketcher toolbar.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Sketching Circles

There are four types of Circles:• Center and Point• Concentric• 3 Point• Tangent to 3 Entities

Concentric Circle

Circle Tangent to 3 Entities Circle Created by Picking 3 Points

Sketching Circles TheoryThere are four types of circles available in Sketcher:

• Center and Point - Click Center and Point Circle from the Sketchertoolbar and select the location for the center and a location that determinesthe diameter. You can also right-click and select Circle.

• Concentric - Click Concentric Circle from the Sketcher toolbar tocreate a circle that is concentric about an existing circle or arc.

• 3 Point - Click 3 Point Circle from the Sketcher toolbar and selectthree locations that the circle must pass through.

• Tangent to 3 Entities - Click 3 Tangent Circle from the Sketcher toolbarand select three arcs, circles, or lines that the circle must be tangent to.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Sketching Circles

ScenarioSketch Circles in Sketcher.

Sketching_Circles sketch_circles.prt

Task 1: Sketch circles and concentric circles in Sketcher.

1. In the model tree, right-click CNR-PNT_CONCENTRIC_CIRCLEand select Edit Definition.


3. Click Center and Point Circlefrom the Sketcher toolbar.

4. Select the vertical and horizontalreference intersection.

5. Move the cursor out until thecircle diameter snaps to equaldiameter with the arc. Click tocomplete the circle.

6. Sketch another circle so it snapsto the arc endpoint.

7. Click Concentric Circlefrom the Sketcher toolbar andselect the largest circle.• Move the cursor up until thecircle diameter snaps to theright arc endpoint.

• Click to complete the circle.• Middle-click to cancel furthercircle creation.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

8. Select the arc and create anotherconcentric circle.


Task 2: Sketch 3 point circles in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of 3-PNT_CIRCLE.

2. Click 3 Point Circle from theSketcher toolbar.

3. Select the line endpoint and therectangle corner.

4. Move the cursor to the right andselect the right rectangle corner.

5. Click Done Section .

Task 3: Sketch a tangent circle in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of 3-TANGENT_CIRCLE.

2. Click 3 Tangent Circle fromthe Sketcher toolbar.

3. Select the upper circle.4. Select the left arc.5. Select the right circle.6. Click Done Section .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Sketching ArcsYou can create numerous types of arcs within Sketcher.

There are five types of Arcs:• 3–Point• Tangent End• Concentric• Center and Endpoints• Tangent to 3 Entities

3-Point Versus Tangent ArcCreation

Arc Tangent to 3 Entities Center and Endpoints Arc

Sketching Arcs TheoryThere are five types of arcs available in Sketcher:

• 3–Point - Click 3-Point / Tangent End Arc from the Sketcher toolbarand select the locations for the two arc endpoints and the arc diameter.When you select an existing line endpoint, a green "quadrant" symbolappears around that endpoint. Move the cursor through the quadrantsperpendicular to the line to create a 3-Point arc. You can also right-click inSketcher and select 3-Point/Tangent End.

• Tangent End - Click 3-Point / Tangent End Arc from the Sketchertoolbar, select an existing line endpoint, and move the cursor through thegreen quadrants parallel to the line to create a Tangent End arc. You canalso right-click and select 3-Point/Tangent End.

• Concentric - Click Concentric Arc from the Sketcher toolbar to createan arc that is concentric about an existing arc or circle.

• Center and Endpoints - Click Center and Ends Arc from the Sketchertoolbar to create an arc with center and ends that you select.

• Tangent to 3 Entities - Click 3 Tangent Arc from the Sketcher toolbarand select three arcs, circles, or lines that the arc must be tangent to.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Sketching Arcs

ScenarioSketch Arcs in Sketcher.

Sketching_Arcs sketching_arcs.prt

Task 1: Sketch 3 Point and Tangent End Arcs in Sketcher.

1. In the model tree, right-click 3-PNT_TANGENT-END_ARC and selectEdit Definition.


3. Click 3-Point / Tangent EndArc from the Sketcher toolbar.• Select the upper line endpoint,move the cursor horizontal tothe left, and select the verticaland horizontal referenceintersection.

• Move the cursor above thehorizontal reference and clickto create the arc.

4. Click Undo .

5. Click 3-Point / Tangent EndArc from the Sketcher toolbar.• Select the upper line endpoint,move the cursor up, and selectthe vertical and horizontalreference intersection tocreate the tangent arc.

6. Select the endpoint of theprevious arc and create a newtangent arc of equal radius.

7. Select the endpoint of theprevious arc and create a newtangent arc.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Sketch Concentric Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of CONCENTRIC_ARC.

2. Click Concentric Arc fromthe Sketcher toolbar flyout.• Select the upper arc centerand select the horizontalreference to the right of thecenter.

• Move the cursorcounterclockwise and selectthe horizontal reference againto create the arc.

• Middle-click to stop concentricarc creation.

3. Select the lower arc center andselect the left arc endpoint.

4. Select the right arc endpoint tocreate the concentric arc.

5. Middle-click to stop concentricarc creation.


Task 3: Sketch Center and Ends Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of CENTER-ENDS_ARC.

2. Click Display Constraints to disable their display.

3. Click Center and Ends Arcfrom the Sketcher toolbar flyout.• Select the vertical andhorizontal referenceintersection.

• Select the left and upperendpoints of the lines to createthe arc.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

4. Select the vertical and horizontalreference intersection again.

5. Select the right and bottomendpoints of the lines to createthe arc.


Task 4: Sketch 3-Tangent Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of 3-TANGENT_ARC.

2. Click Display Constraints to enable their display.

3. Click 3 Tangent Arc fromthe Sketcher toolbar flyout.

4. Select the left circle, right circle,and line.

5. Click Undo .

6. Click 3 Tangent Arc .7. Select the line, left circle, and

right circle.8. Click Done Section .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Sketching Circular FilletsRound sharp corners of a Sketch using Circular Fillets.

Circular Fillets:• Can be applied to concave orconvex corners.

• Corners do not have to be 90°.• Radius size is based on picklocation.

Convex Fillet

Radius Size Based on Pick Location Concave Fillet

Sketching Circular Fillets TheoryThe Circular Fillet option creates a rounded intersection between anytwo non-parallel entities. When you create a Circular Fillet between twolines, the lines are automatically trimmed to the fillet. If you create a CircularFillet between any other entities, you must delete the remaining segmentsmanually.• Circular Fillets can be applied to either concave or convex corners. Thecorners do not have to be at 90°.

• The radius size is based on pick location, as shown in the lower-left figure.

In addition to the icon, you can right-click in Sketcher and selectFillet.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Sketching Circular Fillets

ScenarioSketch Circular Fillets in Sketcher.

Sketch_Fillets sketch_fillets.prt

Task 1: Sketch circular fillets in Sketcher.

1. In the model tree, right-click CIRCULAR_FILLET and select EditDefinition.


3. Click Circular Fillet fromthe Sketcher toolbar.

4. Select the two points to createthe fillet.

5. Select two points to create thenext fillet.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly



9. Click Display Constraintsfrom the main toolbar to enabletheir display.

10. Click Constrain from theSketcher toolbar.

11. Click Equal from theConstraints dialog box andconstrain the fillets.

12. Click OK from the Select dialog box.13. Click Close from the Constraints dialog box.14. Click Done Section .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module6Using Sketcher Tools

Module OverviewOnce you sketch geometry, it typically needs to be modified or furthermanipulated.In this module, you learn the tools available for modifying and manipulatingyour sketch, as well as how to handle any conflicts that may arise whilesketching.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand construction geometry theory.• Learn how to sketch points.• Use geometry tools to edit geometry in a sketch.• Create new sketch files, as well as place and manipulate sketches.• Create and modify dimensions, as well as handle any sketcher conflictsthat arise.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Construction Geometry TheoryUse Construction Geometry to help control design intent,simplify dimension schemes, and simplify sketches.

Construction Geometry:• Can be dimensioned andconstrained.

• Solid geometry snaps to it.• Does not add entities to finalsketch.

• Can make an otherwise difficultscheme easy.

• Can reduce the number ofdimensions/constraints used.

Construction Geometry Controlsa Sketch

Construction Geometry SimplifiesSketches

Construction Geometry SimplifiesDimension Schemes

Understanding Construction Geometry TheoryConstruction entities enable you to create references on the fly. Constructiongeometry is important because it enables you to easily constrain your sketch.It is signified by a dashed yellow entity within Sketcher.• Construction geometry can be dimensioned and constrained just likeregular, solid geometry.

• Solid sketched geometry will snap to construction geometry which meansthat construction geometry can be used to control a sketch. In theupper-right figure, the arc centers are snapped to the construction lineendpoints. Therefore, changing the construction geometry length or angledimensions will cause the arcs to move accordingly.

• Construction geometry does not appear in the final Sketch feature.Therefore, it does not add entities to the final sketch.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Construction geometry can make an otherwise difficult dimensioningscheme easy. In the lower-right figure, one dimension is used to controlthe entire sketch. All line endpoints are snapped to the construction circle.Without the construction circle, a lot more dimensions and constraintswould be required to properly constrain the sketch.

• Construction geometry can simplify sketches. In the lower-left figure, thesketch has been simplified by constraining line vertices that must snap toan imaginary arc to a construction geometry arc.

Creating Construction GeometryAlmost any solid sketched geometry entity can be converted into constructiongeometry. Create construction geometry by sketching conventional geometry.Next, select the geometry, right-click, and select Construction. You canalso click Edit > Toggle Construction from the main menu. To changeconstruction geometry back to solid geometry, select it and either right-clickand select Solid or click Edit > Toggle Construction.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Sketching PointsSketcher points, like construction geometry, do not contribute tothe resulting sketch geometry.

Sketcher Point uses the following:• Dimension to theoretical sharps.• Dimension slanted on arcs.• Provide an anchor or pivot point ina sketch.

Dimensioning to Theoretical Sharp

Providing a Pivot Point Dimensioning Slanted on Arcs

Sketching Points TheorySketcher Points are created by using the Point icon from the Sketchertoolbar. Sketcher points do not contribute to the resulting sketch geometry ina feature. This makes them similar to construction geometry.Sketcher points have the following uses:• Dimension to theoretical sharps - In the upper-left figure, a Sketcher Pointhas been placed at the theoretical corner sharp. As a result, this theoreticalsharp can be used for controlling design intent through a dimension.

• Dimension slanted on arcs - In the lower-right figure, a Sketcher Point hasbeen placed on each arc. As such, a slanted dimension can be created tomeasure the distance between arc tangencies.

• Provide an anchor or pivot point - In the lower-left figure, a SketcherPoint has been placed at the intersection of the arc and the vertical andhorizontal references. As such, the angular dimension can be modified,and the entire sketch will pivot about the Sketcher Point.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using Geometry Tools within SketcherUse Geometry Tools to modify existing sketched entities.

Dynamically Trimming Entities

There are four geometry tools:• Dynamic Trim• Trim to other entities• Divide• Mirror

Trimming to Other Entities Dividing a Circle

Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher TheoryYou can use various Geometry Tools within Sketcher to modify existinggeometry. You can dynamically trim entities, trim entities to other entities,divide entities, and mirror entities. You can undo any operation done usingGeometry Tools.

Dynamically Trimming EntitiesYou can dynamically trim the parts of sketched entities you no longer need.When dynamically trimming, any entity that you touch while dragging will bedeleted

Trimming to Other EntitiesYou can trim or extend sketched entities to other entities in Sketcher. To trimentities, select the entity side you want to keep.

Dividing EntitiesYou can divide a sketched entity into two or more new entities. The systemdivides the entity at the point(s) you select.

Some sketched features require portions of a sketch to maintain anequal number of entities.

Mirroring EntitiesYou can mirror selected sketched entities about a centerline. If you mirror,for example, a line whose endpoint is on the centerline, the mirrored linegeometry will join with the original line to become one line entity. You cannotmirror dimensions, text entities, or centerlines.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher

ScenarioUse the different geometry tools in Sketcher.

Geometry_Tools geom_tools.prt

Task 1: Dynamically trim sketched entities.

1. In the model tree, right-clickDYNAMIC_TRIM and selectEdit Definition.


3. Click Trim/Delete Segmentfrom the Sketcher toolbar, andclick and drag to dynamicallytrim the entities.

4. Zoom in on the upper-right partof the sketch.

5. Dynamically trim theoverhanging arcs.

6. Perform the same trims to thelower sketch portion.


Task 2: Trim sketched entities to other sketched entities.

1. Edit the definition ofTRIM_ENTITIES.

2. Click Display Constraintsto enable their display.

3. Click Trim Corner from theSketcher toolbar, and select thetwo entities to trim.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

4. Click Undo .

5. Click Trim Corner andselect the two entities to trim.

6. Select the two entities to trim.

7. Select the two entities to trim.

8. Select the two entities to trim.9. Click Done Section .

Task 3: Divide sketched entities.

1. Edit the definition of DIVIDE.

2. Click Divide from theSketcher toolbar, and select thetwo circle locations to divide.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

3. Middle click to stop dividingentities.

4. Select the left half of the dividedcircle.

5. Click Divide and divide thecircle four more times.


Task 4: Mirror sketched entities.

1. Edit the definition of MIRROR.

2. Click Display Dimensionsto enable their display. Noticethe top 7.25 dimension.

3. Click and drag a window aroundall sketched entities.

4. Click Mirror from theSketcher toolbar.

5. Select the vertical centerline.6. Notice the top 14.50 dimension.

7. Select the upper horizontal line.8. Select the lower arc.9. Click Done Section .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher

Manipulate Sketches using:• Cut/Copy/Paste• Scale and Rotate

Scaled and Rotated Sketch Rotating a Sketch

Manipulating Sketches within SketcherYou can cut, copy, and paste sketched entities. To do this, you can use eitherthe context-sensitive right-mouse pop-up menu, icons in the main toolbar, orthe Edit menu. You can perform cut, copy, and paste operations from withina sketch or from one sketch to another.You can also scale and rotate selected sketch entities. Scaling and rotatingpasted entities are the first available operations when you paste sketchedentities into a sketch. You can scale and rotate existing sketch entities byselecting them and clicking Edit > Scale and Rotate from the main menu or

Scale and Rotate from the Sketcher toolbar.You can scale and rotate entities either by using the Scale Rotate dialog boxor you can use the drag handles that appear on the entities.• Click and drag the Location handle to move the entities about Sketcher.To help properly place the entities, you can right-click and drag to relocatethe Location handle.

• Click and drag the Scale handle to dynamically scale the entities orenter a value in the Scale Rotate dialog box.

• Click and drag the Rotate handle to dynamically rotate the entities orenter a value in the Scale Rotate dialog box.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher

ScenarioManipulate Sketches within Sketcher.

Manipulating_Sketches manip_sketches.prt

Task 1: Copy, scale, and rotate a sketch.

1. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition.

2. Sketcher display:3. Drag a window around all sketched entities.4. Right-click and select Cut.

5. Right-click and select Paste.6. Click in the upper-right quadrant

to place the sketch.7. Right-click on the X Location

handle and drag it to the upperarc endpoint.

8. Click and drag the ( ) Rotationhandle to rotate the sketch 90°counterclockwise.

9. Click and drag the X Locationhandle to reposition the sketch.

10. In the Scale Rotate dialog box,edit the Scale to 1 and theRotate to 90 if necessary.• Click Accept Changes .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. Click Paste from the maintoolbar.

12. Click in the lower left Sketcherquadrant.

13. Right-click on the X Locationhandle and drag it to the lowerarc endpoint.

14. Click and drag the ( ) Rotationhandle to rotate the sketch 90°clockwise.

15. Click and drag the X Locationhandle to reposition the sketch.

16. In the Scale Rotate dialog box,edit the Scale to 0.5.• Click Accept Changes .

17. Click Line Tangent andsketch the tangent line.

18. Click Trim/Delete Segmentand trim the hanging arcs.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Dimensioning Entities within SketcherHow you dimension your sketch will reflect your design intent.

Dimension types include:• Length (line)• Angle• Distance• Radius• Diameter• Revolved Diameter

Middle-click to place dimensions.

Revolved Diameter Dimension

Length and Angle Dimensions

Distance, Radius, and DiameterDimensions

Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher TheoryWhen dimensioning a sketch, it is important to create dimensions that captureyour design intent because these dimensions are displayed when you editthe model and when you create drawings of the model.

Dimensions are all created using the Normal Dimension icon. You canalso right-click and select Dimension. Select entities to be dimensioned andmiddle-click to place the dimension. The type of dimension created dependsupon what is selected and where the dimension is placed.The following dimension types can be created:• Length (line) - Select a line and place the dimension. The line lengthis dimensioned.

• Angle - You can create an angle measurement by selecting two linearreferences. Where you place the dimension determines how the angle ismeasured (acute versus obtuse). You can also create an arc angle byselecting an arc and its endpoints, and then placing the dimension.

• Distance - Select two entities to measure the distance between and placethe dimension. Again, where you place the dimension will determinewhether it is vertical, horizontal, or slanted. The Dim Orientation dialog


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

box enables you to determine whether the dimension is to be vertical orhorizontal.

• Radius - Select an arc or circle once, then place the dimension.• Diameter - Double-click an arc or circle, then place the dimension.• Revolved Diameter - Select the entity, a centerline, and the entity againand place the dimension. Alternatively, you can select the centerline, theentity, and the centerline again.

Weak DimensionsBecause the Intent Manager must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times,a sketch initially is dimensioned using weak dimensions. As you dimensionyour sketch (these are strong dimensions) using your desired design intent,the weak dimensions automatically disappear.

You can convert weak dimensions to strong dimensions by selectingthe weak dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Strong.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher

ScenarioDimension entities within Sketcher.

Dimensioning_Entities dimensions.prt

Task 1: Create length dimensions in Sketcher.

1. In the model tree, right-clickLENGTH and select EditDefinition.

2. Sketcher display:3. Click Normal Dimension

from the Sketcher toolbar.4. Select the vertical line and

middle-click to the left to placethe dimension.

5. Select the angled line andmiddle-click to place thedimension. Notice the weakdimensions are disappearing.

6. Select the upper line andmiddle-click to place thedimension.


Task 2: Create angle dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of ANGLE.2. Click Normal Dimension .3. Select the angled line, the

horizontal reference, andmiddle-click to place thedimension.

4. Select the arc, select each arcendpoint, and middle-click toplace the dimension.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 3: Create distance dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of DISTANCE.2. Click Normal Dimension .3. Select the arc centers and

middle-click to the left of thevertical reference.

4. Click Undo .

5. Click Normal Dimension .6. Select the arc centers and

middle-click below the horizontalreference.

7. Click Undo .

8. Click Normal Dimension .9. Select the arcs and middle-click

to place the dimension.10. Select Vert from the Dim

Orientation dialog box.• Click Accept.

11. Click Undo .

12. Click Normal Dimension .13. Select the arcs and middle-click

to place the dimension.14. Select Horiz from the Dim

Orientation dialog box.• Click Accept.

15. Click Undo .

16. Click Normal Dimension .17. Select the arc centers and

middle-click to place thedimension.


Task 4: Create radius dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of RADIUS.2. Click Normal Dimension .3. Select the left circle and



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

4. Select the arc and middle-clickto place the dimension.


Task 5: Create arc and circle diameter dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition ofARC_CIRCLE_DIA.

2. Click Normal Dimension .3. Double-click the arc and


4. Double-click the circle andmiddle-click to place thedimension.


Task 6: Create revolved diameter dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of REV_DIA.2. Click Normal Dimension .3. Click the long vertical line,

centerline, and long vertical lineagain.

4. Middle-click to place thedimension.

5. Click Select One By One anddrag the dimension.

6. Click Normal Dimension .7. Click the short vertical line,

centerline, and short vertical lineagain.

8. Middle-click to place thedimension.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Modifying Dimensions within SketcherYou can modify individual dimensions or many all at once.

Modify dimensions by:• Editing the value.• Dragging the entity to which thedimension is attached.

• Using the Modify Dimensionsdialog box.

Modify Dimensions Dialog Box

Editing the Value Dragging an Entity

Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher TheoryYou can modify dimensions in Sketcher by using any of the following methods:• Edit the dimension manually by double-clicking it. The geometry placementwill update to the new dimension.

• Click and drag the entity that the dimension is attached to. The dimensionvalue will update automatically.

• Use the Modify Dimensions dialog box. When you select the dimension,it highlights in the graphics window. You can edit values or scroll thewheel next to the dimension you wish to modify. The dimension value willincrease or decrease depending on the direction of scrolling.– You can adjust the sensitivity to adjust how finely or coarsely dimension

wheels scroll.– If Regenerate is selected, the sketch geometry will update immediately

after a dimension is edited. If the check box is cleared, you can adjustany or all dimensions within the Modify Dimensions dialog box, and thegeometry will not update until you click Regenerate Section .

– If Lock Scale is selected, you can modify one dimension and all otherdimension values update automatically to new values at the same ratio.

Locking the scale to edit dimensions is common when creating thefirst feature of a model.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher

ScenarioModify dimensions within Sketcher.

Modifying_Dims modify_dimensions.prt

Task 1: Modify dimensions in Sketch 1.



3. Click and drag the uppervertical line until the diameter isapproximately 204.

4. Double-click the 204 dimension,edit it to 180, and press ENTER.

5. Edit the 180 dimension to 8. The sketch is distorted due to therelative dimension differences.

6. Click Undo .

7. Drag a window around alldimensions.

8. Click Modify from theSketcher toolbar.

9. In the Modify Dimensions dialogbox click in the 292 dimensionfield.• Scroll the wheel toapproximately 400.

• Select Lock Scale.• Edit the 400 dimension to 16and press ENTER.

• Click Regenerate Section .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. Edit the remaining dimensionvalues.


Task 2: Modify dimensions in Sketch 2.


2. Click Modify .3. Select each dimension to add it

to the dialog box.

4. Scroll the wheel back and forth for the 108 dimension.5. Drag the Sensitivity slider to the left.6. Again, scroll the wheel back and forth for the 108 dimension.7. Edit the 96 dimension to 100 and press ENTER.8. Clear the Regenerate check box.

9. Edit the dimensions as shown.10. Click Regenerate Section .

11. Click Refit from the maintoolbar and zoom in.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Sketcher ConflictsSketcher conflicts occur from manually adding too manyconstraints or dimensions.

Conflicts caused by:• Adding too many dimensions.• Adding too many constraints.

Conflicts handled by:• Deleting unwanted constraints ordimensions.

• Converting dimensions toReference dimensions.

Sketcher Conflict

Conflicting Dimension Converted toReference Dimension Resolve Sketch Dialog Box

Sketcher Conflict CausesThe Sketcher Intent Manager strives to maintain a fully constrained sketchautomatically. Sketcher Conflicts are caused by an overconstrained sketchcondition that arises from manually adding too many constraints or too manydimensions.

Resolving Sketcher ConflictsWhen a Sketcher Conflict occurs, the Resolve Sketch dialog box appears,as shown in the lower figure. The Resolve Sketch dialog box displays whichconstraints and/or dimensions conflict. The graphics window also highlightsthe conflicting items in red. When a Sketcher Conflict arises, you can resolveit by using either of the following techniques:• Delete the conflicting constraints or dimensions to revert the sketch backto fully constrained.

• Convert dimensions to Reference dimensions. A Reference dimension isnot a driving dimension that constrains a sketch. You cannot modify aReference dimension, but it does update with geometry changes.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Sketcher Conflicts

ScenarioResolve conflicts in Sketcher.

Sketcher_Conflicts sketcher_conflicts.prt

Task 1: Resolve conflicts due to added constraints.



3. Constrain the arc perpendicularto the vertical reference.

4. Select the 6.5 dimension fromthe Resolve Sketch dialog box.• Click Delete.

5. Add the constraint that makesthe two highlighted lines equal.

6. Select the 7.3 dimension fromthe graphics window.

7. In the Resolve Sketch dialogbox, click Dim > Ref.

8. Click Done Section


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Resolve conflicts due to added dimensions.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2.2. Dimension from the vertical

reference to the upper-right arccenter and place the dimensionunder the sketch geometry.

3. Select the 16 dimension fromthe Resolve Sketch dialog box.• Click Delete.

4. Double-click the lower-leftarc and place the diameterdimension.

5. Select row 3 from the ResolveSketch dialog box.• Click Delete.


7. Modify the dimensions asshown.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating New Sketch FilesSketch files can be imported later into other files.

Creating a New Sketch File

Click File > New to create a newSketch.

Save a sketch out of an existingmodel.

File extension is *.sec.

Sketch File

Creating New Sketch Files TheoryA sketch can either be created within a model or it can be saved as its ownfile. If created within a model, it can be saved as a sketch file, which has a fileextension of *.sec. You can also create a new sketch file by selecting Sketchfrom the New dialog box. Any sketch file can be imported into a model andplaced in a Sketch feature.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating New Sketch Files

ScenarioCreate new sketch files and save sketches from existing parts.

New_Sketches save_sketch_from_model.prt

Task 1: Save a sketch from an existing part.

1. In the model tree, right-clickEXTRUDE_1 and select EditDefinition.

2. In the dashboard select thePlacement tab.• Click Edit.


4. Click File > Save a Copy from the main menu.5. In the Save a Copy dialog box, type CRANK_LOBE.SEC as the

New Name.• Click OK.

6. Click Done Section .7. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.8. Click Window > Close.

Task 2: Create a new 2-D sketch file.

1. Click File > New from the main menu.2. In the New dialog box, select Sketch.

• Edit the Name to D_shape.• Click OK.

3. Click Center and Point Circlefrom the Sketcher toolbar

and sketch the circle.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

4. Click Line from the Sketchertoolbar and sketch a verticalline whose endpoints are on thecircle.

5. Click Trim/Delete Segmentfrom the Sketcher toolbar andtrim the right arc.

6. Click Normal Dimensionfrom the Sketcher toolbar.

7. Double-click the arc and placethe diameter dimension.

8. Select the vertical line and thearc and middle-click to place thedimension.

9. Edit the dimensions to the valuesshown.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Placing Sections into SketcherPlacing sections into your model saves time and encouragesreuse of common shapes.

Place sections:• From the File System• Using the Sketcher Palette

Placing a Section

The Sketcher Palette

Placing Sections into Sketcher TheoryYou can insert preexisting sketches into your sketch. This helps to save timerather than recreating an existing sketch. It also promotes data reuse. Thereare two different methods that you can use to place section:• Place a section from file - This can be a *.sec file that you have createdusing File > New and selecting Sketch, or it can be a sketch that you havesaved from a different model. Either way, you can browse to the location ofthe existing sketch section file and place it.

• Use the Sketcher Palette - The Sketcher palette enables you to quicklyplace common, basic shapes, such as I-beams and hexagons, into yoursketch. The Sketcher Palette contains a tab for the current workingdirectory as well as default tabs for polygons, profiles, shapes, and stars.You can create additional, custom tabs simply by creating folders in theSketcher Palette library location. When you add sketch *.sec files to thefolder, they are listed in a tab with the same name in the Sketcher Palette.

When you place a sketch you can scale and rotate it.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Placing Sections into Sketcher

ScenarioPlace sections within Sketcher.

Placing_Sections place_section.prt

Task 1: Place a section from a file.


2. Sketcher display:3. Click Sketch > Data from File > File System from the main menu.4. Select d_shape.sec from the Open dialog box.

• Click Open.

5. Click in the graphics window toplace the section.

6. Relocate the Location handle tothe arc center.

7. Relocate the section to thevertical and horizontal referenceintersection.

8. In the Scale Rotate dialog box,edit the Scale to 2.• Click Accept Changes .


Task 2: Place a section from the Sketcher Palette.


2. Click Palette from the Sketcher toolbar.3. In the Sketcher Palette dialog box, select each of the different tabs

and review their contents.• Select the Polygons tab.• Select the Octagon section to preview it.• Double-click the Octagon section.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

4. Click in the graphics window toplace the section.

5. Relocate the section to thevertical and horizontal referenceintersection.

6. In the Scale Rotate dialog box,edit the Scale to 1.• Click Accept Changes .

7. Click Close from the SketcherPalette.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module7Creating Sketches for Features

Module OverviewUp to this point, you have learned how to sketch geometry within the Sketcherenvironment. In this module, you apply that knowledge to the creation ofsketch features. Sketch features typically serve as references to otherfeatures and can exist separately as their own feature or as the starting pointwhen you create sketch-based features. You learn how to specify the sketchsetup for a sketch feature, utilize sketch references, and use entity from edge.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Learn how to create sketch features.• Specify the sketch setup.• Utilize sketch references.• Use entity from edge within Sketcher.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Sketches (’Sketch’ Feature)To create a Sketch Feature, specify the Sketch Setup, selectadditional sketch references, and sketch the geometry.

• You can modify the Sketch Setup.• You can use references to snapgeometry or dimensions.

• You can create 3-D geometry byusing the Sketch feature.

Specifying Sketch Setup

Modifying Sketch SetupSketch Geometry Snapped to

Added Reference

Creating Sketches (’Sketch’ Feature) TheoryYou can create a sketch feature by starting the Sketch Tool from thefeature toolbar. Creating a sketch feature involves the following three steps:• Specify the sketch setup. Once the sketch setup has been defined you canalways change it to another plane.

• Select additional sketch references that you intend to dimension from orsnap to with sketch geometry.

• Sketch the geometry.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Specifying the Sketch SetupThe Sketch Setup determines the sketching plane and themodel’s orientation in the graphics window.

Sketch Setup consists of:• Sketch Plane• Sketch Orientation

Use Sketch Orientation at anytime to orient the sketch parallel tothe screen.

Default Orientation

Sketch Plane FRONT withOrientation Reference TOP

Facing Left

Sketch Plane FRONT withOrientation Reference TOP

Facing Top

Specifying the Sketch Setup TheoryWhen you create a sketch feature, the Sketch Setup is used to tellPro/ENGINEER which plane the sketch feature will be created on and how itwill be oriented:• Sketch Plane - The 2-D sketch exists in this planar reference. Thesketching plane can be either a datum plane or a planar surface of anexisting solid or surface feature. If you create more than one sketch on thesame sketch plane, you can click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box touse the previous sketch feature’s sketch setup.

• Sketch Orientation - Determines how the sketch will be oriented in thegraphics window and model. Sketch orientation consists of two items:– Orientation Reference - The orientation reference determines the 2-D

orientation of the sketch. This reference is also either a datum plane ora planar surface and must be normal to the sketch plane.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

– Orientation Direction - Determines the direction that the orientationreference faces. The orientation reference can be assigned to face top,bottom, right, or left. These directions are named to reflect how thereference orients with regard to the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window.Note that datum planes have two sides, brown and gray, and that thebrown, or positive side, orients to the selected direction.

When you specify a sketch plane, the default orientation referenceand orientation direction are determined based on the model’sorientation in the graphics window when you entered the sketchsetup.

Different combinations of selected orientation reference and orientationdirection will yield the same sketch orientation in the graphics window. Inthe lower-left figure, the datum plane RIGHT could be selected as theOrientation Reference to face right to yield the same result. You can alsoreverse the sketch orientation by clicking Flip from the Sketch dialog box.If ever you reorient the model while sketching, you can click Sketch

Orientation to return the sketch parallel to the screen.When you start a new sketch feature you are required to specify the sketchsetup. However, once you are creating the sketch feature you can always

reenter sketch setup by clicking either Sketch Setup from the Sketchertoolbar or Sketch > Sketch Setup from the main menu.Within the Properties tab of the Sketch dialog box you can modify the nameof the sketch feature as it appears in the model tree. Also, if you edit thedefinition of an existing closed sketch, you can select X-Hatch from theProperties tab to hatch the inside of the sketch within the graphics window.You can also edit the spacing of the hatch lines. While you cannot modifythe angle of the hatch lines, you can modify the angle within the drawingview of a drawing.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Specifying the Sketch Setup

ScenarioSpecify the Sketch Setup on various datum planes.

Sketch_Setup sketch_setup.prt

Task 1: Specify the Sketch Setup on datum plane FRONT.

1. The T, R, and F features have been added for training purposes tohelp visualize and distinguish datum planes.

2. Start the Sketch Tool fromthe feature toolbar.• Select datum plane FRONT.• Click Sketch from the Sketchdialog box.

3. Reorient the model to a 3-D orientation.

4. Click Sketch Orientation from the main toolbar.

5. Click Sketch Setup fromthe Sketcher toolbar.• In the Sketch dialog box, clickFlip.

• Click Sketch.

6. Click Quit Section from the Sketcher toolbar.• Click Yes.

Task 2: Specify the Sketch Setup on datum plane TOP.

1. Orient the model to the Standard Orientation.

2. Start the Sketch Tool .• Select datum plane TOP.• Click Sketch.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

3. Click Sketch Setup .• In the Sketch dialog box,select Bottom as the newOrientation.

• Click Sketch.

4. Click Quit Section .• Click Yes.

Task 3: Specify the Sketch Setup on datum plane RIGHT.

1. Orient the model to the Standard Orientation.

2. Start the Sketch Tool .• Select datum plane RIGHT.• Click Sketch.

3. Click Sketch Setup .• In the Sketch dialog box, selectTop as the new orientation fordatum plane TOP.

• Click Sketch.

4. Click Sketch Setup .5. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.6. Select datum plane FRONT as

the new Reference.7. Click Sketch.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 4: Specify the Sketch Setup on model geometry.

1. Orient the model to the Standard Orientation.2. Resume the four suppressed features in the model tree.

3. Start the Sketch Tool .• Select the top, flat surface asthe Sketch Plane.

• Select datum plane FRONTas the Reference.

• Click Sketch.

4. Click Sketch Setup .5. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.6. Right-click and select

Placement.7. Select the right surface as the

new Sketch Plane.8. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.9. Select datum plane TOP as the

new Reference.10. Click Sketch.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Utilizing Sketch ReferencesSketch references are used to capture design intent by snappinggeometry or dimensioning to them.

The following types of entities canbe selected:• Solid or surface geometry• Sketches• Datum features

Unused references automaticallyremoved.

The References Dialog Box

Geometry Snapped to ReferencesAdditional Sketching References

Added

Utilizing Sketch References TheoryYou use sketch references to snap sketch geometry to, which can cut downthe number of dimensions required. Should dimensions be required, youdimension to or from sketch references. Sketch references appear as dashedentities in the Sketcher.When selecting entities from existing features, you create a parent/childrelationship between the sketch and the entity you added as a reference.However, if you add a sketch reference and it goes unused, the systemautomatically removes it as a sketch reference. Conversely, if you dimensionto or from an entity the system automatically adds it as a sketch reference.

You add sketch references either by clicking References from theSketcher toolbar or Sketch > References from the main menu. At this point,the References dialog box opens. The References dialog box consists of thefollowing items:


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Select References - Select entities in the graphics window. The followingtypes of entities can be selected as sketch references:– Solid or surface geometry - Select the edges or surfaces of features

that have already been created.– Sketches - Select geometry from existing sketches.– Datum Features - Select datum planes, datum axes, points, and

coordinate systems.• Select Xsec References - Select a surface or datum plane to intersect withthe sketching plane.

• Selection Filters - Used for selecting items within the Reference list.Choices from the drop-down list include Use Edge/Offset, All Non-Dim.Refs, Chain Refs, and All References.

• Replace - Select a reference from the list, click Replace, and select anew reference.

• Delete - Delete the selected reference from the list.• Reference Status - Displays the status of the sketch with respect toreferences. Status options include Unsolved Sketch, Partially Placed, andFully Placed.

• Solve - You can solve an unsolved or partially placed sketch after changingreferences.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Sketch References

ScenarioUtilize Sketch References in Sketcher.

Sketch_References references.prt

Task 1: Select and use references in Sketcher.

1. Start the Sketch Tool fromthe feature toolbar.• Select the surface.• Edit the Orientation directionto Right.

• Click Sketch.

2. Click Plane Display todisable their display.


4. Click No hidden

5. Click References from theSketcher toolbar.• Select the three additionalreferences shown as well asDTM1 from the model tree.

6. Orient to the StandardOrientation.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. Click Sketch Orientation .8. In the References

dialog box, select theEdge:F8(EXTRUDE_1)reference and click Delete.

9. Select the far left vertical edgein the graphics window to add itas a reference.

10. Click Close from the Referencesdialog box.

11. Click Line and sketch theclosed section.



14. Click References . Theunused reference was removed.


16. Click Shading .17. Hide Sketch 3.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using Entity from Edge within SketcherYou can reuse existing geometry by selecting it with Use Entityfrom Edge within Sketcher.

Two types:• Entity from Edge• Entity Offset from Edge

Select edge types:• Single• Chain• Loop

Reused Entities from Edge

Reused Entities Offset from EdgeSelecting the Desired Entity

from Edge Chain

Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher TheoryThe Use Edge and Offset Edge options in Sketcher create sketchergeometry by projecting selected geometry edges onto the sketching plane.The two options are the same except the entity offset from edge enablesyou to specify an offset value. A positive offset value causes the geometryto become larger, whereas a negative offset value causes the geometry tobecome smaller. Each entity created has the "~" constraint symbol.When using the entity from edge options, you can select edges three differentways:• Single - Edges are selected one at a time.• Chain - Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities.Select two edges from the same surface or face and select which chainof geometry you wish to be created. The lower-right figure shows onepossible chain selection from the selected entities.

• Loop - Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. Select asurface or face and the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. Ifmore than one loop exists, you must select the desired one.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher

ScenarioUse the edges of existing geometry in Sketcher.

Use_Edge use_offset_edge.prt

Task 1: Use the edges of geometry in Sketcher.

1. Start the Sketch Tool .• Select the front surface.• Click Sketch.

2. Click No hidden .

3. Sketcher display:4. Click Use Edge from the

Sketcher toolbar.5. Select the top and bottom halves

of the circle.

6. Select Chain from the Typedialog box.

7. Select the bottom arc and toparc.

8. Click Next from the menumanager.• Click Accept.

9. Click Line Tangent andsketch two tangent lines.

10. Click Trim/Delete Segmentand trim the four hanging arcs.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Offset the edges of existing geometry in Sketcher.

1. Start the Sketch Tool .• Click Use Previous.

2. Click Offset Edge from theSketcher toolbar.

3. Select Loop from the Typedialog box.

4. Select the surface.

5. Click Accept from the menumanager.

6. Type 10 and press ENTER.

7. Click Select One By One andedit the dimension to -10.

8. Click Done Section .9. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.

10. Click Shading .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module8Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes

Module OverviewDatum features are commonly required as references when creating otherfeatures. In this module, you learn the theory behind creating datum features,and you create datum axes and datum planes.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Learn the theory behind creating datum features.• Create datum axes.• Create datum planes.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Datum Features TheoryDatum features are commonly required as references whencreating other features.

The following types ofdatum features can becreated:• Datum Planes• Datum Axes• Datum Points• Datum CoordinateSystems

Examples of Datum Features

Creating Datum Features TheoryDatum features are commonly required as references when creating otherfeatures. Datum features can be used as dimensioning references, featureplacement references, and assembly references. The default color of datumfeatures in the graphics window is brown (datum planes are both brown andgrey, depending upon which side is displayed). The following four typesof datum features can be created:• Datum Planes• Datum Axes• Datum Points• Datum Coordinate SystemsExamples of each type of datum feature are shown in the figure.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Datum AxesDatum axes are particularly useful for making datum planes,placing items coaxially, and creating radial patterns.

Auto Axis Created as Revolved Centerline

Definition:• No mass, infinite linearreference

• Display length can bechanged

Uses:• Construction geometry• Reference

Types:• Auto axis• Axis feature• Axis point

Various Datum Axis Types

Datum Axis DefinitionDatum axes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed,hidden, or deleted. A datum axis is a linear reference that has no mass. It isinfinite in length, but its display length can be edited.

Datum Axis UsesA datum axis can be used as construction geometry in a feature. It can alsobe used as a reference for:• Other datum features such as datum planes.• Other features such as a hole location.• Assembling components.

Datum Axis TypesThere are three different types of datum axes that can be created withinPro/ENGINEER:


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

1. Auto Axis - Belongs to another feature and is created in the followingthree circumstances:• A circle is extruded.• A hole is created.• A feature is revolved about a centerline, as shown in the upper figure.

2. Axis Feature - Select most any combination of geometry that defines aline in 3-D space. You can select single or multiple references whichare set as a combination of Through, Normal, Tangent, and Centerconstraint types. The following types of axis features can be created:• Through an edge• Normal to a plane• Through a cylindrical surface• Through the intersection of two planes or planar surfaces• Through two points or vertices• Through the center of an arc• Tangent to an edge• Through a point or vertex, normal to a plane

3. Axis Point - Created only in Sketcher. When the sketch is completed,the axis appears at the location of the axis point, normal to the sketchplane. An axis point can only be used for internal sketches of extrudefeatures.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Axes

ScenarioCreate datum axes on a part model.

Datum_Axes datum_axis.prt

Task 1: Create datum axes on a part model.

1. Start the Datum Axis Toolfrom the feature toolbar.

2. Select the edge.3. Click OK from the Datum Axis

dialog box.

4. Start the Datum Axis Tool .5. Select the surface.6. Click OK.

7. Start the Datum Axis Tool .8. Press CTRL and select datum

plane FRONT and the surface.

9. In the Datum Axis dialog box,select the Display tab.• Select Adjust Outline.• Select Reference from thedrop-down list.

• Select the surface.10. In the Datum Axis dialog box,

select the Properties tab.• Edit the name to REF_1.• Click OK.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. Start the Datum Axis Tool .12. Select the surface.

13. Right-click and select OffsetReferences.

14. Press CTRL and select the twosurfaces.

15. Edit the values to 22 and 3.16. Click OK from the Datum Axis

dialog box.

17. In the model tree, expandExtrude 2.

18. Edit the definition of sketchS2D0035.

19. Click Sketch > Axis Point fromthe main menu.

20. Select the reference intersection.21. Click Done Section .




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Datum PlanesDatum planes are 2-D reference geometry that you use to buildfeature geometry.

Viewing Datum Plane Sides

Definition:• No mass, infinite planar reference• Display size can be changed

Uses:• Default datum planes• Construction geometry• Reference

Types:• Through• Normal• Parallel• Offset• Angle• Tangent• Blend section Datum Plane Types

Datum Plane DefinitionDatum planes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed,hidden, or deleted. A datum plane is a planar reference that has no mass.It is infinite in size, but its display size can be edited to visually fit a part,feature, surface, edge, axis, or radius. A datum plane has two sides thatdisplay brown and grey, as shown in the upper figure.

Datum Plane UsesThe RIGHT, FRONT, and TOP datum planes included in all the defaulttemplates are known as the default datum planes. Every feature is directly orindirectly created off of these datum planes. A datum plane can be used asconstruction geometry for a feature. It can also be used as a reference for:• Other datum features such as datum axes.• Other features such as sketches on an angle.• Assembling components.

Datum Plane TypesWhen creating datum planes, you can select most any combination ofgeometry that defines a plane in 3-D space. You can select single or multiplereferences which are set as a combination of the following seven constrainttypes:


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

1. Through - Select any of the following:• Axis, edge, or curve• Point or vertex• Plane• Cylinder

2. Normal - Select any of the following:• Axis• Edge• Curve• Plane

3. Parallel - Select a plane4. Offset - Select either of the following:

• Plane• Coordinate system

5. Angle - Select a plane6. Tangent - Select a cylinder7. Blend Section - Select a blend feature and a section number


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Planes

ScenarioCreate datum planes in a part model.

Datum_Planes datum-plane.prt

Task 1: Create datum planes in a part model.

1. Start the Datum Plane Toolfrom the feature toolbar.

2. Select the right surface and dragthe drag handle to an offset of12.

3. Click OK from the Datum Planedialog box.

4. With DTM1 still selected, startthe Datum Plane Tool .

5. Drag the drag handle to an offsetof 8.

6. Click OK from the Datum Planedialog box and deselect thedatum plane.

7. Start the Datum Plane Tool .8. Select the surface.9. In the Placement tab of the

Datum Plane dialog box, selectThrough from the drop-downlist.

10. In the datum plane dialog box,select the Display tab.• Select Adjust Outline.• Edit the drop-down list toReference.

• Select surface again.• Edit the drop-down list back toSize.

• Edit the Width and Height to14 and 10, respectively.

• Click OK and deselect thedatum plane.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. Start the Datum Plane Tool .12. Press CTRL and select the

cylinder and edge.

13. In the Datum Plane dialog box,select Tangent from the cylinderreference drop-down list.• Click OK and deselect thedatum plane.

14. Start the Datum Plane Tool .15. Press CTRL and select datum

axis A_2 and datum planeRIGHT.

16. In the Datum Plane dialog box,select Parallel from the datumplane reference drop-down list.• Click OK and deselect thedatum plane.

17. Start the Datum Plane Tool .18. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT.19. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Normal from the datum plane

reference drop-down list.• Click OK and deselect the datum plane.

20. Start the Datum Plane Tool .21. Press CTRL and select datum

axis A_2 and the surface.22. Edit the offset value to 10 and

click OK.

23. Edit the definition of DTM4.24. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select the Display tab and click Flip.

• Click OK.25. De-select the datum plane.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module9Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs

Module OverviewOnce you have created 2-D sketches, you can use those sketches to create3-D geometry.In this module, you use 2-D sketches to create 3-D solid geometry featuresincluding extrude, revolve, and rib features. You also learn about the commondashboard options associated with these types of sketch-based features.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create solid extrude and revolve features.• Create rib features.• Learn common dashboard options including extrude depth, featuredirection, thickening sketches, and revolve angle.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Solid Extrude FeaturesCreate extruded features from 2-D sketches.

• Extrude sections perpendicular tothe sketching plane.

• Add or remove material from themodel.

Viewing 2-D Sketches

Extrude Feature Adding Material Extrude Feature Removing Material

Creating Solid Extrude Features TheoryAn extrude feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. It linearly extrudesa sketch perpendicular to the sketching plane to create or remove material.You can either select the sketch first and then start the Extrude tool, or youcan start the Extrude tool and then select the sketch.

In an assembly you cannot create an extrude feature that addsmaterial. You can only remove material.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Extrude Features

ScenarioCreate solid extrude features.

Extrude_Features extrude.prt

Task 1: Create solid extrude features.

1. Start the Extrude Tool fromthe feature toolbar.

2. Select Sketch 1.3. Drag the drag handle down

below datum plane TOP to adepth of 16.

4. Click Complete Feature fromthe dashboard.

5. Start the Extrude Tool .6. Select Sketch 2.7. Edit the height to 24.8. Click Complete Feature .

9. Start the Extrude Tool .10. Select Sketch 3.

11. Click Remove Material fromthe dashboard.

12. Edit the depth to Through All.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Common Dashboard Options: Extrude DepthYou can extrude a sketch to many different depth options.

Extrude depthoptions:• Blind• Symmetric• To Next• Through All• Through Until• To Selected• Side 1/Side 2

Extrude Depth Options

Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth TheoryWhen you create an extrude feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth at whichthe feature extrudes can be set in a variety of ways depending upon thedesign intent you wish to capture. Extrude depth options include:• Blind (Variable) - This is the default depth option. You can edit this depthvalue by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, orusing the dashboard.

• Symmetric - The section extrudes equally on both sides of the sketchplane. You can edit the total depth at which the feature extrudes just asyou can with the Blind depth option. Therefore, the Symmetric depth isessentially the same as a Blind Symmetric depth.

• To Next - This option causes the extrude to stop at the next surfaceencountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surfacecontrols the extrude depth.

• Through All - This option causes the section to extrude through the entiremodel. A depth dimension is not required, as the model itself controlsthe extrude depth.

• Through Until - This option causes the extrude to stop at the selectedsurface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surfacecontrols the extrude depth. Note that the section must pass through theselected surface.

• To Selected - This option causes the extrude to stop at the selectedsurface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controlsthe extrude depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the section doesnot have to pass through the selected surface.

• Side 1/Side 2 - You can independently control the depth at which thesection extrudes on each side of the sketching plane. By default, thesection extrudes on Side 1; however, you can cause the section to extrudeon Side 2 as well. Any of the above options can be used for either sideexcept for Symmetric.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry present at thetime (in the feature order) when the extrude is created. Features createdafter the extrude feature is created do not cause the extrude feature’s depthto change.

You can also switch depth options by right-clicking on the draghandle in the graphics window.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: ExtrudeDepth

ScenarioCreate extrude features using different depth options.

Extrude_Depth extrude-depth.prt

Task 1: Create extrude features using different depth options.

1. Start the Extrude Tool .2. Select sketch BLIND, and edit

the depth to 200.3. Click Complete Feature .

4. Start the Extrude Tool .5. Select sketch SYMMETRIC.6. In the dashboard, edit the depth

to Both Sides and drag thedrag handle to 125.


8. Start the Extrude Tool .9. Select sketch TO_NEXT.

10. Edit the depth to To Next .11. Click Complete Feature .

The To Next preview displays across the whole model because itmust calculate the whole model to determine the "next" surface.

12. Start the Extrude Tool .13. Select sketch THRU_ALL.

14. Edit the depth to Through All and click Remove Material .15. Click Complete Feature .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

16. Start the Extrude Tool .17. Select sketch THRU_UNTIL.18. Edit the depth to Intersect

Selected Surface andselect the surface.


20. Start the Extrude Tool .21. Select sketch TO_SURFACE.22. Edit the depth to To Selected

and select the surface.23. Click Complete Feature .

24. Click Plane Display .

25. Start the Extrude Tool .26. Select sketch TO_PLANE.27. Edit the depth to To Selected

and select datum planeDTM1.


29. Start the Extrude Tool .30. Select sketch BOTH_SIDES and

edit the depth to 220.31. Select the Options tab and edit

the Side 2 depth to To Next .32. Click Complete Feature .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Common Dashboard Options: Feature DirectionYou can edit the depth direction and material direction of afeature.

Same Feature, Flipped DepthDirection

Depth Direction• Side 1• Side 2

Material Direction

Same Feature, Side 2 DepthDirection Added

Same Feature, Flipped MaterialDirection

Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction Theory

When you create a feature, such as an extrudefeature, there are two yellow arrows that appear inthe interface, as shown to the right.

In this case, the arrow on the right displays perpendicular to the section anddenotes the depth direction. The arrow on the left displays parallel to thesection and denotes the material direction.

Specifying the Depth DirectionThe depth direction arrow in the interface shows you which direction thefeature will be created with respect to the sketching plane. You can flip thedirection of feature creation either by using the interface or by clicking the


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

arrow in the interface. In the upper-right figure, the depth direction wasflipped.By default, the feature is created in only one direction. This is known as Side1. However, you can add the second direction so the feature is created inboth directions from the sketch plane. This second side is Side 2. In thelower-left figure, the Side 2 depth direction was added to the feature.

Specifying the Material DirectionThe material direction arrow in the interface shows you which side of thesketch material will be removed when creating a cut. This arrow only displayswhen removing material. Like the depth direction arrow, you can flip thematerial direction either by using the dashboard or by clicking the arrow inthe interface. In the lower-right figure, the material direction for the cut wasflipped from the inside to the outside. Consequently, the material that wasremoved flipped from the inside to the outside.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: FeatureDirection

ScenarioModify the depth and material directions for various extrude features.

Feature_Direction feature-direction.prt

Task 1: Modify the depth and material directions for various extrudefeatures.

1. Edit the definition of HEX.2. Click Change Depth Direction

from the dashboard.• Click Preview Featurefrom the dashboard.

3. Orient the model and notice thecut is now on the underside ofthe model.

4. Click Resume Feature fromthe dashboard.

5. In the dashboard, click ChangeMaterial Direction .• Click Preview Feature .The hex feature is nowremoving material on theoutside of the sketch.

The hex feature is still removing material from the model (the base).

6. Click Resume Feature .

7. In the dashboard, click Change Material Direction .• Click Complete Feature .

8. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

9. Edit the definition of OVAL.Notice the depth direction pointsupward.

10. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Edit the Side 2 depth to Blind

and edit the value to 28.• Click Complete Feature .

11. Orient the model and view theunderside of the model.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Common Dashboard Options: Thicken SketchThe Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of featuresincluding extrude, revolve, blend, and sweep features.

• Create solids or cuts.• Edit the material thickness.• Flip the side that thickens.• Thicken open or closed sections.

Creating a Thickened CutFlipping the Side that Thickens

and Material Thickness

Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch TheoryThe Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features includingextrude, revolve, blend, and sweep features. When creating one of these

features, you can use the Thicken Sketch option to assign a thickness tothe selected section outline.• You can create features that either add or cut away material.• You can edit the material thickness, as shown in the lower-right figure.• You can also change the side of the sketch where the thickness is added,or add thickness to both sides of the sketch by using Change ThicknessSide to toggle through the options.

• You can use this option on both open and closed sketches.For example, you can use the Thicken sketch option to sketch a circle andextrude it into a pipe shape with a specified wall thickness, or you can useit to sketch a rectangle and extrude it into box-shaped tubing, again with aspecified wall thickness.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: ThickenSketch

ScenarioThicken the sketches of various extrude features in a model.

Thicken_Sketch thicken-sketch.prt

Task 1: Thicken the sketches of various extrude features in a model.

1. Notice the hex cut in the bottomof the model.


3. Edit the definition of OVAL.4. In the dashboard, click Thicken

Sketch .• Edit the thickness value to 4.• Click Change ThicknessSide .

• Click Complete Feature .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

5. Edit the definition of OVAL.6. In the dashboard, edit the depth

value to 10.• Click Change DepthDirection .

• Click Remove Material .• Click Change ThicknessSide to thicken on bothsides of the sketch.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Solid Revolve FeaturesCreate revolved features from 2-D sketches.

• Revolve sections perpendicular tothe sketching plane.

• Add or remove material from themodel.

• Select different axes of revolution.

Viewing 2-D Sketches

Same Revolved Sketch usingDifferent Axes of Revolution

Removing Material using aRevolve Feature

Creating Solid Revolve Features TheoryA revolve feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. You can use arevolve feature to revolve a sketch about an axis of revolution (perpendicularto the sketching plane) to create or remove material. You can either selectthe sketch first and start the Revolve tool, or you can start the Revolve tooland then select the sketch.When you select a sketch to be revolved, the feature uses, by default, thefirst centerline sketched within the section as the axis of revolution, as shownin the left image in the lower-left figure. However, you can also select anyother straight curve or edge, datum axis, or coordinate system axis as theaxis of revolution. If the sketch you are revolving does not contain a sketchedcenterline, you will need to select one of these other references as the axisof revolution. In the right image in the lower-left figure, the axis of revolutionhas been changed to the REV datum axis. There are two rules for definingthe axis of revolution:1. Geometry must be sketched only on one side of the axis of revolution.2. The axis of revolution must lie in the sketching plane of the section.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

You can revolve either an open or closed sketch. In the figures, a closedsketch is used to create the feature that adds material, while an open sectionis used to create the cut that removes material.

In an assembly, you cannot create a revolve feature that addsmaterial. You can only remove material.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Revolve Features

ScenarioCreate solid revolve features about different axes.

Revolve_Features revolve.prt

Task 1: Create solid revolve features using different axes of rotation.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.Notice the vertical centerline.


Orientation.

4. Start the Revolve Tool fromthe feature toolbar.

5. In the dashboard, click in theInternalCL field.

6. Select datum axis REV.7. Click Complete Feature .

8. Edit the definition of Revolve 1.9. In the dashboard, select the

Placement tab and click InternalCL.


11. Start the Revolve Tool fromthe feature toolbar.

12. Select Sketch 2.

13. Click Remove Material .14. Edit the Revolve angle to 75 and

press ENTER.15. Click Complete Feature .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

16. Edit the definition of Revolve 2.17. Edit the Revolve angle back to

360 and press ENTER.18. Click Complete Feature .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Common Dashboard Options: Revolve AngleYou can revolve a sketch to many different angle depths.

Revolve angle options:• Variable• Symmetric• To Selected• Side 1/Side 2

Variable Revolve Angle Depth

Side 1 Revolve Angle To Selected,Side 2 Revolve Angle Variable Symmetric Revolve Angle Depth

Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle TheoryWhen you create a revolve feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth angle atwhich the feature revolves can be set in a variety of ways depending uponthe design intent you wish to capture. Revolve angle options include:• Variable (Blind) - This the default revolve angle option. You can edit thisrevolve angle value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension onthe model, or using the dashboard. The dashboard also contains fourpredefined angles, 90°, 180°, 270°, and 360° that you can select.

• Symmetric - The section revolves equally on both sides of the sketch plane.You can edit the total angle at which the feature revolves just as you canwith the Variable depth angle option. Therefore, the Symmetric angle isessentially same as the Variable Symmetric depth.

• To Selected - This option causes the revolve to stop at the selectedsurface or datum plane. A dimension for angle value is not required, asthe selected surface controls the revolve angle. The location on where youselect the datum plane or surface determines where the revolve stops at inrelation to the axis of revolution. In the lower-left figure datum plane DTM2was selected to the right of the axis of revolution. If datum plane DTM2was selected to the left of the axis of revolution, the feature would haverevolved another 180 degrees before stopping.

• Side 1/Side 2 - You can independently control the angle at which thesection revolves on each side of the sketching plane. By default, the


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

section revolves on Side 1; however, you can cause the section to revolveon Side 2. Any of the above options can be used for either side except forSymmetric.

You can also switch revolve angle options by right-clicking on thedrag handle in the graphics window.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: RevolveAngle

ScenarioUse the various revolve angle options for a revolve feature.

Revolve_Angle revolve-angle.prt

Task 1: Use the various revolve angle options for a revolve feature.

1. Start the Revolve Tool .2. Select the visible sketch and

select datum axis REV from themodel tree.

3. Edit the depth angle value to 90and click Change Angle Side

.

4. Click Change Angle Side .

5. Edit the depth to Both Sides .

6. Edit the depth to To Selected.

7. Click Plane Display andselect datum plane DTM2 to theright of the axis of revolution.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

8. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Edit the side 2 depth toVariable and type 90 asthe value.

9. In the dashboard, edit the Side2 depth to To Selected andselect datum plane DTM2 to theleft of the axis of revolution.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Rib FeaturesA rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, except that itrequires an open section sketch.

• Rib features require an opensketch.

• You can edit the side that thickens.• You can flip to which side of thesketch you want to create the rib.

Viewing Open Sketches

Editing the Side that ThickensFlipping Which Side the Rib

is Created

Creating Rib Features TheoryRibs are typically used to strengthen parts. A rib feature is similar to anextruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch. The ribalso conforms to existing planar or cylindrical geometry when it is extruded.After you select an open section sketch and set a thickness, Pro/ENGINEERautomatically creates the rib feature by merging it with your model. Thesystem can add material above or below the sketch, and the thickness canbe applied on either side, or be symmetric about the sketch. The Rib toolenables you to create rib features faster than it would be for you to create andsketch a protrusion.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Rib Features

ScenarioCreate rib features on a part model.

Rib_Features rib.prt

Task 1: Create rib features on a part model.

1. Start the Rib Tool from thefeature toolbar.

2. Select RIB_SKETCH-1.3. Drag the width to 75.4. Click Complete Feature .

Notice the angled rib surface is not planar; it is contoured tomatch the curved surface the sketch is adjacent to.

5. Start the Rib Tool .6. Select RIB_SKETCH-2.7. Orient to view orientation RIGHT.8. Drag the width to 25. The rib is

centered about the sketch.

9. Click Change ThicknessOption . The rib moves tothe left of the sketch.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. Click Change ThicknessOption again. The rib movesto the right of the sketch.


12. Reorient the model.

13. Start the Rib Tool .14. Select RIB_SKETCH-3. The rib

is above the sketch.

15. Click the yellow arrow in thegraphics window. The rib is nowon the bottom of the sketch.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module10Utilizing Internal Sketches and EmbeddedDatums

Module OverviewWhen creating 3-D geometry features, you can select sketches and datumfeatures to help you create that geometry. However, these items do notalready have to exist in the model tree. Rather, they can be created at thetime they are needed.In this module, you learn how to create internal sketches when creatingsketch-based features as an additional option to selecting a preexistingsketch. You also learn how to create embedded datum features.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create internal sketches.• Create embedded datum features.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Internal SketchesAn internal sketch is contained in the feature it defines.

Internal sketches provide somebenefits that external sketches donot.• Organization• Reduced Feature Count

Embedded in Feature

External Sketch

Internal Sketch

Internal SketchesPrior to the release of Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire, internal sketches were theonly sketch type available in Pro/ENGINEER. You are now given the choiceof using either internal or external sketches within Pro/ENGINEER.PTC does not recommend one type of sketch over the other; you should usethe type that works best for you. In this topic, we discuss how to use internalsketches and some of the benefits they can provide.

Creating an Internal SketchInternal sketches are created during the creation of any sketched feature.

• Start the feature tool for any sketched feature (ex: Extrude Tool )• Click Define from the Placement tab in the dashboard and create asketch. You can also right-click and select Define Internal Sketch toenter Sketcher.

• Complete the feature and an internal sketch with the name S2D000# iscreated and embedded within the feature.

Benefits of Internal SketchesInternal sketches provide some benefits that external sketches do not.• Organization - Because internal sketches are embedded in the featurethey define, you always know where to find them. External sketches areseparate features that can be renamed and reordered like other features.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

In a model containing hundreds of features, it can take some time todetermine which sketch is used to define which feature. This is not aproblem, just something to be aware of when selecting the type of sketchyou will use.

• Reduced Feature Count - Because internal sketches are not features, theydo not add to the total number of features in a model. Creating a separateexternal sketch for every sketched feature in your model can dramaticallyincrease the number of features in a model. In models containing hundredsor even thousands of features, external sketches can dramatically increasethe total feature count in a model. Again, this is something you will want toconsider when selecting the type of sketch you will use.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Internal Sketches

ScenarioWork with internal and external sketches to see how they differ.

Internal_Sketches internal-sketch.prt

Task 1: Work with internal sketches.

1. Select external Sketch 2 andnotice it in the model.

2. Expand Extrude 2, and noticethat external Sketch 2 is usedwithin it.

3. Orient to the StandardOrientation and observethe 12_POINT sketch.

4. Start the Extrude Tool .5. Select the Placement tab in the

dashboard.• Click Define to create theinternal sketch.

• Select the front surface of themodel.

6. Click Sketch from the Sketchdialog box.


8. Click Palette and place theHexagon shape.

9. Delete the length dimension,click Normal Dimension ,and dimension the constructioncircle diameter.

10. Edit the diameter dimension to20.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


13. Click Remove Material .

14. Click To Selected andselect the surface at the bottomof Extrude 2.


16. Expand Extrude 3 in the modeltree, and notice the internalsketch S2D0001.

17. Edit the definition of Extrude 3.18. Select the sketch feature

12_POINT as the new sketch.19. Click OK from the Section

Selection dialog box to replacethe existing internal sketch.

20. Click Complete Feature .21. Expand Extrude 3 again in the

model tree. Notice that Extrude3 now uses the sketch feature12_POINT.

22. Select sketch 12_POINT and press DELETE. Notice that Extrude 3will also be deleted, as it uses the 12_POINT sketch. Click Cancelfrom the Delete dialog box.

23. Edit the definition of Extrude 3.24. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and click Unlink.25. Click OK from the Unlink dialog box to break the association.26. Click Complete Feature .

27. Select sketch 12_POINT andpress DELETE. Click OK todelete the sketch feature.

28. In the model tree, expandExtrude 3 and notice thatit again contains an internalsketch.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Embedded Datum FeaturesEmbedded datum features are any combination of plane, axis,point, or coordinate systems embedded within another feature.

Benefits of Embedded Datum Features:• No need to restart feature creation.• More organized models.• Automatically hidden datums.

Embedded in an Extrude

Embedded in a Hole Embedded in a Datum

Benefits of Embedded Datum FeaturesEmbedded datum features can be used as sketch planes, orientation planes,dimensioning references, placement references for holes, references fordraft features, and so on. Datum features can even be embedded in otherdatum features.Suppose you have begun the creation of an extrude feature, and then realizethe sketch plane you need has not yet been created. You could cancel out ofthe Extrude Tool, create the datum plane, then start the Extrude Tool again. Abetter solution would be to simply create the sketch plane as an embeddeddatum, while the Extrude Tool is still open.Another benefit of embedded datum features is that they produce a cleaner,more organized model tree. For example, if the sketch plane of an extrudefeature you are creating requires that you create three datum planes andan axis, those four datum features will be embedded within the node of theextrude feature; they will not clutter the model tree as regular features would.Each embedded datum feature functions as some type of reference to thefeature in which it is embedded, otherwise it would not be embedded. Thismakes it easy to determine what each datum is used for and which featurereferences it.The display of embedded datum features is automatically set to hidden afterthey are created. This helps ensure that the display of your model remainsuncluttered.In the following figure, notice the three different displays of the same modeltree. The model on the left was created without using embedded datum


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

features. The figure in the middle was created using embedded datumfeatures and the feature nodes are expanded. The figure on the right displaysthe same model (as the middle figure) with the feature nodes collapsed.

Creating Embedded Datum FeaturesEmbedded datums are created by clicking a datum tool during the creation ofanother feature. Clicking the datum tool will automatically pause the creationof the current feature, enabling you to create the required datum feature.After you have created the required datum features, you can resume thecreation of the feature by clicking Resume Feature in the dashboard.By then selecting the newly created datum features as sketch planes,orientation, dimensioning, placement, or depth references, they becomeembedded in the feature.

About Embedded Datum FeaturesWhen you delete a feature containing embedded datum planes,Pro/ENGINEER gives you the option to keep or also delete the embeddeddatum features.Sketch and orientation datum planes can only be embedded in features usinginternal sketches.If for some reason the datum features you create are not embedded asexpected, you can select them in the model tree and drag them into thefeature, after creation. This will embed them and set their display to hidden,just as if they were originally embedded. Datums can be un-embedded in thesame way, by dragging them from a feature back to the model tree.

Best PracticesEmbedded datum features should be used whenever possible. Their usepromotes the creation of models that are easier to edit, use and thus easierto share with downstream users.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Embedded Datum Features

ScenarioCreate an extrude feature using a series of embedded datum featurescreated to define sketch, orientation, and depth references.

Embedded_Datums embedded-datum.prt

Task 1: Create an extrude feature referencing embedded datum features.

1. Start the Extrude Tool .2. Right-click and select Define

Internal Sketch.3. Start the Datum Plane Tool ,

select the surface, and drag theOffset to 10.

4. In the Properties tab, edit theName to OFFSET and click OK.

Creating each of these datum features after clicking DefineInternal Sketch defines them as embedded.

5. Start the Datum Axis Tool ,press CTRL, and select datumplane OFFSET and the topsurface.

6. Edit the name to PIVOT andclick OK.

7. Start the Datum Plane Tool ,press CTRL, and select datumaxis PIVOT and the top surface.

8. Edit the Rotation to 25 in theproper direction.

9. Edit the name to ORIENT andclick OK.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. Start the Datum Plane Tool, press CTRL, and select

datum plane ORIENT datumaxis PIVOT.

11. Edit the ORIENT reference fromOffset to Normal.

12. Flip the Normal direction, asshown by the yellow arrow.

13. Edit the name to SKETCH andclick OK.

14. In the graphics window, right-click and select Placement.• Select SKETCH as the Sketch Plane.• Set ORIENT to Orientation Top.• Click Sketch.

15. Select datum plane RIGHT asthe vertical reference and clickClose from the Referencesdialog box.

16. Sketcher display:17. Click Center and Point Circle

and sketch the circle.18. Click Normal Dimension

and dimension the radius. Editit to 16.

19. Done Section .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

20. Reorient the model.

21. In the dashboard, click Change Depth Direction and edit thedepth to To Selected .

22. Start the Datum Plane Tool , press CTRL, and select the twoinner hole surfaces. Edit the name to DEPTH, and click OK.

23. Click Resume Feature from the dashboard. Because datum planeDEPTH is still selected, it is automatically selected as the depthreference.


25. Edit the definition of Extrude 4.

26. Click Remove Material and click Complete Feature .27. Expand Extrude 4 in the model tree. Notice the embedded datums.28. Edit Extrude 4. Notice that dimensions from the feature and all

embedded datums are displayed.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module11Creating Sweeps and Blends

Module OverviewExtruded and revolved features comprise the majority of the features on themodels that you create. However, there are occasions when extruded andrevolved features cannot easily create the necessary geometry. In theseinstances, you may need to sketch more advanced geometry features.In this module, you learn how to create two advanced geometry features: thesweep feature and the blend feature.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create sweeps with open and closed trajectories.• Analyze sweep feature attributes.• Create a parallel blend protrusion or cut.• Experiment with parallel blend attributes and section tools.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Sweeps with Open TrajectoriesA sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, ortraverses, along a trajectory.

Sweeping a Closed Sketch Alongan Open Trajectory

Components of a sweep feature:• Trajectory– Selected– Sketched– Start point

• Sketched section– Closed– Open– Crosshairs mark the trajectory

Create protrusions or cuts.

Sweeping an Open Sketch Alongan Open Trajectory

Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories TheoryYou create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section feature thatfollows a trajectory curve. A sweep can either be created as a protrusion or acut, is defined upon starting the feature, and cannot be redefined. A sweepfeature consists of both a trajectory and a section.

Defining the TrajectoryThe trajectory is the path that a section sweeps along. The trajectory canbe open, meaning that it does not have to create a loop, as shown in thefigures. It can have sharp or tangent corners, as can be seen respectively inthe upper figures’ protrusion and the lower figures’ cut. The trajectory canalso either be selected or sketched.• Selected trajectory - A selected trajectory can consist of selected datumcurves or edges. Other than selecting a sketched curve, the other allowable


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

datum curve types for a trajectory are Intersection of 2 surfaces, Use Xsec,Project, Wrap, Offset, and Two projection.

When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods and optionsare available:– One By One - Select individual curves or edges.– Tangnt Chain - Select a chain of tangent edges.– Curve Chain - Select a chain of curves.– Bndry Chain - Select a chain of one-sided edges that belong to the

same surface list.– Surf Chain - Select a chain of edges that belong to the same surface.– Intent Chain - Select an intent chain.– Select / Unselect - Select or unselect chain edges.– Trim / Extend - Trim or extend chain ends.

• Sketched trajectory - Sketch the trajectory to be swept along. The sketchedtrajectory is created internal to the sweep feature.

When the trajectory has been defined, you can select the start point for thesection. The start point is the location from which the section begins to sweep.

Defining the SectionOnce the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch thesection that will be swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the sectionis perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The crosshairs seen in thesketching plane are the intersection of the trajectory and sketch plane.The sketched section may be either open or closed. The swept protrusionin the upper figures is a closed section, while the swept cut in the lowerfigures is an open section.

Causes of a Sweep FailureA sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occur:• A trajectory crosses itself.• You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of thesection changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.

• A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and thefeature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories

ScenarioCreate open trajectory sweeps with an open and closed sketch.

Sweep_Open-Traj sweep_open-traj.prt

Task 1: Create an open trajectory sweep protrusion with a closed sketch.

1. Click Insert > Sweep > Protrusion from the main menu.2. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain > Select from the menu manager.3. Select one segment of Sketch 1 from the graphics window and click

Select All > Done from the menu manager.

4. Sketcher display:5. Sketch a vertical centerline on

the vertical reference and clickPalette .

6. Select the Profiles tab and addthe T-profile to the sketch.• Right-click on the X Locationhandle and drag it to themidpoint of the top horizontalline.

• Edit the scale to 0.5 and clickAccept Changes .



9. Click OK from the Protrusiondialog box.

10. In the model tree, right-clickSketch 1 and select Hide.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Create an open trajectory sweep cut with an open sketch.

1. Click Insert > Sweep > Cut fromthe main menu.

2. Click Sketch Traj from the menumanager and select the topsurface of the model, followed byOkay from the menu manager.

3. Click Bottom from the menumanager and select the front "T"surface.

4. Select datum planes OFFSETand RIGHT as references, aswell as the top surface and twovertices.

5. Click Center and Point Circleand sketch two circles that

are tangent to the references.

6. Click Line and sketch twovertical lines. The first shouldstart at the top reference andsnap tangent to the top circle.The second should start at thebottom reference and snaptangent to the bottom circle.

7. Click Line Tangent andcreate the tangent line.

8. Click Trim/Delete Segmentand trim the circle entities.

9. Click Done Section .10. Click Free Ends > Done from

the menu manager.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. Click Center and Ends Arcand sketch an arc with a radiusof 0.4.



14. Click Okay from the menumanager and click OK from theCut dialog box.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Sweeps with Closed TrajectoriesA sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, ortraverses, along a trajectory.

Sweeping a Closed Sketch Alonga Closed Trajectory

Components of a sweepfeature:• Trajectory– Selected– Sketched– Start point– Add Inn Fcs

• Sketched section– Closed– Open– Crosshairs mark the

trajectory


Sweeping an Open Sketch Alonga Closed Trajectory

Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories TheoryYou create a sweep feature when you want to create a constant cross-sectionfeature that follows a trajectory curve. A sweep can either be created asa protrusion or a cut, is defined upon starting the feature, and cannot beredefined. A sweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section.

Defining the TrajectoryThe trajectory is the path that a section sweeps along. The trajectory canbe closed, meaning that it creates a loop, as shown in the figures. It canhave sharp or tangent corners. The trajectory can also either be selectedor sketched.• Selected trajectory - A selected trajectory can consist of selected datumcurves or edges. Other than selecting a sketched curve, the other datumcurve types allowed for a trajectory are Intersection of 2 surfaces, UseXsec, Project, Wrap, Offset, and Two projection.When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods and optionsare available:– One By One - Select individual curves or edges.– Tangnt Chain - Select a chain of tangent edges.– Curve Chain - Select a chain of curves.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

– Bndry Chain - Select a chain of one-sided edges that belong to thesame surface list.

– Surf Chain - Select a chain of edges that belong to the same surface.– Intent Chain - Select an intent chain.– Select / Unselect - Select or unselect chain edges.– Trim / Extend - Trim or extend chain ends.

• Sketched trajectory - Sketch the trajectory to be swept along. The sketchedtrajectory is created internal to the sweep feature.

When the trajectory has been defined, you can select the start point for thesection. The start point is the location from which the section begins to sweep.After the start point has been defined, you must select whether you want toadd inner faces. When you add inner faces, the top and bottom faces closethe swept solid, as is shown in the lower figures. Note that the sketchedsection must be open when adding inner faces.

Defining the SectionOnce the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch thesection that will be swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the sectionis perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The crosshairs seen in thesketching plane are the intersection of the trajectory and sketch plane.The sketched section may be either open or closed. The swept protrusionin the upper figures is a closed section, while the lower figures display anopen section.

Causes of a Sweep FailureA sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occur:• A trajectory crosses itself.• You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of thesection changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.

• A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small relative to the section, and thefeature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories

ScenarioCreate closed trajectory sweeps with an open and closed sketch.

Sweep_Closed-Traj sweep_closed-traj.prt

Task 1: Create a closed trajectory sweep protrusion with a closed sketchand without inner faces.

1. Click Insert > Sweep > Protrusion from the main menu.2. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain > Select from the menu manager.3. Select one segment of Sketch 2 in the graphics window and click

Select All from the menu manager.

4. Click Start Point from themenu manager and select theendpoint.

5. Click Accept > Done > No InnFcs > Done from the menumanager.

6. Sketcher display:7. Sketch a vertical centerline on

the vertical reference and clickPalette .

8. Select the Profiles tab and addthe T-profile to the sketch.• Right-click on the X Locationhandle and drag it to themidpoint of the top horizontalline.

• Edit the scale to 0.5, editthe rotation to 180, and clickAccept Changes .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly



Task 2: Edit the sweep to create a closed trajectory protrusion with anopen sketch and inner faces added.

1. Edit the definition of the Protrusion id.2. In the Protrusion dialog box, select Attributes and click Define.3. In the menu manager, click Add Inn Fcs > Done.

4. Click Trim/Delete Segmentand trim the right side of thesketch.






For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Sweep Feature AttributesYou can edit the attributes for the ends of an open trajectorysweep feature so that they are free or merged.

The ends of a sweep feature canbe set to:• Free ends• Merged ends

Model with Sweep Feature

Ends of the Sweep Featureare Free

Ends of the Sweep Featureare Merged

Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes TheoryIf the trajectory of a sweep feature is open (meaning, the start and end pointsof the trajectory do not touch) you can edit the attributes of the ends of thesweep feature to one of the following options:• Merge Ends - Merge the ends of the sweep into the adjacent solid. Todo this, the sweep ends must be touching the other solid geometry. Themerged sweep ends are shown in the lower-right figure.

• Free Ends - Do not attach the sweep ends to the adjacent geometry. Thisis the default option, and is shown in the lower-left figure.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes

ScenarioEdit the ends of a sweep feature from free to merged.

Sweep_Attributes sweep_attributes.prt

Task 1: Edit the ends of a sweep feature from free to merged.

1. Orient to the FRONT view.Notice that there is a gapbetween the ends of the curvedtube and the top and bottom flatsurfaces.

2. Edit the definition of Protrusion id 429.3. In the Protrusion dialog box, select Attributes and click Define.4. In the menu manager, click Merge Ends > Done.

5. Click OK from the Protrusiondialog box. Notice that the gapbetween the curved tube andthe top and bottom flat surfacesis now gone.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating a Parallel Blend Protrusion or CutA parallel blend feature blends sections along a dimensioned,linear distance.

Blend Sections

Components of a blend feature:• Sections– At least two required– Toggle section– Equal number of entities per

section– Line up start points

• Direction• Depth


Blend Depths

Creating a Parallel Blend Protrusion or Cut TheoryYou create blend features when you need to create models that containdifferent transitional cross-sections. This means that you can creategeometry that starts as a circular cross-section, but as you transition alongthe length of the feature, the feature changes to a square cross-section.Therefore, blend features can create cuts and protrusions that use differentcross-sectional sketches. Parallel blends consist of sections, direction offeature creation, and depth.

Defining the 2-D SectionsTo create a parallel blend, there must be at least two sections on the samesketching plane. Each section, like any sketch, is fully constrained anddimensioned. When you are ready to create the second or any subsequentsection, you must toggle the section. In doing so, the existing sketchesbecome grayed out and temporarily inactive.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspondbetween sections to avoid a twisting effect in the blend. You can move thestart point in a sketch by selecting the desired vertex, right-clicking, andselecting Start Point. The upper figure shows all three sections as having astart point at the upper-left.Each section must contain the same number entities (or vertices) per section.There are two exceptions to this rule. First, the blend can start or end as asingle point. Second, a number of blend vertex points can be added, whichcount as ’entities’. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular sectionenables the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connectsthe points of each section to create the blend feature.

Defining the Direction of Feature CreationYou must specify the direction in which the blend sections are projected. Youcan flip the direction of feature creation.

Defining the Depth of the 2-D SectionsThe first section created in the parallel blend remains on the sketching plane.Each subsequent section is projected normal to the sketching plane at aspecified distance in the direction of feature creation. The following depthoptions are available:• Blind - Specify a depth value between projected sections.• Thru Next - The section is projected up to the next encountered surface.• Thru All - The section is projected through all surfaces.• Thru Until - The section is projected up to the specified surface.• From To - The section is projected between two selected surfaces.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating a Parallel Blend Protrusion orCut

ScenarioCreate a blend protrusion and a blend cut.

Parallel_Blend blend.prt

Task 1: Create a 3-section blend protrusion.

1. Click Insert > Blend > Protrusion from the main menu.2. In the menu manager, accept the defaults of Parallel > Regular Sec

> Sketch Sec and click Done.• Click Straight > Done.• Select datum plane FRONT and click Okay > Default.


4. Click Palette and add theblend_section1.• Relocate the Location handleto the center.

• Edit the scale to 1 and clickAccept Changes .

5. Click in the background to clearthe selection, then right-click andselect Toggle Section.

6. Add the blend_section2 fromthe Sketcher palette. Relocatethe Location handle to thecenter, edit the scale to 1, andclick Accept Changes .

7. Click in the background, then right-click and select Toggle Section.8. Add the blend_section3 from the Sketcher palette, relocating the

Location handle to the center and editing the scale to 1.9. Click Done Section .

10. Edit the depth for section 2 to 30and the depth for section 3 to 20.

11. Orient to the StandardOrientation and click OK.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Create a 3-section blend cut.

1. Click Insert > Blend > Cut from the main menu.2. In the menu manager, accept the defaults of Parallel > Regular Sec

> Sketch Sec and click Done.• Click Straight > Done.• Select the front surface and click Okay > Default.• Select datum planes TOP and RIGHT as references.

3. Click No hidden

4. Click Centerline and sketch avertical and horizontal centerline.

5. Click Rectangle , sketch thefirst section, and dimension it.

6. Right-click and select ToggleSection.

7. Click Rectangle , sketch thesecond section, and dimensionit.


9. Click Rectangle , sketch thethird section, and dimension it.


11. Click Shading .

12. Click Okay > Blind > Done fromthe menu manager.

13. Edit the depth for section 2 to 20and the depth for section 3 to 30.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Experimenting with Parallel Blend AttributesYou can edit the attributes for connecting blend sections so thatthey are straight or smooth.

Blend sections can be connected:• Straight• Smooth

Straight Blend Attribute Smooth Blend Attribute

Experimenting with Parallel Blend Attributes TheoryWhen the sections of a parallel blend are projected normal to the sketchingplane, you can connect the sections by two methods:• Straight - The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shownin the left figure. This is the default option.

• Smooth - The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, asshown in the right figure.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Experimenting with Parallel BlendAttributes

ScenarioEdit the blend shape of a parallel blend.

Blend_Attributes blend_attributes.prt

Task 1: Edit the blend shape of a parallel blend.

1. Edit the definition of Protrusionid 23.

2. In the Protrusion dialog box,select Attributes and clickDefine.

3. In the menu manager, clickSmooth > Done.


5. Edit the definition of Cut id 153.6. In the Cut dialog box, select

Attributes and click Define.7. In the menu manager, click

Smooth > Done.8. Click OK from the Cut dialog

box.

9. Resume feature CUT to view the inside of the model.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Parallel Blend Section ToolsBlend section tools help you achieve the desired blend result.

Tools include:• Blend vertex• Start point• Blending to a point

Different Section Start Points

Blending to a Point Blend using Blend Vertices

Analyzing Parallel Blend Section Tools TheoryThe blend feature includes three different tools that are beneficial when youcreate blend feature sections:• Blend vertex - Each section of a blend must always contain the samenumber of entities. For sections that do not have enough geometric entities,you can add blend vertices. Blend vertices allow vertices to converge ordiverge. In the lower-right figure, the first blend section has six vertices,while the second blend section has only four vertices. Consequently, twoblend vertices have been added to the section with only four vertices.

• Start point - As a general rule of thumb, the start points between sectionsshould correspond to the same vertex location. Typically, the start pointis created on the first location that is selected when creating a section.For example, if sketching a rectangle, the start point will be placed at thefirst corner of rectangle creation, although it can be relocated. If the startpoints do not line up between sections, the resulting blend feature will havea twist in it, as shown in the upper-right figure.

• Blending to a point - A blend can start or end as a single point, as shownin the lower-left figure. This is the one exception where blend sections donot have to contain the same number of entities.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Parallel Blend Section Tools

ScenarioCreate blends using available section tools.

Blend_Tools blend_section-tools.prt

Task 1: Create a 2-section blend with blend vertex.

1. Click Insert > Blend > Protrusion from the main menu and clickDone > Done from the menu manager.

2. Select the front surface of the model and click Okay > Default.

3. Sketcher display:4. Click Use Edge , select Loop

from the Type dialog box, selectthe model, and click Close.

5. Select the lower-left vertex,right-click, and select StartPoint.


7. Click Centerline and sketcha vertical centerline.

8. Click Rectangle , sketch arectangle, and then dimension it.

9. Select the upper-right vertex,right-click, and select BlendVertex.

10. Select the upper-left vertex,right-click, and select BlendVertex.

11. Click Done Section andclick Blind > Done from themenu manager.• Edit the depth value to 150.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Create a 3-section blend with a point.

1. Click Insert > Blend > Protrusion from the main menu and clickDone > Done from the menu manager.

2. Select the front surface of the model and click Okay > Default.3. Select datum planes TOP and RIGHT as sketch references.

4. Click Use Edge and selectLoop.

5. Select the surface and clickClose.


7. Click Centerline and sketcha vertical centerline.

8. Click Rectangle , sketch asquare, and then dimension it.

9. Click Done Section andclick Blind > Done from themenu manager.• Edit the depth value to 75.


11. Edit the definition of the secondProtrusion id.

12. In the Protrusion dialog box,double-click Section.

13. Select the upper-left vertex,right-click, and select StartPoint.

14. Right-click and select ToggleSection twice.

15. Click Point and create thepoint.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

16. Click Done Section andpress ENTER twice.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module12Creating Holes and Shells

Module OverviewIn addition to creating features that begin with 2-D sketches and proceedingto solid features, you can also create features that are applied directly toa model.In this module, you learn how to create various types of holes on a model, aswell as shell a model.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create coaxial, linear, radial, and diameter holes, as well as understandthe different depth options available.

• Know the different hole profile options.• Create shell features.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Common Dashboard Options: Hole DepthYou can drill a hole to many different depth options.

Hole depth options:• Blind• Symmetric• To Next• Through Until• To Selected• Through All• Side 1/Side 2

Hole Depth Options

Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth TheoryWhen you create a hole, the depth at which the hole drills into a model canbe set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish tocapture. Hole depth options include:• Blind (Variable) - This is the default depth option. You can edit this depthvalue by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, orusing the dashboard.

• Symmetric - The hole will bore equally on both sides of the placementplane. You can edit the total depth at which the hole bores just as youcan with the Blind depth option. The Symmetric depth is actually a BlindSymmetric depth.

• To Next - This option causes the hole depth to stop at the next surfaceencountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surfacecontrols the hole depth.

• Through Until - This option causes the hole to stop at the selected surface.A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the holedepth. Note that the hole must pass through the selected surface.

• To Selected - This option causes the hole to stop at the selected surface. Adepth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the holedepth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the hole does not have topass through the selected surface.

• Through All - This option causes the hole to drill through the entire model. Adepth dimension is not required, as the model itself controls the hole depth.

• Side 1/Side 2 - You can independently control the hole depth on each sideof the placement plane. By default, the hole drills on Side 1; however, youcan cause the hole to also drill on Side 2 as well. Any of the previous holedepth options, except Symmetric, can be used for either side.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry present at thetime (in the feature order) when the hole is created. Features created afterthe hole is created do not cause the hole to change its depth.

You can also switch depth options by right-clicking the drag handlein the graphics window.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: HoleDepth

ScenarioRedefine hole features to edit their depths using different options.

Hole_Depth hole_depths.prt

Task 1: Redefine the depth options of the six holes.

1. Edit the definition of BLIND_1.2. Edit the depth value to 0.5.3. Click Complete Feature .

4. Edit the definition of BLIND_2.5. Edit the depth value to 2.25.6. Click Complete Feature .

7. Edit the definition of TO_NEXT.

8. Edit the depth to To Next .9. Click Complete Feature .

10. Edit the definition ofTO_SELECTED.

11. Edit the depth to To Selectedand select the surface.


13. Edit the definition of THRU_ALL.14. Edit the depth to Through All

.15. Click Complete Feature .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

16. Click Plane Display .17. Edit the definition of

SYMMETRIC. Notice thehole placement plane is a datumplane in space.

18. Edit the depth to Both Sides .

19. Edit the depth to Through All.

20. In the dashboard, select theShape tab and edit the Side 2depth to Through All .



23. Resume the suppressed featureCUT.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Coaxial HolesA coaxial hole is placed at the intersection of an axis and asurface.

Placement references:• Datum axis• Surface or datum plane

Offset references:• None

Selecting Placement References

Coaxial Holes

Hole Creation TheoryWhen creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selectingplacement (primary) and offset (secondary) references. The first piece ofgeometry selected to place the hole is the placement reference. Next, youeither select additional placement references or offset references to furtherdimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected asthe placement reference determines the type of hole being created.

Creating Coaxial HolesTo create a coaxial hole, you only select placement references. An axis isselected as the first placement reference. This axis identifies the location ofthe hole. A second placement reference, of either a surface or datum plane,is then selected to specify the surface where the hole starts drilling into themodel. In the figures on this slide, datum axis A_1 and the front surface arethe placement references.

You can also view your selected references in the Placement tabof the dashboard.

Once the hole references are satisfied, the hole preview appears with adefault diameter dimension and depth value, which can be modified by usingthe drag handles or dashboard, or by editing the dimensions on the model.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Coaxial Holes

ScenarioCreate two coaxial holes, one through all and the other of blind depth.

Holes_Coaxial holes_coaxial.prt

Task 1: Create two coaxial holes in the model, one through all and theother of blind depth.

1. Start the Hole Tool from thefeature toolbar.

2. Press CTRL and select datumaxis A_1 and the front surface.

3. Edit the diameter to 1.4. Edit the depth to Through All

.5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Start the Hole Tool .7. Press CTRL and select datum

axis A_2 and the front surface.8. In the dashboard, select the

Placement tab. Notice that yourselected references are addedto the collector.

9. Edit the diameter to 1.5.10. Edit the depth value to 0.25.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Linear HolesA linear hole is created by selecting one placement referenceand two offset references.

Placement references:• Datum plane or surface

Offset references:• Datum plane or surface• Edge• Datum axis

Selecting Placement Reference

Completed Hole Selecting Offset References


Creating Linear HolesTo create a linear hole, a planar surface is selected as the placementreference. This surface identifies where the hole starts ’drilling’ into themodel. Two offset references are then selected to dimensionally constrainthe hole feature. In the upper figure on this slide, the front surface of themodel is the placement reference. In the lower-right figure, the top surfaceand datum plane DTM1 are the offset references. You can select offsetreferences directly from the model or you can drag the green referencehandles to the desired reference.You can view your selected references in the reference collectors in thePlacement tab of the dashboard. Within this tab, you can edit offset reference


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

values as well as modify whether the hole is offset or aligned to an offsetreference. In the lower-right figure, the hole is aligned to datum plane DTM1.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Linear Holes

ScenarioCreate two different linear holes on a model.

Holes_Linear holes_linear.prt

Task 1: Create two different linear holes on a model.


2. Select the front surface.3. Right-click and select Offset

References Collector.

4. Press CTRL and select the topsurface and datum plane DTM1.

5. Edit the offset values to 3.5 fromthe top surface and 3.0 fromdatum plane DTM1.

6. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50and the depth value to 2.


8. Start the Hole Tool .9. Select the front surface.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. Right-click and select OffsetReferences Collector.

11. Press CTRL and select the topsurface and datum plane DTM1.

12. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• In the Offset Referencescollector, select Align from theDTM1 drop-down list.

• Edit the offset value to 3.5from the top surface.

13. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50and the depth value to 2.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Radial and Diameter HolesRadial and diameter holes are created by selecting oneplacement reference and two offset references.

On a cylindrical surface:• Create radial holes only.• One offset reference for offset.• One offset reference for angle.

On a planar surface:• Create either radial or diameterholes.

• One datum axis.• One surface or datum plane forangle.

Diameter Hole

Radial and Diameter Holes

Cylindrical Surface Radial Hole

Planar Surface Radial Hole


Creating Radial Holes on a Cylindrical Placement SurfaceYou can create a radial hole on a cylindrical surface by selecting the cylindricalsurface as the placement reference. Furthermore, if the placement referenceis a cylindrical surface, you can only create a radial hole. This cylindricalsurface identifies where the hole starts ’drilling’ into the model. For a radialhole, the specific location chosen on this surface determines the directionfrom which the angle is measured. For example, in the middle-right figure, ifthe surface was chosen below datum TOP, the measured angle would be 45°clockwise from TOP, instead of measuring 315° counter-clockwise.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole.You can select references directly from the model or you can drag the greenreference handles to the desired reference. The first offset reference is aplanar reference from which to offset the hole, and the second is a planarreference to determine the angle. In the middle-right figure, the offsetreferences are the front surface of the model and datum plane TOP.

Creating Radial or Diameter Holes on a Planar Placement SurfaceYou can select a planar surface as the placement reference to create both aradial or diameter hole. This placement reference identifies where the holestarts ’drilling’ into the model. For a radial hole, the specific location chosenon this surface determines the location from which the angle is measured.For example, in the bottom-right figure, if the surface was chosen abovedatum TOP but to the right instead of the left, the measured angle would be65° counter-clockwise from datum TOP, instead of measuring 115° clockwise.Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole.The first offset reference is an axis from which to locate the hole radially,and the second is a planar reference to determine the angle. For the planarplacement radial hole in the bottom-right figure, the secondary references aredatum axis A_2 and datum plane TOP. For the diameter hole in the bottom-leftfigure, the secondary references are datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT.If a planar surface is selected as the placement reference, you can switchthe hole type between Linear, Radial, and Diameter. When you switch thehole type, the offset references will automatically switch between radius,diameter, angle, or offsets.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Radial and Diameter Holes

ScenarioCreate radial and diameter holes on a model.

Holes_Radial_Diam holes_radial_diameter.prt

Task 1: Create radial and diameter holes on a model.


2. Select the cylindrical surface.

3. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.4. Press CTRL and select datum plane TOP and the front surface.

5. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Edit the offset angle to 45 fromdatum plane TOP.

• Edit the offset axial value to.40 from the front surface.

6. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and thehole depth to To Next .



10. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.11. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane TOP.

12. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Edit the hole Type from Linearto Radial.

• Edit the radius to 0.5 fromdatum axis A_2.

• Edit the angle to 65 fromdatum plane TOP.

13. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and thehole depth to To Next .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


17. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.18. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT.

19. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Edit the hole Type from Linearto Diameter.

• Edit the diameter to 1.5 fromdatum axis A_2.

• Edit the angle to 60 fromdatum plane RIGHT.

20. Edit the hole diameter to 0.50and the hole depth to ThroughAll .




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Exploring Hole Profile OptionsYou can add a drill point to your hole as well as add countersinksor counterbores.

Hole profile options include:• Rectangle hole profile• Drill point profile• Add counterbore• Add countersink– Exit countersink

Dimension drill point profileto:• Shoulder• Tip

Hole Profile Options

The Shape Tab Drill Point Dimensioning Schemes

Exploring Hole Profile Options TheoryWhen you create a hole in Pro/ENGINEER, the default profile is a rectangularshape, as shown in the top hole in the upper figure. This is the rectangle holeprofile. Other hole profiles and options available include, and are shown inthe upper figure, respectively:• Drill point profile - Adds the drill tip to the hole profile. You can edit thedrill tip angle.

• Add counterbore - Creates a counterbore on the hole. You can edit thecounterbore diameter and depth.

• Add countersink - Creates a countersink on the hole. You can edit thecountersink angle and diameter. You can also create an exit countersinkon a Through All hole.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Dimensioning the Hole Depth for the Drill Point ProfileWhen you select the drill point profile, you can dimension the hole depthusing two different methods:• Shoulder - You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the end ofthe shoulder. This is shown in the left image of the bottom-right figure.

• Tip - You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the tip of thehole. This is shown in the right image of the bottom-right figure.

The Dashboard Shape TabAt any time during the hole creation process, you can select the Shape tabin the dashboard to see the hole profile you are creating. This hole profileimage updates automatically as you modify hole profile options, enablingyou to preview the final result. Within the Shape tab you can perform thefollowing operations:• Edit hole diameter and depth.• Edit drill tip angle.• Edit counterbore diameter and depth.• Edit countersink diameter and angle.• Enable an exit countersink on a through all hole.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Exploring Hole Profile Options

ScenarioRedefine hole features to modify their profile options.

Hole_Profiles hole_profiles.prt

Task 1: Redefine four holes to modify their profiles.

1. Edit the definition of HOLE_1.2. In the dashboard, click Drill

Hole Profile .3. Click Complete Feature .


Hole Profile .• Click Tip Depth .• Select the Shape tab to viewthe profile.



Hole Profile .

• Click Counterbore .• Select the Shape tab to viewthe profile.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


Hole Profile .

• Click Countersink .• Edit the hole depth to ThroughAll .

• Select the Shape tab to viewthe profile.

• Select the Exit Countersinkcheck box.


13. Resume EXTRUDE_CUT tocompare holes.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Shell FeaturesThe Shell feature hollows out the inside of a solid model, leavinga shell of a specified wall thickness.

To create a basic shell feature:• Select surfaces for removal.• Specify thickness.

Original Model

Shelled Model with SurfacesRemoved Hollowed Out Model

Creating Shell Features TheoryShell features remove surfaces to hollow out a design model, leaving wallswith specified thickness values. There are two parts to the creation of a basicshell feature:• Select Surfaces for Removal - Select the surface or surfaces you want toremove from the model. You may decide not to remove any surfaces fromthe shell, which results in the creation of a closed shell, with the wholeinside of the part hollowed out and no access to the hollow.

• Thickness - Specify the thickness of the model walls that remain.You create shells in the design process to support your design intent.However, be aware that several features could reference a shell createdearly in the design process.Shells can be created using the Lead or Follow workflow. You can use draghandles or the dashboard to modify the thickness of the shell feature. TheFlip icon in the dashboard is equivalent to specifying a negative shell value.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Shell Features

ScenarioCreate a shell feature in a model.

Shell shell.prt

Task 1: Create a shell feature in a model.

1. Start the Shell Tool from thefeature toolbar.

2. Click Complete Feature tocreate a hollow shell.

3. Edit the definition of Shell 1.4. Select the top surface to remove

it.5. Edit the thickness to 20.6. Click Complete Feature .

7. Edit the definition of Shell 1.8. Press CTRL and select the left

and right surfaces to removethem, also.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module13Creating Rounds and Chamfers

Module OverviewOnce you create a part model, most times it still cannot be manufactured. Itusually needs to be further refined by adding rounds and chamfers.In this module, you learn how to create rounds and chamfers.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create rounds by selecting edges, a surface and an edge, and two surfaces.• Create full rounds.• Create round sets.• Create chamfers by selecting edges and learn about the different chamferdimensioning schemes.

• Create chamfer sets.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Rounds TheoryRounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitionsbetween existing geometry.

Round Preview

• Rounds can add or removematerial.

• You can select edges orsurfaces.

Completed Rounds

Creating Rounds TheoryRounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitions betweenexisting geometry. In the lower figure, one round adds material and the otherremoves material. When creating round features on a model, Pro/ENGINEERawaits the selection of edges and/or surfaces to be used as references. Theround tool adapts according to the references that you select to create theround feature.After the references are selected, the round preview appears with a defaultradius dimension, which can be modified by using the radius drag handle, byediting the dimension on the model, or by using the dashboard. In the upperfigure, the round preview is displayed.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Rounds by Selecting EdgesThe rounds created by selecting edges are constructed tangentto the surfaces adjacent to the selected edges.

• You can select one ormore edge.

• Rounds propagatearound tangentedges.

Rounds Created by Selecting Two Edges

Rounds Created by Selecting Two Edges

Creating Rounds by Selecting EdgesYou can create rounds by selecting an edge or a combination of edges. Eachedge that you select is rounded. If you select an edge that has adjacenttangent edges, by default the round automatically propagates around thosetangent edges. The rounds are constructed tangent to the surfaces adjacentto the selected edges.In the figures, the edges selected for rounding are highlighted on the left. Theresulting rounds are shown the right. Note that because the bottom figure’sedges are tangent to other edges, the round feature is automatically createdon the tangent edges.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges

ScenarioCreate rounds on an L-Block and an Oval block by selecting edges.

Rounds_Edges round_edge_1.prt

Task 1: Create rounds on an L-Block.

1. Start the Round Tool fromthe feature toolbar.

2. Press CTRL and select the twoedges.

3. Edit the radius value to 2.4. Click Complete Feature .

5. Notice that the left round addsmaterial, while the right roundremoves material.

Task 2: Create tangent rounds on an oval block.

1. Click Open , selectround_edge_2.prt, and clickOpen.

2. Start the Round Tool .3. Press CTRL and select the two

edges.4. Edit the radius value to .25.5. Click Complete Feature .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. Notice that the left round addsmaterial, while the right roundremoves material.

7. Also notice that even thoughjust two edges were selected, alledges tangent to the selectededges were also rounded.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface andEdgeRounds created by selecting a surface and edge are constructedtangent to the surface and pass through the edge.

• You can select asurface and an edge.

• Rounds propagatearound tangentedges.

Round Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge

Round Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge

Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and EdgeYou can create rounds by selecting a surface first and then an edge. Theseround features are constructed tangent to the selected surface and passthrough the selected edge. If the selected edge has adjacent tangent edges,by default the round automatically propagates around those tangent edges.In the figures above, the surfaces and edges selected are highlighted on theleft, and the resulting rounds are shown on the right.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surfaceand Edge

ScenarioCreate rounds on a stepped block and an oval block by selecting a surfaceand edge.

Rounds_Surf-Edge round_surf-edge_1.prt

Task 1: Create rounds on a stepped block.


2. Press CTRL and select thesurface and edge.


Notice that the round addsmaterial.

5. Start the Round Tool .6. Press CTRL and select the

surface and edge.7. Edit the radius value to 2.8. Click Complete Feature .

Notice that the round removesmaterial.

Task 2: Create tangent rounds on an oval block.

1. Click Open , selectround_surf-edge_2.prt, andclick Open.

2. Start the Round Tool .3. Press CTRL and select the

surface and edge.4. Edit the radius value to .60.5. Click Complete Feature .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. Notice that the round addsmaterial. Also notice that eventhough just the one edge wasselected, the round follows alledges tangent to the selectededge.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Rounds by Selecting Two SurfacesRounds created by selecting two surfaces can span gaps orengulf existing geometry.

• You can select twosurfaces.

• Rounds can spangaps.

• Rounds can engulfexisting geometry.

Round that Spans a Gap

Round that Engulfs Existing Geometry

Creating Rounds by Selecting Two SurfacesYou can create rounds by selecting two surfaces. The rounds are constructedtangent to the selected surfaces. If the selected references have adjacenttangent geometry, by default the round automatically propagates aroundthat geometry.For rounds created by selecting two surfaces, the system creates the roundbetween the selected surfaces, and therefore has the ability to span gapsor engulf existing geometry. In addition, rounds created by selecting twosurfaces can also provide more robust round geometry in cases whererounds created by selecting edges may fail or create undesired geometry.In the figures, the surfaces selected are highlighted on the left, and theresulting rounds are shown on the right.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting TwoSurfaces

ScenarioCreate rounds on two blocks by selecting two surfaces.

Rounds_Surf-Surf round_surf-surf_1.prt

Task 1: Create rounds on a block with a hole in it.


2. Press CTRL and select the twosurfaces.


Notice that the round spans thegap.

Task 2: Create rounds on another block.

1. Click Open , selectround_surf-surf_2.prt, andclick Open.


surfaces.4. Edit the radius value to 4.5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Notice that the round engulfs theexisting material.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Full RoundsFull rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent tothe surface it replaces.

Full Round Created by Selecting Two Edges

• You can select twoedges.

• You can select threesurfaces.

Full Round Created by Selecting Three Surfaces

Creating Full RoundsFull rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent to the surface itreplaces. You can create full rounds either by selecting a pair of edges ora pair of surfaces. If a pair of edges is selected, the system initially createsindividual rounds on each edge, and can be quickly converted to a full roundeither from the dashboard or by right-clicking. If a pair of surfaces is selected,a third surface must also be selected as the surface to remove with thecreation of the round.In either case, the full round is constructed with a rounding surface forminga tangent connection between the selected references. If the selectedreferences have adjacent tangent geometry, the round automaticallypropagates around that geometry.In the upper figure, the full round was created by selection of two edges.The edges selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting round isshown on the right. This round is removing material. In the lower figure, thefull round was created by selecting three surfaces. The surfaces selectedare highlighted on the left, and the resulting round is shown on the right.This round is adding material.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Full Rounds

ScenarioCreate full rounds on two blocks.

Full_Rounds round_full_1.prt

Task 1: Create rounds on a block by selecting edges.



3. Right-click and select Fullround.

4. Click Complete Feature .Notice that the round removesmaterial.


edges.7. Right-click and select Full

round.8. Click Complete Feature .

Notice that the round addsmaterial.

Task 2: Create rounds on a block by selecting surfaces.

1. Click Open , selectround_full_2.prt, and clickOpen.


surfaces.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

4. Press CTRL and select thebottom cut surface.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Round SetsRound sets enable you to create rounds of different radii ina single round feature.

• Create multiple round sets in a single round feature.• Each round set can have a different radius value.• Each set may be created by selecting different entities.

Three Round Sets in a Single Round Feature

Creating Round Sets TheoryRound features can contain multiple sets of references within a single roundfeature. When references for a round are selected, they can be selectedas being in the same set, or in additional sets. Each round set can havedifferent radius values or have been created differently, for example, a fullround versus a round created by selecting surfaces. You can add new setsto a round using the dashboard, by right-clicking in the graphics window, orsimply by selecting a new reference on the model. When you create a newround set, you can see the rounds from the other sets in the same feature intheir previewed state.In the figure, all three rounds are created within the same round feature.Each round is from a different set. The round in the left image was created byselecting a surface and edge. The round in the middle image was created byselecting an edge, and the round on the right is a full round. Notice also thatthe rounds are different radius values.Round sets are important for two reasons:1. Simplification - Round sets enable you to decrease the number of

features in the model tree.2. Transitions - Round sets enable you to manually specify the appearance

of the transitional surface where the round sets intersect.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Round SetsScenarioCreate different round sets in a round feature.

Round_Sets round-sets.prt

Task 1: Create three round sets in a single round feature.


2. Select the edge.3. Edit the radius value to 2.

4. Right-click and select Addset. Notice that the first roundremains previewed.

5. Press CTRL and select thesurface and edge.

6. Edit the radius value to 6.5.

7. In the dashboard, select theSets tab.• Click *New set. Notice thatthe previous two rounds arestill previewed.

• Press CTRL and select thetwo edges.

• Click Full round.

8. In the Sets tab, select Set 2.9. Edit the Radius value from 6.5

to 5.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Chamfers by Selecting EdgesChamfers add or remove material by creating a beveled surfacebetween adjacent surfaces and edges.

Chamfers Created by Selecting Two Edges

• You can select one ormore edge.

• Chamfers can add orremove material.

• Chamfers propagatearound tangentedges.

Chamfers Created by Selecting Two Edges

Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges TheorySimilar to round features, chamfers add or remove material by creatinga beveled surface between adjacent surfaces and edges selected asreferences. You can create chamfers by selecting an edge or a combinationof edges. Each edge that you select will be chamfered. Like rounds, if theselected edge for chamfering has adjacent tangent edges, by default, thechamfer automatically propagates around those tangent edges.In the figures, the edges selected for chamfering are highlighted on theleft. The resulting chamfers are shown on the right. Note that because thebottom figure’s edges are tangent to other edges, the chamfer feature isautomatically created on the tangent edges.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges

ScenarioCreate chamfers on an L-Block and an Oval block by selecting edges.

Chamfers_Edges chamfer-edge_1.prt

Task 1: Create chamfers on an L-Block.

1. Start the Edge Chamfer Toolfrom the feature toolbar.


3. Edit the D value to 1.75.4. Click Complete Feature .

5. Notice that the left chamfer addsmaterial, while the right chamferremoves material.

Task 2: Create tangent chamfers on an oval block.

1. Click Open , selectchamfer-edge_2.prt, andclick Open.

2. Click Edge Chamfer Tool .3. Select the edge.4. Edit the D value to 3.5. Click Complete Feature .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. Start the Edge Chamfer Tool.

7. Select the edge.8. Edit the D value to 1.9. Click Complete Feature .

10. Notice that the left chamfer addsmaterial, while the right chamferremoves material.

11. Also notice that even thoughjust two edges were selected, alledges tangent to the selectededges were also chamfered.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning SchemesThere are several different ways to dimension a chamfer tocapture desired design intent.

Dimensioningschemes include:• D x D• D1 x D2• ANG x D• 45 x D

Four Different Chamfer Dimensioning Schemeswith the Same Geometry

Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes TheoryThere are several different dimensioning schemes available when creatingchamfers:• D x D - Size of chamfer is defined by one dimension, as shown by theupper-right chamfer.

• D1 x D2 - Size of chamfer is defined by two dimensions, as shown bythe upper-left chamfer.

• ANG x D - Size of chamfer is defined by a linear and angular dimension,as shown by the lower-left chamfer.

• 45 x D - Size of chamfer is defined by a linear dimension at a 45-degreeangle, as shown by the lower-right chamfer. This type is only valid forperpendicular surfaces.

You can edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme either by using the dashboardor by right-clicking in the dashboard and then selecting the new scheme.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic Chamfer DimensioningSchemes

ScenarioCreate different chamfer dimensioning schemes on a block.

Cham_Dim-Schemes chamfer_dim-schemes.prt

Task 1: Create four chamfer dimensioning schemes on a block.


2. Select the edge.3. Edit the D value to 7.4. Click Complete Feature .


6. Select the edge.7. In the dashboard, edit the

dimensioning scheme to D1 xD2.

8. Edit the D1 value to 7 and theD2 value to 7.




dimensioning scheme to Anglex D.

13. Edit the Angle value to 45 andthe D value to 7.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly



dimensioning scheme to 45 x D.18. Edit the D value to 7.19. Click Complete Feature .

20. Orient to the FRONT vieworientation.

21. Select all four Chamfer features,right-click, and select Edit.Notice that all four chamfers arethe same geometry, but differentdimensioning schemes.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Chamfer SetsChamfer sets enable you to create chamfers of differentdimensioning schemes or D values in a single chamfer feature.

• Create multiple chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature.• Each chamfer set can have a different D value.• Each set may be created with a different dimensioning scheme.

Three Chamfer Sets in a Single Chamfer Feature

Creating Chamfer Sets TheoryChamfer features can contain multiple sets of references within a singlechamfer feature. When references for a chamfer are selected, they can beselected as being in the same set, or in additional sets. Each chamfer setcan have different D values or could be created with a different dimensioningscheme, for example, a D x D chamfer versus an ANG x D chamfer. Youcan add new sets to a chamfer using the dashboard by right-clicking in thegraphics window, or simply by selecting a new reference on the model. Whenyou create a new chamfer set, you can see the chamfers from the other setsin the same feature in their previewed state.In the figure above, all three chamfers are created within the same chamferfeature but with different dimensioning schemes. Each chamfer is from adifferent set. The D x D chamfer in the left image was created by selecting anedge. In the middle image, the Angle x D chamfer was created by selectingan edge, and the D1 x D2 chamfer on the right was created by selecting adifferent edge. Notice also that the chamfers are different D values.Chamfer sets are important for two reasons:1. Simplification - Chamfer sets enable you to decrease the number of

features in the model tree.2. Transitions - Chamfer sets enable you to manually specify the

appearance of the transitional surface where the chamfer sets intersect.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfer Sets

ScenarioCreate different chamfer sets in a chamfer feature.

Chamfer_Sets chamfer-sets.prt

Task 1: Create three chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature.


2. Select the edge.3. Edit the D value to 2.

4. Select the next edge. Noticethat the first chamfer remainspreviewed.

5. Edit the chamfer dimensioningscheme to Angle x D.

6. Edit the Angle value to 19 andthe D value to 6.5.

7. In the dashboard, select theSets tab.• Click *New set. Notice thatthe previous two chamfers arestill previewed.

• Select the edge.• Edit the chamfer dimensioningscheme to D1 x D2.

• Edit the D1 value to 3 and theD2 value to 1.75.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module14Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools

Module OverviewPro/ENGINEER offers many tools to duplicate features and parts to increaseefficiency.In this module, learn how to create local groups of features. You also learnhow to use the Copy tool to create a single instance of multiple features orgroups. Finally, you learn how to use the Mirror tool to mirror features andparts to create symmetrical models.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create local groups.• Copy and paste features, as well as move and rotate those copied features.• Mirror selected features, all features, and parts.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Local GroupsA local group enables you to perform an operation on multiplefeatures at once.

Reasons for grouping include:• Copy/pattern multiple features asone.

• Select as one.• When editing, view dims from allfeatures in the group.

• Organize/collapse the model tree.

Model Tree Before and AfterLocal Group

Viewing Dimensions of AllGrouped Features

Selecting All Grouped Entitiesas One

Creating Local Groups TheoryIn Pro/ENGINEER, you can collect features together into a local group. Alocal group enables you to perform an operation on multiple features at once.You can group features either by clicking Edit > Group from the main menuor by selecting features, right-clicking, and selecting Group. You can alsoungroup features by right-clicking. Some facts about local groups are:• The features that you group must be sequential in the model tree.• When you group features, they nest under the name of the group in themodel tree.

• You can delete or suppress features individually within a group.• You can drag and drop features into or out of a group.

Reasons for Creating Local GroupsThere are numerous reasons for creating local groups:• You can copy or pattern multiple features as one by patterning or copyingthe local group.

• You can select all features within the local group as one.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• When editing, you can view the dimensions of all features in the localgroup at one time.

• You can use local groups to organize or collapse the model tree.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Local Groups

ScenarioGroup and ungroup features in a part model.

Local_Groups group.prt

Task 1: Group and ungroup features in a part model.

1. Press CTRL and select Extrude2 and Hole 1.

2. Right-click and select Group.3. Expand Group

LOCAL_GROUP in the modeltree. Notice both features in thegroup.

4. Right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP and select Ungroup.

5. Press CTRL and select Extrude2, Hole 1, Hole 2, and Round 1.

6. Right-click and select Group.7. Right-click and select Edit.

Notice that you see thedimensions from all features inthe group.

8. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select allfeatures.

9. Select the round feature fromthe model.

10. Right-click and select SelectGroup.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. In the model tree, expand GroupLOCAL_GROUP and expandfeature Hole 2. Notice theembedded datum axis A_2.

12. Right-click on Hole 2 and selectDelete.• In the Delete dialog box,ensure that the Keepembedded datum featurescheck box is selected.

• Click OK to delete the hole butkeep the datum axis.

13. Click Axis Display .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Copying and Pasting FeaturesThe copy and paste functionality enables you to quicklyduplicate a feature.

Copy• Select features or groups offeatures.

Paste• Pastes feature with samereference types, dimensionscheme, and options as original.

• Select new references.• Independent of original feature.

Copying and Pasting a Hole

Sketch Placed on the Cursor Copying and Pasting an Extrude

Copying and Pasting Features TheoryCopy and paste enable you to quickly duplicate a feature or group of features.Each copy and paste operation creates a single copy of the selected featureor features. When the new feature is placed with paste, the primary referenceis cleared and the system awaits selection of a new reference. However,depending on the feature type, the system maintains the reference type,dimensioning scheme, and the same options as the original. The copiedfeature is independent of the original.In the upper figure, a hole is copied and pasted. Once the placementsurface is selected, you can place the new hole in a new location on thenew placement surface. Notice that the hole diameter and depth optionsare carried over to the copy.In the lower figure, an extrude feature is copied and pasted. You must specifya new sketch and reference plane and enter Sketcher mode. The system


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

places the copied sketch on the cursor, as shown in the lower-left figure, andyou can drop it into location and edit dimensions appropriately. The copiedextrude feature maintains feature type, options, and depth.You can also copy and paste rounds. When doing so, the round referencetypes, size, and options, are maintained. You must select new correspondingreferences.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Copying and Pasting Features

ScenarioCopy and paste features in a part model.

Copy_Paste copy_paste.prt

Task 1: Copy and paste a hole feature in a part model.

1. Select Hole 1 and click Copy from the main toolbar.

2. Click Paste from the main toolbar.

3. Select the approximate holelocation on the front surface.

4. Right-click and select OffsetReferences Collector.

5. Select the top and right surfaces.6. Edit the offset from the top

surface to 1.5 and edit the offsetfrom the right surface to 3.


Task 2: Copy and paste an extrude feature in a part model.

1. Select Extrude 2 and click Copy .

2. Click Paste .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

3. Right-click and select EditInternal Sketch.

4. Select the right surface as theSketch Plane.

5. In the Sketch dialog box, edit theOrientation to Bottom and clickSketch.

6. The sketch is attached to yourmouse. Select the approximateplacement.

7. Edit the dimensions.8. Click Done Section .





For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Moving and Rotating Copied FeaturesYou can use the Paste Special option to apply move and rotateoptions to the resulting copied feature.

Moving a Copied Feature

Copy:• Select features orgroups of features.

Paste Special:• Make copies dependentor independent.

• Move/rotate.• Edit the dependence.

Rotating a Copied Feature

Moving and Rotating a Copied Feature

Moving and Rotating Copied Features TheoryWhen copying features in a part model, you can use the Paste Special optionto apply move and rotate options to the resulting copied feature.• Move the copied feature - Linearly translate the copied feature. Specifya direction reference such as a surface, datum plane, edge, or axis, andenter the translation distance value. The copied feature moves normal to aplane or surface, and along an edge or axis. In the upper figure, the ovalcopied protrusion moves normal to datum plane DTM1 a distance of 3.

• Rotate copied feature - Angularly rotate the copied feature. Specify adirection reference such as an edge or axis, and enter the angular rotationvalue. The copied feature rotates around the edge or axis. In the middlefigure, the oval copied protrusion rotates around datum axis AXIS at anangle of 45°.

You can also apply multiple move and rotate operations to the same copiedfeature. For example, you may choose to move the feature in one directionand rotate it about an axis, as shown in the lower figure. Or you may choose


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

to move the feature in one direction and then move it further in anotherdirection.

Creating Dependent CopiesWhen you copy a feature, the default dependent copy option is to make thecopied feature’s dimensions and section sketch dependent on those of theoriginal. That is, all the dimensions of the original feature become sharedbetween the original feature and copied feature. Therefore, when you edit thevalue of a shared dimension, both features update simultaneously.

Editing the Dependence of CopiesThere are two different ways you can edit the dependency of a dependentlycopied feature:• Break the dependence of one of the copied feature dimensions by selectingthe dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Make Dim Indep. All otheraspects of the copied feature remain dependent on the original.

• Break the dependence of the copied feature section by selecting the copiedfeature, right-clicking, and selecting Make Sec Indep. The copied featuredepth is still dependent on the original.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Moving and Rotating Copied Features

ScenarioMove and rotate copied features in a part.

Move_Rotate move_rotate.prt

Task 1: Move and rotate copied features.

1. Select Extrude 2.

2. Click Copy from the main toolbar.

3. Click Paste Special from the main toolbar.4. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Apply Move/Rotate

transformations to copies check box and click OK.

5. Select datum plane DTM1 andedit the offset value to 3.


7. With Moved Copy 1 still selected, click Copy and click Paste

Special .8. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear the Make copies dependent

on dimensions of originals, select the Apply Move/Rotatetransformations to copies check box, and click OK.

9. In the dashboard, click Rotate.

10. Select datum axis AXIS and editthe offset angle to 45.


12. With Moved Copy 2 still selected, click Copy and click Paste

Special .13. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear the Make copies dependent

on dimensions of originals, select the Apply Move/Rotatetransformations to copies check box, and click OK.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

14. Select datum plane RIGHT andedit the offset to 1.

15. In the dashboard, select theTransformations tab and clickNew Move.

16. Edit the move type to Rotate,select datum axis AXIS, and editthe offset angle to 45.


Task 2: Edit dimensions and dependency of moved and rotated features.

1. Select Extrude 2, right-click,and select Edit.

2. Edit the feature height from 1 to

2 and click Regenerate .

3. Expand Moved Copy 1 andselect Extrude 2 (2).

4. Right-click and select Edit.5. Select the 1 width value,

right-click, and select Make DimIndep.

6. In the message window, clickYes to make an independentdimension.

7. Click in the background twice tode-select all features.

8. Right-click Extrude 2 (2) andselect Edit.

9. Edit the feature width from 1 to1.5 and click Regenerate .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Mirroring Selected FeaturesYou can mirror selected features about a plane.

Mirroring Features About Datum Plane RIGHT

Mirror Features:• Mirror features orgroups of features.

• Select mirror plane.• Mirror featuresdependent orindependent.

Mirroring Features About Datum Plane FRONT

Mirroring Selected Features TheoryYou can mirror selected features or a group of features about a plane, andhave the mirrored features be independent or dependent on the originalfeatures. In the example on the slide, we have three oval protrusions in agroup, as shown in the left image of the upper figure. The group is selectedand mirrored dependently about datum plane RIGHT, as shown in the rightimage of the upper figure. Next, the original group and the mirrored group areselected, and both are mirrored about datum plane FRONT independently, asshown in the right image of the bottom figure. Because this second mirrorwas done independently, the original geometry height can be modified, andonly the dependently mirrored geometry height updates.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Mirroring Selected Features

ScenarioMirror selected features both independently and dependently.

Mirror_Selected mirror_selected_features.prt

Task 1: Mirror selected features and edit the extrude height.

1. Press CTRL and select Extrude2, Moved Copy 1, and MovedCopy 2.

2. Start the Mirror Tool fromthe feature toolbar.

3. Select datum plane RIGHT.4. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab and notice themirror will be dependent.


6. With the mirror feature stillselected, press CTRL and alsoselect Extrude 2, Moved Copy1, and Moved Copy 2.

7. Start the Mirror Tool .8. Select datum plane FRONT.9. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab and clear the Copyas Dependent check box.


11. In the model tree, right-clickExtrude 2 and select Edit.

12. Edit the height from 1 to 2.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Mirroring All FeaturesMirroring all features enables you to create half a model andthen mirror it to complete the entire part.

Mirror the entire model:• Select the part node in the model tree.• Mirror is dependent on original side.• Mirrors all features that are before the mirror feature in the model tree.

Mirror All Features Before Mirror All Features Result

Mirroring All Features TheoryTo mirror all features, you simply select the part node in the model tree (thename of the model at the top of the tree) and then mirror all the features inthe model at one time. This enables you to create one half of a model andthen mirror it to complete the entire part. A single mirror feature is created,which is dependent on the original side of the model.The mirror feature mirrors all features that come before it in the model tree.Features that change on the original side of the model update on the mirrorside. Features inserted before the mirror feature are mirrored to the oppositeside. Features created after the mirror are not mirrored.

When you mirror all features, this includes all datum planes. Theresulting mirrored datum planes retain the same name as theiroriginals, except that the mirrored datum planes have an "_1" suffixadded to their names. For example, if you mirror all features, whichincludes datum plane TOP, the corresponding mirrored datum planename is TOP_1.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Mirroring All Features

ScenarioMirror all part features about a datum plane.

Mirror_All mirror_all_features.prt

Task 1: Mirror all part features about a datum plane.

1. In the model tree,select the part nodeMIRROR_ALL_FEATURES.PRT.

2. Start the Mirror Tool fromthe feature toolbar.

3. Select datum plane RIGHT.4. Click Complete Feature .

5. In the model tree, right-click onHole 1 and select Edit.

6. Edit the hole diameter from 16to 20.

7. In the model tree, select Extrude3, right-click, and select Edit.

8. Edit the width from 35 to 40.

9. Click Regenerate . Noticethat all four hole and extrudefeatures have updated.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Mirrored PartsYou can create a duplicate, mirrored copy of a part.

Mirror types:• Mirror geometry only.• Include all feature data.

Dependency control:• Geometry dependent.

Original Part Mirrored Part

Creating Mirrored Parts TheoryYou can create a mirrored copy of a part directly within Pro/ENGINEER.There are two different types of mirrored parts that can be created:

• Mirror Geometry Only - Mirrors geometrywithout the structure of the original part. Themodel tree contains one mirrored feature in theresulting mirrored part.

• Include all Feature Data - Mirrors geometry withthe original part feature structure. The geometryof the resulting mirrored part is not dependenton the geometry of the original model.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

When creating a new mirrored part, you must specify the part name for thenew part. If you mirror a part using the Mirror Geometry Only type, you mustalso specify whether the resulting mirrored part is dependent on the originalor not. This option is only available for the Mirror Geometry Only mirror type.

You can also mirror an entire assembly using File > MirrorAssembly.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Parts

ScenarioMirror a part within Pro/ENGINEER.

Mirrored_Parts mirror-part-rh.prt

Task 1: Mirror a part.

1. Notice that the part isasymmetric. You need tocreate an equivalent left-handedpart.

2. Click File > Mirror Part from themain menu.

3. In the Mirror part dialog box,accept the defaults for MirrorType and Dependency Control,and type MIRROR_PART_LHas the New Name.

4. Click OK from the Mirror partdialog box. Notice that thesystem determines the mirrorplane, as you were neverprompted for it.

5. Arrange the two Pro/ENGINEERwindows on your desktop tocompare parts.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module15Creating Patterns

Module OverviewPatterning features and components is yet another way to quickly duplicatefeatures to increase efficiency.In this module, you learn how to pattern features linearly and angularly, aswell as learn how to increment dimensions while patterning. You also learnhow to Reference pattern features and components. Finally, you learn how todelete patterns and pattern members.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Direction Pattern in the First and Second Directions.• Axis Pattern in the First and Second Directions.• Create Reference patterns of features and components.• Delete patterns and pattern members.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Direction Patterning in the First DirectionThe direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a givendirection.• Direction and increments basedon selected reference.

• Select a first direction reference.• Specify number of members andincrement.

• Specify additional, optionaldimensions to increment.

Direction Patterning an Extrudein One Direction

Editing the Direction Pattern and Pattern Leader

Patterning Features TheoryThe Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features,or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of theselected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selectedfor patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances arecalled pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the originalfeature, or pattern leader. In the lower figure, the width of the pattern leaderhas been modified between the images third from the left and fourth from theleft. Consequently, all pattern members’ widths have been updated as well.

Direction Patterning in the First Direction TheoryThe direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given direction. Thefollowing items are required to create a direction pattern in one direction:• Specify a First Direction reference - The pattern extends in a directionbased on the reference selected. If you select a plane or surface, thepattern extends normal to the reference, and if you select a linear curve,edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. You can also flip


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

the direction the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In the figures, the firstdirection reference specified is datum plane FRONT.

• Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction - Type thenumber of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. Thenumber of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In the lowerfigure, the left-most image has four pattern members, while in the imagesecond-from-left, the number of pattern members is six.

• Specify the increment in the first direction - The increment is the spacingbetween pattern members. You can edit the increment in the dashboard,the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle.

Incrementing Additional DimensionsYou can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at thesame time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required toincrement additional dimensions in the first direction:• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader - Thepattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.

• Specify the increment value - In the lower figure, the extrude featureheight was incremented 0.5. Consequently, each pattern member’s heightincreases 0.5 over the previous pattern member.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the First Direction

ScenarioDirection pattern an extrude feature in one direction.

Dir_Pattern_1st direction_pattern_1st.prt

Task 1: Direction pattern an extrude feature.

1. Select Extrude 2 and startthe Pattern Tool from thefeature toolbar.

2. In the dashboard, edit the patterntype to Direction.

3. Select datum plane FRONT andclick Flip First Direction .

4. Edit the number of members to4 and edit the spacing to 2.


6. With the Pattern feature stillselected, right-click and selectEdit.

7. Edit the number of patternedextruded from 4 to 6.


9. Edit the definition of Pattern 1.10. In the dashboard, select the

Dimensions tab.• Click in the Direction 1Dimension collector.

• Select the 1 height dimensionand edit the increment to 0.5.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


12. Select the pattern leader,right-click, and select Edit.

13. Edit the width from 2 to 3.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Direction Patterning in the Second DirectionThe direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a givendirection.

• Direction and increments basedon selected references.

• Select a first and second directionreference.

• Specify number of members andincrements in first and seconddirections.

• Specify additional, optionaldimensions to increment.

Direction Patterning a Groupin Two Directions

Direction Patterning a Group inTwo Directions Result

Direction Pattern, Two Directions,Two Additional Dimensions

Patterning Features TheoryThe Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features,or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of theselected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selectedfor patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances arecalled pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the originalfeature, or pattern leader.

Direction Patterning in the Second Direction TheoryThe direction pattern enables you to pattern features in two directions. Thefollowing items are required to create a direction pattern in two directions:• Specify the First and Second Direction references - The pattern extends inthe directions based on the references selected. If you select a plane orsurface, the pattern extends normal to the reference, and if you select alinear curve, edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. Youcan also flip the direction the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In thefigures, the first direction reference specified is datum plane RIGHT, andthe second direction reference specified is datum plane FRONT.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions- Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphicswindow. The number of pattern members can be different for eachdirection. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. Inthe figures, the first direction has four pattern members, while the seconddirection has five pattern members.

• Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions - The increment isthe spacing between pattern members. You can edit the increment in thedashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. Again,the increment can be different between the first and second directions. Inthe figures, the first direction increment is 2.5, while the second directionincrement is 2.0.

Incrementing Additional DimensionsYou can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,or both, at the same time to create a ’varying’ pattern. The following items arerequired to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader - Thepattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. Thedimension selected can be different for each direction. Note also that youcan select multiple dimensions for each direction if desired.

• Specify the increment value - Again, the increment value for each directioncan be different. In the lower-right figure, the extrude feature width wasincremented by -0.2 in the first direction, and the extrude feature heightwas incremented 0.5 in the second direction. Consequently, each patternmember’s width decreases by 0.20 in the first direction and the heightincreases 0.5 in the second direction over the previous pattern member.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the SecondDirection

ScenarioDirection pattern an extrude feature in two directions.

Dir_Pattern_2nd direction_pattern_2nd.prt

Task 1: Direction pattern an extrude feature.

1. Press CTRL, and select Extrude2 and Round 1.

2. Right-click and select Group.3. Rename the group to OVAL.

4. Select Group OVAL and start

the Pattern Tool from thefeature toolbar.

5. In the dashboard, edit the patterntype to Direction.

6. Select datum plane RIGHT asthe first direction reference.

7. Edit the number of members to4 and edit the spacing to 2.50.

8. In the dashboard, click in theDirection 2 Reference collector.• Select datum plane FRONTas the second directionreference.

• Click Flip Second Direction.

• Edit the second directionnumber of members to 5and edit the second directionspacing to 2.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly



• Select the 2 extrude widthdimension and edit theincrement to -0.20.

• Press CTRL and select theR0.1 radius dimension andedit the increment to 0.075.

12. In the Dimensions tab of thedashboard, click in the Direction2 Dimension collector.

13. Select the 1 extrude heightdimension and edit the incrementto 0.50.


15. Select the pattern leader,right-click, and select Edit.

16. Edit the width from 1 to 0.75.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Axis Patterning in the First DirectionThe axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about aspecified axis.

• Direction based on selected axis.• Specify number of members andangular spacing.

• Set angular extent.• Specify angular orientation.• Specify additional, optionaldimensions to increment.

Axis Patterning an Extrude inOne Direction

Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing a Dimension

Patterning Features TheoryThe Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features,or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of theselected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selectedfor patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances arecalled pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the originalfeature, or pattern leader. In the lower figure, the width of the pattern leaderwas modified between the images third from the left and fourth from the left.Consequently, all pattern members’ widths updated as well.

Axis Patterning in the First Direction TheoryThe axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a specifiedaxis. The following items are required to create an axis pattern in onedirection:• Specify the axis reference - The pattern extends angularly about theselected reference axis. You can flip the angular direction the patternextends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the figures, the axisreference specified is datum axis AXIS.

• Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction - Type thenumber of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In the lowerfigures, there are six pattern members.

• Specify the angular spacing - Specified in degrees, you can edit theangular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by draggingthe drag handle.

There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creatingaxis patterns:• Set Angular Extent - This option automatically spaces the pattern membersequally about the axis reference. You can also select values of 90, 180,270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or type in the desiredangular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular extentvalue will supercede the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular extenthas been set to 360 degrees.

• Member Orientation - Determines how the pattern members are to beoriented about the axis reference. With the default option Follow rotation,pattern members are oriented such that the relationship between thepattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern member. In the lowerfigure, the middle image is set to Follow rotation. With the Constant option,all pattern members have a constant orientation that is the same as thepattern leader. In the lower figure, the left-most image is set to Constant.

Incrementing Additional DimensionsYou can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at thesame time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required toincrement additional dimensions in the first direction:• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. Thepattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.

• Specify the increment value - In the lower figure, the extrude feature lengthwas incremented 0.3 in the right-most image. Consequently, each patternmember’s length increases 0.3 over the previous pattern member.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the First Direction

ScenarioAxis pattern an extrude feature in one direction.

Axis_Pattern_1st axis_pattern_1st.prt

Task 1: Axis pattern an extrude feature.

1. Select Extrude 2 and startthe Pattern Tool from thefeature toolbar.

2. In the dashboard, edit the patterntype to Axis.

3. Select datum axis AXIS.4. Edit the number of members to

6 and edit the angle incrementto 45.

5. In the dashboard, click SetAngular Extent .

6. Edit the Angular Extent valuefrom 360 to 90.

7. Edit the Angular Extent valueback to 360.



Options tab.• Select the Constant optionfor Member orientation onrotation plane.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly



• Select the 2 length dimensionand edit the increment to 0.3.


15. Edit the definition of Pattern 1.16. In the dashboard, click Flip

Pattern Direction .17. Click Complete Feature .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Axis Patterning in the Second DirectionThe axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about aspecified axis.

• Direction based on selected axis.• Specify number of members andangular spacing in first and seconddirections.

• Set angular extent.• Specify angular orientation.• Specify additional, optionaldimensions to increment.

Axis Patterning a Group inTwo Directions

Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing Dimensions

Patterning Features TheoryThe Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features,or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of theselected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selectedfor patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances arecalled pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the originalfeature, or pattern leader.

Axis Patterning in the Second Direction TheoryThe axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially and outward from aspecified axis. The following items are required to create an axis pattern inthose two directions:• Specify the axis reference. The pattern extends angularly about theselected axis reference in the first direction and radially outward fromthe axis in the second direction. You can flip the angular direction thepattern extends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the figures, the axisreference specified is datum axis AXIS.

• Specify the number of pattern members in the first and second directions.Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphicswindow. The number of pattern members can be different for eachdirection. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

the figures, the first direction has eight pattern members, while seconddirection has three pattern members.

• Specify the angular spacing in the first direction. Specified in degrees, youcan edit the angular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or bydragging the drag handle.

• Specify the radial spacing in the second direction. This increment is thespacing between pattern members outward from the axis reference. Again,you can edit the increment in the dashboard, in the graphics window, or bydragging the drag handle. In the figures, the spacing increment is 2.5.

There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creatingaxis patterns:• Set Angular Extent - This option automatically spaces the pattern membersequally about the axis reference. You can also select values of 90, 180,270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or you can type the desiredangular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular extentvalue will supercede the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular extenthas been set to 360 degrees.

• Member Orientation - Determines how the pattern members are to beoriented about the axis reference. With the default option Follow rotation,pattern members are oriented such that the relationship between thepattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern member. In the lowerfigure, the middle image is set to Follow rotation. With the Constant option,all pattern members have a constant orientation that is the same as thepattern leader. In the lower figure, the left-most image is set to Constant.

Incrementing Additional DimensionsYou can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,or both, at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items arerequired to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. Thepattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. Thedimension selected can be different for each direction. Note also that youcan select multiple dimensions for each direction if desired.

• Specify the increment value - Again, the increment value for each directioncan be different. In the lower figure, right-most image, the left hole diameterwas incremented by 0.075 in the first direction, and the right hole diameterwas incremented 0.25 in the second direction along with the extrudeheight incremented by 1. Consequently, each pattern member’s left holediameter increases by 0.075 in the first direction and the right hole diameterincreases 0.25 in the second direction with the extrude height increasing 1over the previous pattern member.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the Second Direction

ScenarioAxis pattern an extrude feature in two directions.

Axis_Pattern_2nd axis_pattern_2nd.prt

Task 1: Axis pattern an extrude feature.

1. Press CTRL, and select Extrude2, Hole 1, and Hole 2.

2. Right-click and select Group.3. Rename the group to OVAL.

4. Select Group OVAL and start

the Pattern Tool from thefeature toolbar.

5. In the dashboard, edit the patterntype to Axis.

6. Select datum axis AXIS as thepattern center.

7. Edit the number of members inthe first direction to 8.

8. Click Set Angular Extent inthe dashboard.

9. Edit the number of members inthe second direction to 3, andedit the spacing value to 2.5.


11. Edit the definition of Pattern 1of OVAL.

12. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Select the Constant optionfor Member orientation onrotation plane.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

14. Edit the definition of Pattern 1of OVAL.

15. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab and select theFollow rotation option forMember orientation on rotationplane.

16. In the dashboard, select theDimensions tab.• Click in the Direction 1Dimension collector.

• Select the 0.25 left holediameter dimension and editthe increment to 0.075.

17. In the Dimensions tab of thedashboard, click in the Direction2 Dimension collector.• Select the 0.25 right holediameter dimension and editthe increment to 0.25.

• Press CTRL, select the 1height dimension, and edit theincrement to 1.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Reference Patterns of FeaturesA Reference pattern patterns a feature ’on top of’ any otherpatterned feature.

You can reference pattern:• Features.• Groups.• Patterns along an existing pattern.

Reference pattern types:• Feature• Group• Both Reference Patterning a Group

Editing Reference Pattern Reference Types

Creating Reference Patterns of Features TheoryA Reference pattern patterns a feature "on top of" any other patternedfeature. If you create a new feature on the pattern leader of another pattern,you can Reference pattern that new feature. In the upper-right figure, anextrude feature was created and patterned. A cut and round feature werethen created on the pattern leader extrude feature. Consequently, the cut andround feature can be Reference patterned.Depending on how the features were created, there are three differentReference pattern types that can be created:• Feature - The Reference pattern references an existing feature pattern. Inthe lower figure, left image, the round feature is being Reference patternedbased on the existing axis pattern.

• Group - The Reference pattern references either a group or existing patternof a pattern. In the lower figure, middle image, an axis pattern is thendirection patterned, resulting in a pattern of a pattern. The round feature isReference patterned based on the axis pattern that was patterned.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Both - The Reference pattern references both an existing feature patternand a group pattern. In the lower figure, right image, the round is Referencepatterned around both the feature pattern (axis pattern) and the grouppattern (the pattern of the axis pattern).

When creating a Reference pattern of a sketch-based feature (suchas extrude), you must either Reference pattern the sketch first,group the sketch and sketch-based feature together, or use aninternal (unlinked) sketch. To simplify Reference pattern creation,an internal (unlinked) sketch is recommended. Reference patternsof other feature types, such as rounds or holes, are not an issue.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns of Features

ScenarioCreate Reference patterns of features in a part model.

Ref_Pattern_Feature ref-pattern.prt

Task 1: Reference pattern a group.

1. In the model tree, press CTRLand select OVAL_CUT andROUND_2.

2. Right-click and select Group.

3. With the group still selected,

start the Pattern Tool fromthe feature toolbar. Notice thedefault pattern type is Referencepattern.


Task 2: Direction pattern AXIS_PATTERN and Reference pattern a roundfeature.


2. In the model tree, selectAXIS_PATTERN and start the

Pattern Tool .3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern

type to Direction.4. Select datum plane FRONT and

click Flip First Direction .5. Edit the number of members to

3 and edit the spacing to 50.6. Click Complete Feature .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. Select ROUND_1.

8. Start the Pattern Tool .Notice the default pattern typeis Reference pattern and thatthe default Reference type isFeature. Also notice that thereference pattern only occurs onthe axis pattern.

9. In the dashboard, edit theReference type to Group.Notice that the round onlypatterns once per directionpattern group.

10. In the dashboard, edit theReference type to Both. Noticethat the round patterns on eachmember of the axis pattern aswell as each member of thedirection pattern of the axispattern.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Reference Patterns of ComponentsYou can use a Reference pattern to quickly assemble multipleinstances of a component.

• Assemble component to patternleader.

• Reference pattern the component.• Number of Referencepatterned components updatesautomatically.

Reference Patterning a Bolt

Reference Patterning a BoltUpdating the Number of Bosses

and Holes

Creating Reference Patterns of Components TheoryReference patterns can also be used at the assembly level. For example,if a bolt is assembled into a hole (which is a pattern leader of a pattern ofholes, the bolt can be Reference patterned) as shown in the upper-right andlower-left figures. To do this, a component is placed into each member of theunderlying pattern. If the number of patterned holes changes, the number ofpatterned bolts updates accordingly, as shown in the lower-right figure.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns ofComponents

ScenarioReference pattern the bolts in the assembly.

Ref_Pattern_Comps ref_pattern_comp.asm

Task 1: Reference pattern the bolts in the assembly.

1. In the model tree, select eachcomponent to highlight it in thegraphics window.

2. Select the last BOLT_8.PRT inthe model tree.

3. Start the Pattern Tool fromthe feature toolbar.


5. Select the upper BOLT_8.PRTfrom the graphics window.

6. Start the Pattern Tool .7. Click Complete Feature .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

8. In the model tree, expandBASE.PRT.

9. Right-click Pattern 4 of EARand select Edit.

10. Edit the number of patternmembers from 6 LOCALGROUPS to 8 LOCALGROUPS.

11. In the model tree, expandCOVER.PRT.

12. Right-click Pattern 1 of Extrude4 and select Edit.

13. Edit the number of patternmembers from 6 EXTRUDES to8 EXTRUDES.

14. Click Regenerate . Noticethat the number of Referencepatterned bolts also increases to8.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Deleting Patterns or Pattern MembersYou can either delete an entire pattern or disable individualmembers of a pattern.

• Delete - Deletes the pattern andthe feature used to create thepattern.

• Delete pattern - Deletes thepattern but keeps the originalfeature.

• Click the black dots to disablethat pattern member.

Using the Delete Function

Using the Delete Pattern FunctionDisabling Individual Pattern

Members

Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members TheoryYou have three options available when it comes to deleting patterns ormembers of a pattern:• Delete the pattern and the original feature - You can select the pattern,right-click, and select the Delete option to delete the pattern in additionto the original feature used to create the pattern. Note also that anyother patterns that reference this feature will be deleted as well. In theupper-right figure, the extrude feature and pattern are to be deleted. Thesystem is showing that the reference pattern that consists of the cut andround will also be deleted.

• Delete the pattern - You can select the pattern, right-click, and select theDelete Pattern option to delete the pattern, leaving the original feature


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

intact, as shown in the lower-left figure. Note that the reference pattern thatconsists of the cut and round is also updated automatically.

• Disable individual members of a pattern or reference pattern - Whenpreviewing a pattern or Reference pattern, each pattern instance isrepresented by a black "dot." If any of the pattern preview "dots" areselected, their display changes to white, which disables that particularmember of the pattern. To restore the pattern member, click the whitedot at any time while redefining the pattern. In the lower-right figure, thesecond and fourth pattern members have been disabled. Notice that thereference pattern has updated automatically.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members

ScenarioDelete patterns and pattern members.

Delete_Pattern delete_pattern.prt

Task 1: Delete patterns and disable pattern members.

1. In the model tree, right-clickOVAL_PATTERN select Delete,and click OK from the Deletedialog box.

2. Notice that all features aredeleted in addition to allfeatures of the REF_PATTERNReference pattern.

3. Click Undo .

4. Edit the definition ofREF_PATTERN.

5. Click on the black dots formembers 2 and 4 to disablethose members.


7. In the model tree, right-clickREF_PATTERN and selectDelete Pattern.

8. In the model tree, right-clickOVAL_PATTERN and selectDelete Pattern. The originalinstance is still intact.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Delete and disable more patterns and pattern members.


2. Edit the definition ofROUND_REF_PATTERN.

3. Click on the top black dot foreach patterned cluster to disablethem.


5. In the model tree, right-clickROUND_REF_PATTERN andselect Delete Pattern.

6. Right-click on ROUND_1, selectDelete, and click OK from theDelete dialog box.

7. In the model tree, expandPATTERN_OF_AXIS_PATTERN.

8. Edit the definition ofAXIS_PATTERN.

9. Click on the top black dot todisable that member.


11. Edit the definition ofPATTERN_OF_AXIS_PATTERN.

12. Click on the top, bottom, left, andright center black dots to disablethose cluster members.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module16Assembling with Constraints

Module OverviewMost commercial product designs consist of numerous components.Pro/ENGINEER enables you to create an assembly, into which you canassemble multiple components. Constraints locate the components withinthe assembly, both manually and automatically. Temporary componentinterfaces can be used to quickly assemble the same component multipletimes within the assembly.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand assembly theory and create new assembly models.• Understand assembly constraint status and analyze basic componentorientation.

• Assemble components using the Default constraint and Automatic option.• Constrain components using Insert, Mate, and Align along with variousoffsets.

• Use temporary component interfaces.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Assembly TheoryAn assembly is a collection of parts and other sub-assembliesthat you bring together using constraints.

• Create assembly models from standardized templates.• Capture assembly design intent using constraints.• Create assembly constraints.

An Assembly Model that is Comprised of Parts

Understanding Assembly TheoryThere are multiple methods to assemble components using Pro/ENGINEER.Assembling components with constraints is one of the primary methods usedto create Pro/ENGINEER assemblies.Like part models, all new assembly models share several characteristics incommon. By creating your assembly models from standardized templates,you can save time by not repeatedly defining company standard information.This standard template enables all engineers to have a consistent startingpoint. After you create and name the new assembly, you can begin addingparts to the assembly. Similar to part models having design intent, assembliesalso contain design intent. Assembly design intent is based upon whichcomponent is assembled first, and the constraints that you use during theassembly process. Design intent is important because it means that yourassembly updates in a predictable manner when edited and regenerated.All characteristics that hold true for assemblies also hold true forsub-assemblies. In fact, a sub-assembly is nothing more than an assemblythat is assembled into another assembly.Pro/ENGINEER has several types of constraints, such as Mate, Align, andInsert. Use of these constraints is made easier by using the Automatic option,which enables Pro/ENGINEER to automatically determine the constraint


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

type based upon the orientation and position of the component and thereferences you select.

Every assembled component has a Placement node in the modeltree that can be expanded to view the constraints used in thatcomponent’s placement.

Assembling with component interfaces is a second method when assemblingcomponents. This method is especially useful when assembling commoncomponents because it can significantly cut the number of selections that youmake when constraining a component. By using component interfaces, yousave the referenced interfaces on the common part. Then, when you placethe common part, you only need to select the assembly references.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating New Assembly ModelsYour company can create customized templates that can beused to create new assembly models.

New Assembly Created using Template

Create new assemblies usingthe New dialog box.

Use customized assemblytemplates.

Assembly templates include:• Datums• Layers• Units• Parameters• View Orientations

Examples of Parameters

Layers Created from AssemblyTemplate

Creating New AssembliesAssemblies are composed of parts and other sub-assemblies that you bringtogether. You can create new assembly models within Pro/ENGINEER eitherby using File > New, or by clicking New . You can type the name of theassembly and choose whether you want to use a default template or atemplate at all. Unless you choose the Empty template, the new assemblydisplays in the graphics window with some sort of default datum features.

Using TemplatesNew assemblies should be created using a template. Assembly templatesare similar to part templates in that they enable you to create a new assemblywith predefined general information. Your company will likely have createdcustomized templates to be used, as they contain your company’s standards.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using a template to create a new assembly is beneficial because it meansthat regardless of who created it, the assembly contains the same consistentset of information, including:• Datums - Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and defaultcoordinate system, all named appropriately.

• Layers - When every assembly contains the same layers, management ofboth the layers and items on the layer is easier.

• Units - Most companies have a company standard for units in theirassemblies . Creating every assembly with the same set of units ensuresthat no mistakes are made.

• Parameters - Every assembly can have the same standard meta datainformation.

• View Orientations - Having every assembly contain the same standardview orientations aids the modeling process.

Creating ParametersParameters are meta data information that can be included in an assemblytemplate or created by a user in his or her own part or assembly. Parametersare important because they enable you to add additional information into partand assembly models. Parameters can have several uses:• Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be drivenby relations.

• Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, theparameter Cost might have a different value for each instance.

• Parameter values can be reported in Drawings, or viewed with datamanagement tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions.

• User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, orcomponent) or to a feature or pattern.

You can create parameters that accept the following types of values:• Real Number - Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667, 10.5E3,and PI.

• Integer - Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257.• String - Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (lettersor numbers).

• Yes/No - Accepts either the YES or NO value.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating New Assembly Models

ScenarioCreate new assembly models.

New_Assy Create New

Task 1: Create a new assembly using the default template.

1. Click File > New from the mainmenu.• Select Assembly as the Typeand Design as the Sub-type.

• Edit the Name toNEW_ASSEMBLY.

• Notice that Use defaulttemplate is selected.

• Click OK.2. Explore the default datum

features created in the graphicswindow and model tree.

3. In the model tree, click Show > Layer Tree. Notice the default layers.

4. Click Edit > Setup from the mainmenu.

5. Click Units from the menumanager. Notice the units thatare set.

6. Click Close.

7. Click Tools > Parameters from the main menu.8. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter

Value field.• Edit the value to NEW ASSEMBLY and press ENTER.• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED.• Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default Value of NO.• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to ASSY_NUMBER.• Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289.• Click OK.

9. Click Named View List . Notice the default view orientations.

10. Click Named View List again to close it.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Create a new assembly by selecting a different template.

1. Click New from the maintoolbar.• Select Assembly as the Typeand Design as the Sub-type.

• Edit the Name toSELECT_TEMPLATE.


• Click OK.2. In the New File Options

dialog box, select theinlbs_asm_design template.• Click OK.

3. Again, notice the datum features.

4. Click Edit > Setup.5. Click Units. Notice the units that

are set.6. Click Close.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Assembly Constraint StatusIdeally, when you complete a component’s placement, it shouldbe at a Fully Constrained status.

Range of assembly constraint status:• No constraints• Partially constrained– Packaged

• Fully constrained• Constraints invalid

The system can also AllowAssumptions to facilitate componentplacement.

No Constraints

Range of Assembly Constraint Status

Understanding Assembly Constraint StatusYou can assemble a component into an assembly by using placementconstraints. Constraints determine how a part is located within an assembly.As constraints are added, a component becomes further and furtherconstrained and goes through a range of constraint status, which is displayedin the dashboard. The constraint status range includes:• No constraints - No constraints have been added to the component beingassembled, as shown in the upper-right figure.

• Partially constrained - At least one constraint has been applied to thecomponent being assembled, but not enough constraints have been addedto render the component fully constrained. That is, the orientation of thecomponent can still be changed, so its position is open to interpretation.The left-most image in the lower figure shows the component partiallyconstrained. The preview color of partially constrained components islight yellow.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Fully constrained - Enough constraints have been applied to the componentbeing assembled that it cannot move. Ideally, when you complete thecomponent placement, the component should be fully constrained. Theright-most image in the lower figure is Fully Constrained. The previewcolor of fully constrained components changes from a lighter yellow toa darker yellow.

• Constraints invalid - Two constraints conflict with how they are trying toplace the component in the assembly. If this condition arises you must editor delete one or more constraints to eliminate the conflict.

Allowing AssumptionsThe Allow Assumptions option can become available when placing acomponent in an assembly. When this option is selected, the system makesadditional constraint assumptions to help fully constrain the component. If youclear this check box, the system returns the status to Partially constrained. Ifyou properly further constrain a component that is fully constrained with Allowassumptions enabled, the Allow Assumptions option will disappear and justbe Fully Constrained, as there is no longer a need for the system to makeassumptions. The middle image of the lower figure is Fully constrained aslong as the Allow Assumptions option is enabled. If the Allow assumptionscheck box is cleared, the component is no longer Fully constrained, as it canrotate. Either an additional constraint would need to be added or the AllowAssumptions check box would need to be selected.

Leaving Components PackagedIf you complete the component placement when the status reads PartiallyConstrained, the system will leave the component packaged only, and themessage window will alert you to this. You can drag components that arepackaged based on their partial constraints.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Assembling Components using the DefaultConstraintIt is standard practice to assemble the first component of anassembly using the Default constraint.

Benefits of using the Default constraint:• No references are specified.• No parent/child relationships are created.

Assembling Component usingDefault Constraint Completed Component Placement

Assembling Components using the Default Constraint TheoryThe Default constraint enables you to align the internal system-createdcoordinate system of the component to the internal system-createdcoordinate system of the assembly. The system places the component at theassembly origin, as shown in the left figure. Because the internal systemcoordinate system is used, no references are specified, and no parent-childreferences are created. It is a standard practice to assemble the initialassembly component using a Default constraint, as shown in right figure.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using theDefault Constraint

ScenarioAssemble a component using the Default constraint.

Default_Const default_const.asm

Task 1: Assemble BODY.PRT using the Default constraint.

1. Click Assemble from thefeature toolbar.

2. In the Open dialog box, selectcomponent BODY.PRT and clickOpen.

3. Notice the component is lightyellow. Notice also in thedashboard that the constraintSTATUS says No Constraints.

4. In the dashboard, select Defaultfrom the drop-down list.

5. Notice that the constraintSTATUS now says FullyConstrained.

6. Click Complete Component .7. Notice that the color is now the

actual component color.

8. View the model tree and noticethe assembled component.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Basic Component OrientationYou can reorient a component with respect to the assemblyduring placement.

Component Orientation Controls:• Drag• Spin• Pan

Panning a Component Spinning a Component

Analyzing Basic Component Orientation TheoryWhen assembling a component, you can reorient it with respect to theassembly. Reorienting the component closer to its assembly location aidsin its assembly by making it easier to select references. When you usethe Automatic option, the system is better able to determine the correctplacement constraints to use.The following types of component reorientation operations are available:

Operation Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Component Drag

+ +

Spin

+ +

Pan

+ +


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic Component Orientation

ScenarioUse component orientation controls on a component in an assembly.

Comp_Orient comp_orient.asm

Task 1: Use component placement controls on the SHAFT.PRT.


2. In the Open dialog box, selectcomponent SHAFT.PRT andclick Open.

3. Notice the component islight yellow. Also notice thecomponent orientation andlocation in the assembly.

4. Press CTRL + ALT andmiddle-click to spin thecomponent and orient itvertically.

5. Press CTRL + ALT and right-clickto pan the component and moveit to the position above the tophole in BODY.PRT.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. Click Complete Component .7. Notice that the color is now the

actual component color.8. Notice also the symbol next

to SHAFT.PRT in the modeltree. This symbol is an indicatorthat the component has beenpackaged only.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Constraint TheoryConstraints determine how a part is located in an assembly.

• Most constraints are appliedbetween parts within an assembly.– Select component reference.– Select assembly reference.

• Constraints are added one at atime.

• The active constraint is highlightedin a yellow box.

Viewing the Active Constraint

Selecting Placement References

Understanding Constraint TheoryYou can assemble components using constraints. Constraints determinehow a part is located within an assembly. There are many different types ofconstraints that you can use to assemble components.Most constraints are applied between parts within an assembly. They specifythe relative position of a pair of references. The system adds constraintsone at a time. Use placement constraints in combinations to specify bothplacement and orientation. It is important to choose your constraints basedon the design intent of your assembly, so that when you edit a dimension ona part, the assembly reacts as predicted.When you create a constraint, its references are highlighted on the modelsand the Constraint Type is displayed. For most constraints it is necessary thatyou select two references, a component reference on the component beingplaced, and an assembly reference from an item in the assembly. Whenthe first reference has been selected, a red, dashed line connects the firstselected reference to your cursor until you select the second reference.When multiple constraints are created, the active constraint is highlighted ina light yellow box. For example, in the top figure the top Insert constraint isthe active constraint. To activate a different constraint, simply select thedisplayed name or select it from the Placement tab in the dashboard. Youcan then right-click to perform a desired action.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

You can toggle Constraints To Connections in the dashboard to convertexisting connections to constraints within in an assembly.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Constraining Components using InsertUse the Insert constraint to position two revolved surfacescoaxial.

References you can select include:• Cylindrical surfaces• Conical surfaces

The Insert Constraint

Constraining Components using InsertThe Insert constraint enables you to insert one revolved surface into anotherrevolved surface, making their respective axes coaxial. For example, youcan create an Insert constraint to match a shaft to the hole, as shown in theright figure. This constraint is especially useful when axes are unavailable orinconvenient for selection. Keep in mind the Insert constraint only constrainssurfaces coaxial, and does not "slide" one component into another.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Insert

ScenarioAssemble components using the Insert constraint.

Insert_Const insert_const.asm

Task 1: Assemble the SHAFT.PRT using Insert constraints.

1. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT.Notice the constraint STATUS isNo Constraints.

2. In the dashboard, select Insertfrom the drop-down list.

3. Select the shaft on SHAFT.PRTand the hole on BODY.PRT.

4. Notice that the component snapsto its new location. Also noticethe constraint STATUS is nowPartially Constrained.

5. Click Complete Component .

Task 2: Assemble the COVER.PRT using Insert constraints.

1. Unhide COVER.PRT.2. Edit the definition of

COVER.PRT. The constraintSTATUS is Partially Constrained.

3. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Click New Constraint.• Select Insert as theConstraint Type.

4. Select one set of matchinginner hole surfaces, one onCOVER.PRT and one onBODY.PRT.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Normally you would not edit the component definition and addadditional constraints. This Procedure is performed like this soyou can fully understand the Insert constraint.

5. Press CTRL + ALT +middle-dragto spin the component out of theway.

6. In the Placement tab, click NewConstraint and click Insert .

7. Select the second set ofmatching inner hole surfaces,one on COVER.PRT and one onBODY.PRT.

8. Notice that the component snapsto its new location. Also noticethe constraint STATUS is nowFully Constrained.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Constraining Components using Mate CoincidentUse the Mate coincident constraint to position two surfaces ordatum planes coplanar and facing each other with an equivalentoffset value of zero.

References you can Mate Coincidentinclude:• Planar surfaces• Datum planes• Conical surfaces

The Mate Coincident ConstraintSelecting Two Surfaces

The Mate Coincident ConstraintSelecting Two Conical Surfaces

Constraining Components using Mate CoincidentThe Mate Coincident constraint enables you to position two planar surfacesor datum planes to lie in the same plane (coplanar), and to face each other,as shown in the upper-right figure. If datum planes are mated Coincident,their brown (positive) sides face each other. Using the Mate Coincidentconstraint, you can also select pairs of conical surfaces, which makes thesurfaces coincident and coaxial in one step, as shown in the lower-rightfigure. When components are mated Coincident to one another, it is thesame as assigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is notcreated for editing. The components can be positioned in any location aslong as their normals face each other.

Datum planes have positive and negative sides designated by color.If you rotate a model with datum planes displayed, look closely tosee that the colors are brown and gray.

If two planar surfaces are mated Coincident, you can use the ChangeConstraint Orientation option in the dashboard to convert the MateCoincident constraint into an Align Coincident constraint.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using MateCoincident

ScenarioAssemble components using the Mate coincident constraint.

Mate-Coincident mate-coincident_const.asm

Task 1: Assemble the SHAFT.PRT using a Mate coincident constraint.

1. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT.Notice the constraint STATUS isPartially Constrained.

2. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Click New Constraint.• Click Mate as theConstraint Type.

• Verify the offset is set toCoincident .

3. Select the flat surfaces onSHAFT.PRT and BODY.PRT.

4. Notice that the component snapsto its new location. Also noticethe constraint STATUS is nowFully Constrained with AllowAssumptions enabled.


Normally you would not edit the component definition and addadditional constraints. This Procedure is performed like this soyou can fully understand the Mate Coincident constraint.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Assemble ARM.PRT using a Mate coincident constraint.

1. Unhide ARM.PRT.2. Edit the definition of ARM.PRT.

The constraint STATUS is NoConstraints.

3. Reorient ARM.PRT.

4. In the dashboard, click Mateas the Constraint Type.

5. Verify that the Offset isCoincident .

6. Select the inner conical surfaceon ARM.PRT and the conicalsurface on SHAFT.PRT.

7. Notice that the component snapsto its new location. Also noticethe constraint STATUS is nowFully Constrained.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Constraining Components using AlignCoincidentUse the Align coincident constraint to position two surfaces ordatum planes coplanar and facing in the same direction with anequivalent offset value of zero.

References you can Align Coincidentinclude:• Planar surfaces• Datum axes• Datum planes• Edges• Points/Vertices

The Align Coincident ConstraintSelecting Two Datum Axes

The Align Coincident ConstraintSelecting Two Surfaces

The Align Coincident ConstraintSelecting Two Datum Planes

Constraining Components using Align CoincidentThe Align Coincident constraint enables you to make two planar surfacesor datum planes lie in the same plane (coplanar) and face in the samedirection. Align can also be used to make two axes coaxial, or two points oredges coincident, but the selected references must be of the same type, forexample, plane-to-plane, axis-to-axis, and so on. With Align constraints, thesurfaces or the brown sides of datum planes, face the same direction insteadof facing each other as when mated.When components are aligned coincident to one another, it is the same asassigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is not created for


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

editing. The components can be positioned in any location as long as theirnormals face in the same direction.

Datum planes have positive and negative sides designated by color.If you rotate a model with datum planes displayed, look closely tosee that the colors are brown and gray.

If two planar surfaces are aligned coincident, you can use the ChangeConstraint Orientation option in the dashboard to convert the Alignconstraint into a Mate constraint.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using AlignCoincident

ScenarioAssemble components using the Align coincident constraint.

Align-Coincident align-coincident_const.asm

Task 1: Select surfaces with an Align coincident constraint.

1. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT.2. Select the Mate constraint to

activate it.3. Right-click in the graphics

window and select Clear.4. Edit the constraint from Mate

to Align in the dashboard andverify the Offset is Coincident

.5. Select the flat surfaces on

SHAFT.PRT and BODY.PRT.

6. Notice that the component snapsto a new location.


Normally you would not edit the component definition and addadditional constraints. This Procedure is performed like this soyou can fully understand the Align Coincident constraint.

Task 2: Select datum planes with an Align coincident constraint.

1. Unhide ARM.PRT.

2. Click Plane Display .3. Edit the definition of ARM.PRT.

The constraint STATUS is FullyConstrained.

4. Reorient ARM.PRT to faceapproximately toward the front.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

5. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Click New Constraint.• Select Align as theConstraint Type and verify theOffset is Coincident .

6. Select datum plane TOP inARM.PRT and datum planeRIGHT in SHAFT.PRT.

7. Click Change ConstraintOrientation .

8. Click Change ConstraintOrientation again.



Task 3: Select axes with an Align coincident constraint.

1. Unhide PLATE.PRT and click Axis Display .2. Edit the definition of PLATE.PRT. The constraint STATUS is Partially

Constrained.3. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and click New

Constraint.• Select Align , and verify the Offset is Coincident .

4. Select datum axis A_1 in PLATE.PRT and datum axis A_5 inSHAFT.PRT.

5. In the dashboard, click NewConstraint, select Align , andverify the Offset is Coincident

.6. Select datum axis A_2 in

PLATE.PRT and datum axis A_4in SHAFT.PRT. The constraintSTATUS is Fully Constrained.


8. Click Axis Display .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Constraining Components using Align and MateOffsetUse Align and Mate Offset constraints to specify an offset valuebetween selected surfaces or datum planes.

References you can Align or MateOffset include:• Planar surfaces• Datum planes

The Mate Offset Constraint

The Align Offset Constraint

Constraining Components using Align and Mate OffsetThe Align and Mate Offset constraints enable you to specify an offset valuebetween selected surfaces or datum planes. The Align and Mate Offsetconstraints are the same as the Align and Mate Coincident constraints,respectively, except that the selected references can be offset from oneanother versus coplanar.When you use Align and Mate Offset, the system sets the current offsetdirection as the positive offset direction. To offset in the opposite direction,either drag the location handle to the other side of the selected Mate/Alignassembly reference or edit the offset to a negative value. The componentmoves to the opposite side, and this offset direction is now set as the positiveoffset direction. If components are Align or Mate Offset to one another withan offset value of zero, it is the same as aligning or mating Coincident,respectively, except that an offset value is available for editing. You canmanually edit the Offset option from Offset to Coincident to Oriented.If two planar surfaces are Align or Mate Offset, you can use the ChangeConstraint Orientation option in the dashboard to convert the AlignOffset constraint into a Mate Offset constraint and vice versa.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Alignand Mate Offset

ScenarioRedefine component constraints from coincident to offset.

Align_Mate-Offset align-mate-offset.asm

Task 1: Edit Mate and Align Coincident constraints to Offset.

1. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT.2. Select the Align constraint

and view the currently selectedreferences.

3. In the dashboard, edit the Offsetfrom Coincident to Offset

.4. Drag the drag handle down to an

offset value of 3, and notice theOffset value in the dashboard.

5. Edit the Offset value from 3 to -7.6. In the dashboard, click Change

Constraint Orientationto change the Align Offsetconstraint to a Mate Offsetconstraint.

7. Click Change ConstraintOrientation again.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

8. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Right-click on the Alignconstraint and select Delete.

• Click New Constraint.• Edit the constraint to Mate

and verify the Offset isCoincident .

9. Orient the assembly tothe Standard Orientationand select the surfaces onSHAFT.PRT and BODY.PRT.

10. Edit the Offset to Offset anddrag the drag handle upwards toan offset value of 2.

11. In the dashboard, click ChangeConstraint Orientationto change the Mate Offsetconstraint to an Align Offsetconstraint.

12. In the dashboard, click ChangeConstraint Orientationagain.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Constraining Components using Align and MateOrientedUse Align and Mate Oriented constraints to force selectedcomponent surfaces or datum planes into a particularorientation.

The Align Oriented Constraint

References you can Align or MateOriented include:• Planar surfaces• Datum planes

The Mate Oriented Constraint

Constraining Components using Align and Mate OrientedThe Align and Mate Oriented constraints enable you to force a selecteddatum plane or surface into a particular orientation without regard to an offsetvalue. The Align Oriented constraint forces selected surfaces or datumplanes to face in the same direction, as shown in the right figure. The MateOriented constraint forces selected surfaces or datum planes to face eachother, as shown in the left figure. The Align and Mate Oriented constraintsare similar to the Align and Mate Coincident constraints, respectively, exceptthat the selected references do not have to be coplanar.

You can use the Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboardto convert the Align Oriented constraint into a Mate Oriented constraintand vice versa.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Alignand Mate Oriented

ScenarioAdd an Align Oriented constraint to properly orient a component.

Align_Mate-Oriented align-mate-oriented.asm

Task 1: Add an Align Oriented constraint to the SHAFT.PRT.

1. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT. Notice the constraint STATUS isFully Constrained.

2. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and clear the AllowAssumptions check box. The constraint STATUS is now PartiallyConstrained.• Click New Constraint.• Edit the Constraint Type to Align and edit the Offset to Oriented

.

3. Select the flat surface onSHAFT.PRT and select the flatfront surface on BODY.PRT.

4. Notice that the SHAFT.PRT haschanged orientation and that theconstraint STATUS is again FullyConstrained.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

5. In the dashboard, click Flipto switch the Align Orientedconstraint to a Mate Orientedconstraint. Notice that theshaft has flipped its orientationdirection.

6. In the Placement tab, edit theMate constraint back to Alignin the drop-down list.

7. Click Complete Component .8. Notice that since ARM.PRT is

assembled to SHAFT.PRT, itsorientation updates accordingly.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Constraining Components using Align and MateAngleUse Align and Mate Angle constraints to specify a rotation anglebetween planes.

The Align Angle Constraint

References you can Align or MateAngle include:• Planar surfaces• Datum planes

The Mate Angle Constraint

Constraining Components using Align and Mate AngleThe Align and Mate Angle constraints enable you to specify a rotation anglebetween planes. The Align Angle and Mate Angle constraints are onlyavailable after a constraint that aligns axes or edges is created, or an Insertconstraint is created. The component then rotates about those aligned axesor edges at an Angle Offset value that you specify.

You can use the Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboardto convert the Align Angle constraint into a Mate Angle constraint and viceversa.

Depending upon where you look in the interface, the Align Angleand Mate Angle constraints are also displayed as Align and Mateconstraints with an Angle Offset specified as the Offset.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Alignand Mate Angle

ScenarioAdd an Align Angle constraint to properly orient a component.

Align_Mate-Angle align-mate-angle_const.asm

Task 1: Add an Align Angle constraint to the SHAFT.PRT.

1. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT. Notice the constraint STATUS isFully Constrained.

2. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and clear the AllowAssumptions check box. The constraint STATUS is now PartiallyConstrained.• Click New Constraint.• Edit the Constraint Type to Align and edit the Offset toCoincident .

3. Select the flat surface onSHAFT.PRT and select the flatfront surface on BODY.PRT.

4. Notice the Offset has changedautomatically to Angle Offset,there is now an angle value, andthat the constraint STATUS isagain Fully Constrained.

5. Edit the angle value to -30.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. In the dashboard, click Flipto change the Align Angleconstraint to a Mate Angleconstraint. Notice that theshaft has flipped its orientationdirection.

7. In the Placement tab, edit theMate constraint back to Alignin the drop-down list.


9. Select SHAFT.PRT, right-click,and select Edit. Notice the anglevalue is an assembly dimension.

10. Edit the angle value to 45 and

click Regenerate .

11. Select SHAFT.PRT, right-click,and select Edit.

12. Edit the angle value to -45 and

click Regenerate .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Constraining Components using the AutomaticOptionUse the Automatic option to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determinethe constraint type based on selections and componentlocation/orientation.

• The system creates constraintsbased on selections andcomponent location/orientation.

• You can manually change theconstraint type or offset options.

• You can drag partially constrainedcomponents between eachconstraint.

Orientation Can DetermineConstraint Type Created

Using the Automatic Option toCreate an Align Constraint

Using the Automatic Option toCreate a Mate Constraint

Constraining Components using the Automatic OptionWhen you assemble a component, the default Constraint Type is theAutomatic option. With the Automatic option, the system automaticallydetermines the constraint type and offset that is created when you select areference pair. The following items influence the constraint type and offsetcreated:• The references selected - The references you select can automaticallyeliminate a particular constraint type that can be created.

• The component’s location - In the upper figure, if the component is locatedabove the area it is to be assembled to when references are selected, aMate Offset constraint is created. If the component is located along the sideat approximately the same height as its desired final placement locationwhen references are selected, the system creates a Mate Coincidentconstraint.

• The component’s orientation - In the lower figures, when the component isoriented in such a way that the selected references face the same direction,


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

the system automatically creates an Align constraint. When the selectedreferences face each other the system creates a Mate constraint.

For example, you can always go back and manually edit the constraint type,from Mate to Align, or you can manually edit the offset option from Offset toCoincident.In between the creation of constraints, you can further reorient the componentto refine its position. This can help the system more accurately determinethe next constraint type and offset, or it may help you select the next setof references easier. Of course, the created constraints dictate how thecomponent moves.When you select a reference pair, the system automatically creates aconstraint. At this point, the system waits for you to select a second referencepair to create a second constraint. The system automatically keeps creatingnew constraints until the component is Fully Constrained.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using theAutomatic Option

ScenarioUse the Automatic option to assemble components.

Automatic automatic.asm

Task 1: Use the Automatic option to assemble components.


2. In the Open dialog box, selectcomponent BODY.PRT and clickOpen.

3. Right-click and select DefaultConstraint.


5. Click Assemble .6. In the Open dialog box, select

component SHAFT.PRT andclick Open.

7. Reorient SHAFT.PRTapproximately. Notice theConstraint Type is set toAutomatic.

8. Select the two surfaces to createan Insert constraint.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

9. Reorient SHAFT.PRT by pullingit up and out of BODY.PRT ifnecessary.

10. Select the two surfaces to createa Mate constraint.

11. Right-click the drag handle andselect Coincident.

12. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab and notice theInsert and Mate constraints, aswell as the Fully ConstrainedSTATUS and Allow Assumptions.


14. Click Assemble , selectCOVER.PRT, and click Open.

15. Reorient COVER.PRTapproximately. Notice theConstraint Type is set toAutomatic.


17. If necessary, right-click onthe drag handle and selectCoincident.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

18. Select the two surfaces to createan Insert constraint.

19. Right-click and select NewConstraint.

20. Select the two surfaces to createanother Insert constraint.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using Temporary Component InterfacesTemporary Component Interfaces enable you to only have toselect assembly references when assembling a component.

Temporary Component Interfaces:• Reuse component references and constraint types.• Only require selection of assembly references.• Are valid as long as the originally assembled part is in session.

First Time Component is AssembledComponent Assembled with

Temporary Component Interface

Using Temporary Component InterfacesTemporary component interfaces are used to specify the componentassembly references for a component using constraints, such as Mate, Align,and Insert. A temporary component interface is defined on the fly. Simplyassemble a component once, and then when it is assembled again, thesystem uses the previously selected component references and constraintsas a temporary interface. The temporary component interface can continueto be used as long as the part is in session. Once the part is removed fromsession, the temporary component interface is also removed. The originalpart is not changed. The ability to create temporary component interfacesrequires the create_temp_interfaces config.pro option. By default, thisoption is set to NO.

If you assemble a component that has a temporary componentinterface defined, you can always opt to assemble the componentconventionally by selecting the Place Manually option in thedashboard.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Using Temporary Component Interfaces

ScenarioAssemble multiple instances of a component using a temporary componentinterface.

Comp_Intf comp_interface.asm

Task 1: Assemble BOLT_10.PRT multiple times using a temporarycomponent interface.

1. Click Assemble .2. In the Open dialog box, select

component BOLT_10.PRT andclick Open.

3. Reorient BOLT_10.PRT.4. Select the two surfaces to create

an Insert constraint.


6. Right-click the drag handle andselect Coincident.


8. Click Assemble and clickOpen.

9. In the dashboard, noticethat Place Using Interface

is selected, and noticetemporary component interfaceTMP_INTFC001.

10. Select the cylindrical surface tocreate the Insert constraint.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. Select the flat surface to createthe Mate constraint.


13. Click Assemble and clickOpen.

14. In the dashboard, noticethat Place Using Interface

is selected, and noticetemporary component interfaceTMP_INTFC001.

15. Select the cylindrical surface tocreate the Insert constraint andselect the flat surface to createthe Mate constraint, both onCOVER_10.PRT.


17. Select the last BOLT_10.PRTand start the PatternTool from the featuretoolbar to Reference patternBOLT_10.PRT.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module17Assembling with Connections

Module OverviewMany product designs include both static and dynamic components.Pro/ENGINEER enables you to assemble dynamic components using severalconnection types.In this module, you learn how to assemble components using connectionsand how to simulate motion.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand connection theory.• Assemble components using Slider, Pin, and Cylinder connections.• Drag connected components.• Analyze collision detection settings.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Connection TheoryA mechanical connection is a method of constrainingcomponents so they form a joint. Joint connections determinehow a component can move within an assembly.

• Create mechanism connections that enable motion between componentsin an assembly.

• Joint connection examples:– Slider– Pin– Cylinder

Assembly with Connections

Understanding Connection TheoryA mechanical connection is a method of constraining components sothey form a joint. Joint connection examples include Sliders, Pins, andCylinders. Creating a Joint connection is similar to creating Assemblyconstraints between components. Joint connections enable you to createtrue-to-life connections between components so you can simulate motionbetween moving parts. For example, you can create a slider joint betweenan engine cylinder and the piston head so the piston head can translatewithin the cylinder. You can then dynamically drag components using Drag

Components to view the range of motion created by the connections.

Creating ConnectionsThe procedure to create a Joint constraint is similar to the procedure to createconstraints between fixed assembled components. Use the following methodto create a Joint constraint.• Assemble a component into the assembly.• Click the Connections list in the dashboard.• Select the connection type.• Select the appropriate references.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

You can use Constraints To Connections in the dashboard to convertexisting constraints to connections.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Assembling Components using the SliderConnectionSlider connections are used to enable translation along a singleaxis.

References (constraint rules):• Axis Alignment to enabletranslation along a singleaxis.– Use axes or cylindrical

surfaces.• Rotation Reference toconstrain rotation aroundthe axis.– Use planes or planar

surfaces.

Examples include:• Elevator doors• Piston in a cylinder

Axis Alignment

Rotation Reference

Assembling Components using the Slider ConnectionSlider connections are used to enable translation along a single axis. Forexample, an elevator door is representative of a Slider connection, as it slidesback and forth in one direction and is unable to rotate about any axis. Apiston in an engine is another example of a Slider connection. In the figures,the hedge trimmer blade is yet another example of a Slider connection.Slider connections require two constraint rules that limit their degrees offreedom in a single direction. These two constraint rules are:• Axis Alignment - The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as referencesdetermine the axis of free translation.

• Rotation Reference - The datum planes or planar surfaces you select withthe axis alignment restrict all rotational movement.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using theSlider Connection

ScenarioAssemble components using the Slider connection.

Slide_Connect slider_connection.asm

Task 1: Assemble BLADE_2.PRT using a Slider connection.

1. Orient to the 3D orientation.

2. Click Assemble from the feature toolbar.3. In the Open dialog box, select BLADE_2.PRT, and click Open.

4. In the dashboard, edit theConnection from User Definedto Slider .

5. Select datum axis A_2 onBLADE_2.PRT and datum axisA_3 on BLADE_1.PRT as theAxis alignment of the Sliderconnection.

6. Select datum plane RIGHTon BLADE_2.PRT and datumplane RIGHT on HOUSING.PRTfor the Rotation of the Sliderconnection.

7. In the dashboard, click ChangeConstraint Orientation toflip the component.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

8. Click Complete Component

9. Click Plane Display and

Axis Display to disable theirdisplay.

10. Click Drag Componentsfrom the main toolbar and selectBLADE_2.PRT.

11. Move the cursor to notice therange of motion created by theSlider connection. Click to placeBLADE_2.PRT.

12. Click Close from the Drag dialogbox.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Assembling Components using the PinConnectionPin connections are used to enable rotation along a single axiswhile constraining axial translation.

References (constraint rules):• Axis Alignment to enablerotation about a single axis.– Use axes or cylindrical

surfaces• Translation Reference toconstrain translation alongthe axis.– Use planes or planar

surfaces

Examples include:• Door hinge• Crankshaft in an engine

Axis Alignment

Translation Reference

Assembling Components using the Pin ConnectionPin connections are used to enable rotation about a single axis. For example,a hinge on a door uses a Pin connection. A crankshaft in an engine isanother example.Pin connections require two constraints (rules) that limit their degrees offreedom about a single axis. These two constraint rules are:• Axis Alignment - The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as referencesdetermine the axis of free rotation.

• Translation Reference - The datum planes or planar surfaces you selectwith the axis alignment restrict translational movement in the axis direction.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using the PinConnection

ScenarioAssemble components using the Pin connection.

Pin_Connect pin_connection.asm

Task 1: Assemble ROD_2_2.PRT using a Pin connection.

1. Click Assemble from the feature toolbar.2. In the Open dialog box, select ROD_2_2.PRT, and click Open.

3. In the dashboard, edit theConnection from User Definedto Pin .

4. Select the small hole surfaceon ROD_2_2.PRT andthe cylindrical surface onBLADE_2_2.PRT as the Axisalignment of the Pin connection.

5. Select the back side surface ofROD_2_2.PRT and the frontsurface of BLADE_2_2.PRTfor the Translation of the Pinconnection.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. Click Drag Componentsfrom the main toolbar and selectROD_2_2.PRT.

8. Move the cursor to notice therange of motion created by thePin connection. Also notice themotion of BLADE_2_2.PRT dueto the Slider connection. Click toplace ROD_2_2.PRT.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Assembling Components using the CylinderConnectionCylinder connections are used to enable rotation along a singleaxis with unconstrained axial translation.

References (constraint rules):• Axis Alignment to enable rotationabout a single axis.– Use axes or cylindrical surfaces.

Examples include:• Aligning a pen cap over a pen.• Connecting rod.– Assuming one end is defined

with a Pin connection.– Avoids overconstraining.

Axis Alignment

Assembling Components using the Cylinder ConnectionCylinder connections are used to enable both rotation and translation abouta specific axis. For example, aligning a pen cap over a pen is a Cylinderconnection. While holding the pen cap aligned with the pen, you can rotatethe pen cap and slide it along the axis of the pen.Cylinder connections require only one constraint rule that limits their degreesof freedom about a specific axis. The constraint rule is:• Axis Alignment - The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as referencesdetermine the axis of free rotation and translation.

Cylinder connections are often used in situations in which you do not want tooverconstrain a component. In the hedge trimmer example, a Pin connectionbetween the connecting rod and the blade keeps the connecting rod fromsliding in and out of the journal. As a result, a Cylinder connection is suitableto constrain the other end of the connecting rod to the crankshaft.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using theCylinder Connection

ScenarioAssemble a component using the Cylinder connection.

Cyl_Connect cylinder_connect.asm

Task 1: Redefine ROD_2_3.PRT and add a Cylinder connection.

1. Edit the definition ofROD_2_3.PRT.

2. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Click New Set.• Select the new Pin connection,and edit its type to Cylinder

.3. Select the large hole surface

on ROD_2_3.PRT and thecylindrical journal surface onCRANK_3.PRT as the Axisalignment of the Cylinderconnection.




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Dragging Connected ComponentsYou can drag assembly components through their range ofmotion based on the current connections and constraintsapplied.

• Drag components using PointDrag.

• You can create snapshots tocapture components’ positions.

Dragging Assembly Components

Viewing a Snapshot Viewing a Second Snapshot

Dragging Connected Components TheoryOne method of testing your assembly connections is to drag the assemblythrough its range of motion. To drag an assembly, click Drag Components

and then click a part model. You can select edges, points, axes, datumplanes, or surfaces to initiate the dragging movement.The components move according to the connections that have been applied.The selected entity is always positioned as close as possible to the cursorlocation while the rest of the components stay connected to each other.To quit dragging, you can either middle-click to return the components to theiroriginal position before dragging, or you can click to leave the components attheir current position. The default option when dragging components is PointDrag, shown in the upper figure, although you can also Body Drag.

Creating SnapshotsAfter you move connected components to a desired position, you can createsnapshots of that particular location in the graphics window. Snapshotsenable you to return the assembly components to a particular position. You


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

can create multiple snapshots and quickly move the assembly to specificpositions by activating each snapshot.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Dragging Connected ComponentsScenarioDrag connected components and take snapshots.

Drag_Comps dragging_comps.asm

Task 1: Drag connected components.

1. Click Drag Componentsfrom the main toolbar andselect the lower-right corner ofCRANK.PRT.

2. Move the cursor in a circularmotion to see the motion createdby the connections.

3. Click to stop the motion.

Task 2: Create snapshots while dragging components..

1. In the Drag dialog box, expandthe Snapshots area.

2. Click on the corner ofCRANK.PRT and move theconnected components untilROD_2.PRT is fully extended tothe left. Click again to stop themotion.

3. In the Drag dialog box, click

Take Snapshot

4. Click on the corner ofCRANK.PRT again and movethe connected components untilROD_2.PRT is fully extended tothe right. Click again to stop themotion.

5. In the Drag dialog box, click

Take Snapshot

6. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot1 to activate it. Noticethat ROD_2.PRT is fully extended to the left.

7. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot2 to activate it. Noticethat ROD_2.PRT is fully extended to the right.

8. Click Close from the Drag dialog box.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Collision Detection SettingsCollision Detection enables you to check for interferencesbetween parts while dragging them.

• Global Collision Detection• Partial Collision Detection• Areas of interference display red• Ring message bell when colliding

Areas of Interference WhileDragging

Interference Fixed

Analyzing Collision Detection SettingsPro/ENGINEER has real-time collision detection, enabling you to check forinterferences between parts as you drag a mechanism assembly throughits range of motion. Collision detection, by default, is turned off when youdrag components in a mechanism assembly. However, you can enable twodifferent types of collision detection:• Global Collision Detection - Checks for any kind of collision in the entireassembly.

• Partial Collision Detection - You specify the components between which tocheck for interference.

There is also an option to ring the Message Bell when a collision occursbetween components. The component areas that interfere with each otherdisplay in red, as shown in the upper figure. You can then fix the interferencesby modifying the models. In the lower figure, the housing has been modifiedso the connecting rod no longer interferes.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Collision Detection Settings

ScenarioAnalyzing collision detection settings.

Collision_Detect collision_detect.asm

Task 1: Analyze an assembly for interference by dragging its components.

1. Select HOUSING.PRT andclick View > Display Style >Transparent.

2. Orient to the 3D2 vieworientation.

3. Zoom in on HOUSING.PRT.

4. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Collision Detection Settingsfrom the main menu.

5. In the Collision Detection Settings dialog box, select the GlobalCollision Detection option and verify that the Ring Message Bellwhen Colliding check box is selected.• Click OK.

6. Click Drag Componentsand drag the componentsby selecting the hex-shapedgeometry.

7. Notice the highlighted interferinggeometry and hear the MessageBell. The HOUSING.PRT is tooshort. Click Close from the Dragdialog box.

8. Select HOUSING.PRT, right-click, and select Activate.9. In the graphics window, right-click to query and select Extrude 1.

Right-click and select Edit.

10. Edit the 51 dimension to 56 and click Regenerate .11. Activate COLLISION_DETECT.ASM.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

12. Click Drag Componentsand drag the componentsby selecting the hex-shapedgeometry again. There isno longer a collision, as theinterference has been fixed.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module18Exploding Assemblies

Module OverviewExplode states enable you to capture assembly parts in various states ofassembly/disassembly. These states can be easily referenced when creatingdrawings and assembly/disassembly procedures.In this module, you learn how to create assembly explode states and createoffset lines between exploded components.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create and manage explode states.• Create offset lines between exploded components.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating and Managing Explode StatesExplode states enable you to easily save assembly/disassemblyviews.

Explode states can be used indrawings.Creating exploded states:• Position components into desiredlocation.– Select motion type– Select motion reference

• Toggle between exploded andunexploded states.

Unexploded Assembly Exploded Assembly

Creating and Managing Explode States TheoryYou can use explode states to quickly reposition components in 3-D space,and save these assembly/disassembly views using the view managerExplode tab. Explode states can be selected when placing a drawing viewor they can be used to create assembly/disassembly procedures. You cantoggle an explode state on or off, and you can create multiple explode states.

Specifying the Motion Type and ReferenceBefore you can explode components from an assembly, you must specify theMotion Type and Motion Reference.• Motion Type - Specify the type of motion that a selected component willfollow. Motion types include:– Translate - Linearly moves the selected component. This is the default

motion type.– Copy Pos - Copies the exploded position of the selected component.– Default Expld - Places the selected component in a default explode

position.– Reset - Resets the placement location of the selected component.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Motion Reference - Specifies the reference type to define the direction ofmotion of the selected component. Available reference types include:– View Plane - A component explodes parallel to the screen in assembly’s

current orientation.– Sel Plane - A component explodes in the 2-D orientation of the selected

planar surface.– Entity/Edge - A component explodes along the selected entity or edge.– Plane Normal - A component explodes normal to the selected planar

surface.– 2 Points - A component explodes along the imaginary line that connects

two selected points or vertices.– Csys - A component explodes along the X, Y, or Z-axis of the selected

coordinate system. You must specify the desired axis.

Exploding ComponentsOnce the Motion Type and Motion Reference have been defined, you canselect the component you wish to explode. There are three move optionsavailable:• Move One - Move a single component or query in an assembly orsub-assembly.

• Move Many - Press CTRL and select multiple components to move themall at once.

• Move With Children - Select a single component and move it along withits children.

You can also specify the Motion Increment of the component you areexploding. The default Motion Increment Translation is Smooth, meaningthat the components will explode smoothly and you can drop them at anyrelative position. You can also increment values of 1, 5, or 10 from thedrop-down list, or you can type in your own increment value. The incrementvalue is in the same units as the assembly. For example, if the assemblyunits are millimeters, then for an increment value of 10, the component willexplode in 10 millimeter increments, snapping to each increment.

Additional Explode State FactsWhen using the explode functionality, keep in mind the following:• If you explode a sub-assembly in the context of a higher-level assembly,the system does not explode the components in the sub-assembly.

• You do not lose the explode state when you unexplode an assembly. Thesystem retains the information so the components have the same explodeposition if you explode again.

• All assemblies have a Default explode state, which the system createsautomatically from the defined component placement constraints.

• Multiple occurrences of the same sub-assembly can have different explodestates.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing Explode States

ScenarioCreate and manage explode states.

Explode_States explode.asm

Task 1: Create explode state Exp0001.

1. Click View Manager fromthe main toolbar.

2. In the View Manager dialog box,select the Explode tab.• Click New and press ENTERto accept the default name.Notice the note in the graphicswindow.

• Click Close.

3. Click View > Explode > Edit Position from the main menu.4. Select datum axis A_1 as the Motion Reference.

5. Click Axis Display to disable their display.

6. Select SHAFT.PRT and dragupwards to explode it. Click toplace SHAFT.PRT.

7. Select ARM.PRT and dragupwards to explode it. Click toplace ARM.PRT.

8. In the Explode Position dialogbox, click Preferences, selectMove With Children, and clickClose.

9. Select COVER.PRT anddrag upwards. Click to placeCOVER.PRT. Notice that thebolts explode with it.

10. Select the pattern leaderBOLT.PRT and drag upwards toexplode all three bolt members.Click to place the bolt members.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. In the Explode Position dialogbox, select Plane Normal fromthe Motion Reference drop-downlist.

12. Select the front, planar surfaceof BODY.PRT as the MotionReference.

13. Select PLATE.PRT and dragto the left. Click to placePLATE.PRT. Notice that thebolts explode with it.

14. In the Explode Position dialogbox, click Preferences, selectMove Many, and click Close.

15. Press CTRL, select bothBOLT.PRT members, and clickOK from the Select dialog box.

16. Click in the graphics window anddrag both bolts to the left. Clickto place the bolts.

17. Click OK from the ExplodePosition dialog box.

18. Click View Manager ,right-click Exp0001, and selectSave.

19. Click OK from the Save DisplayElements dialog box.

20. Right-click Exp0001 andde-select Explode.

21. Click Close.22. Click View > Explode > Explode

View.23. Click View > Explode >

Unexplode View.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Offset Lines Between ExplodedComponentsOffset lines are used to denote how exploded components alignwhen the assembly is unexploded.

Specify references on twocomponents:• Axis• Surface Norm• Edge/CurveModify offset lines:• Move• Add/Delete Jogs

Unexploded Assembly Offset Lines in Exploded Assembly

Creating Offset Lines Between Exploded Components TheoryYou can create offset lines to show how exploded components align whenthe assembly is unexploded. Offset lines automatically update to changesin position made to the exploded components they reference. Creating newoffset lines or editing existing offset lines causes the explode state to bemodified, and you can save the modified explode state in the view managerExplode tab.

Creating Offset LinesYou can create an offset line in an explode state by specifying a reference ontwo different components. The offset line is created between the two selectedreferences and also displays in the model tree. There are three differenttypes of references that can be specified:• Axis - Select either datum axes or rounded surfaces. The axis referencetype allows for axis and hole type component insertions.

• Surface Norm - Select a planar surface or datum plane. The offset line iscreated normal to this surface at the location selected on the surface.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Edge/Curve - Select an edge or curve on a component. The offset line iscreated along the edge or curve.

Modifying Offset LinesYou can modify existing offset lines by clicking View > Explode > OffsetLines > Modify from the main menu. You can either move an offset line oryou can create jogs in the offset line.• Move - You can extend the ends of an offset line or move line segments thatextend to a jog. You can also move existing jogs by selecting the jog point.

• Add Jogs - Select the offset line location where you want to create the jogand drag the jog to its desired location. You can delete the jog by selectingthe jog point.

Deleting Offset LinesYou can delete offset lines by clicking View > Explode > Offset Lines >Delete from the main menu. As you select each offset line, it is deleted fromthe graphics window and model tree.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Lines Between ExplodedComponents

ScenarioCreate offset lines between exploded components.

Offset_Lines offset_lines.asm

Task 1: Create offset lines between exploded components.

1. Start the View Managerfrom the main toolbar.

2. In the View Manager dialog box,select the Explode tab.• Right-click Exp0001 andselect Explode.

• Notice the note in the graphicswindow.

• Leave the view manager open.

3. Click View > Explode > OffsetLines > Create from the mainmenu.

4. Verify that Axis is the entity typein the menu manager.

5. Select the surfaces onCOVER_2.PRT andARM_2.PRT to create theoffset line.

6. Select the inner bolt surface onCOVER_2.PRT and the outersurface on the correspondingBOLT_2.PRT to create the offsetline.

7. Create offset lines for the othertwo BOLT_2.PRT components.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

8. Select the inner hole surface onCOVER_2.PRT and the outersurface on the SHAFT_2.PRTtip to create the offset line.

9. Select the inner hole surfaceon BODY_2.PRT and the outersurface on SHAFT_2.PRT tocreate the offset line.

10. Select the upper bolt holesurface on PLATE_2.PRT andthe corresponding outer surfaceon BOLT_2.PRT to create theoffset line.

11. Create another offset line for thesecond plate bolt.

12. Select the inner surface ofBODY_2.PRT and click SurfaceNorm from the menu manager.

13. Query select the back surface ofPLATE_2.PRT in approximatelythe center.

14. Click Quit from the menumanager.

15. In the view manager, right-clickExp0001, select Save, and clickOK.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module19Creating Drawing Views

Module OverviewDrawings are used for documenting the production design of partsand assembly models. They typically contain two-dimensional andthree-dimensional model views, as well as dimensions, notes, and Billsof Materials. Drawings are frequently used in the manufacture of productdesigns. This module focuses on the creation of drawings and the placingof drawing views.There are two methods for creating drawings. In the first method, youmanually place views onto a drawing. In the second method, you use adrawing template to automatically populate the drawing with predefinedinformation. Typically, a combination of these methods is used: manuallyplacing views on drawings that were started using a drawing template.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Analyze drawing concepts and theory, as well as basic 2-D orientation skills.• Create new drawings manually and apply formats.• Create new drawings using drawing templates.• Add drawing models and drawing sheets to a drawing.• Create, orient, and modify drawing views including general, projection,detailed, and auxiliary.

• Create assembly and exploded views as well as cross-section views.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Drawing Concepts and TheoryA drawing is often the final deliverable at a company andcontains parametric 2-D or 3-D views of a 3-D model.

A drawing usually contains at least:• Model views.• Dimensions.• Title block.

A drawing is bi-directional.

Example of a Model

Example of a Drawing

Analyzing Drawing Concepts and TheoryOnce a part or assembly has been modeled, it is usually necessary todocument that part or assembly by creating a 2-D drawing of it. Often,a 2-D drawing is the final deliverable at a company. The 2-D drawingusually contains parametric 2-D or 3-D views of the 3-D part or assembly,dimensions, and a title block. The drawing may also contain notes, tables,and further design information. Not every company requires that a drawingbe created of a model.A drawing is bi-directional. If a change is made to a model, a drawing thatdisplays that model automatically updates to reflect that change. Conversely,if a change is made to a model in the drawing, the model automaticallyupdates as well.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Basic 2-D OrientationManipulate the 2-D orientation of your drawings in thePro/ENGINEER Wildfire graphics window.

Keyboard/Mouse Orientation:• Pan• Zoom• Wheel Zoom

Additional Orientation Options:• Refit• Navigate Sheets

Viewing a Drawing Sheet

Zooming in on a Drawing View Zooming in on the Title Block

Orientation using Keyboard and Mouse CombinationsTo view specific areas of a drawing, you can pan and zoom the drawing usinga combination of keyboard and mouse functions, as shown in the followingtable.


Pan

Zoom

+

Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function usesthe cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scrollwheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using thescroll wheel, as shown in the following table:


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Zoom Level Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Zoom

Fine Zoom

+

Coarse Zoom

+

Additional Orientation OptionsIn addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the followingadditional drawing 2-D orientation options are available:

• Refit — Refits the entire drawing sheet in the graphics window.

• Navigate Sheets — Enables you to change drawing sheets in amulti-sheet drawing. This option is grayed out if a drawing contains onlyone sheet. Click the up and down arrows to navigate drawing sheetssequentially, or type the sheet number and press ENTER to navigatedirectly to that sheet. Often your company’s title block will display thedrawing sheet number in a multi-sheet drawing, as shown in the lower-rightfigure.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic 2-D Orientation

ScenarioUse basic 2-D orientation on a drawing.

2D_Orientation 2D_orientation.drw

Task 1: Use basic 2-D orientation manipulations on a drawing.

1. Use the mouse wheel to zoom inon the drawing title block.

2. Middle-click and drag to pan the drawing.

3. Click Refit from the main toolbar.

4. Place the cursor at the centerof the 3-D drawing view, pressCTRL and middle-drag down tozoom in.

5. Press CTRL and middle-drag upto zoom out.

6. Place your cursor on anotherdrawing view, press CTRL, andmiddle-drag down to zoom in onthat view.

7. Press CTRL and middle-drag upto zoom out.

8. Zoom in and out on various otherviews using the mouse wheel.

9. Click Refit .

10. Click Navigate Sheetsfrom the drawing toolbar tonavigate to sheet 2.

11. Use the mouse wheel to zoomin and out on various drawingviews.

12. Press CTRL and middle-dragdown and up to zoom in and outof various drawing views.

13. Click Refit .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


15. Use the mouse wheel to zoomin and out on various drawingviews.

16. Press CTRL and middle-dragdown and up to zoom in and outof various drawing views.

17. Click Refit .




For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating New Drawings and Applying FormatsYour company can create customized formats that can be usedin new drawings.

Empty Drawing

Create new drawings usingthe New dialog box.• Specify the Default Model.• Specify orientation.• Specify size.• Specify format (optional).

A Format:• Contains 2-D items.• Is created in Format mode.• Is applied to a drawing.

Add or change formats usingFile > Page Setup.

Drawing with Format

Creating New Drawings TheoryYou can create new drawings within Pro/ENGINEER either by using File >New, or by clicking New and then editing the drawing name. You mustalso specify whether to use a default template. This topic focuses on drawingcreation when a default template is not used.You must specify the Default Model to be used in the drawing. The DefaultModel is the model that is used in your drawing when you start placing views.You can add additional models to the drawing at a later time. If you havemodels open in Pro/ENGINEER when a new drawing is created, the modelthat is in the active window at the time of drawing creation is automatically setas the Default Model.You must also specify the drawing Orientation, whether Portrait, Landscape,or Variable. If you select Portrait or Landscape, you can choose betweennumerous standard, predefined drawing sizes. If you select Variable, youmust specify the desired drawing size width and height, in units of eitherinches or millimeters. A C size drawing is shown in the upper figure.

Using Drawing FormatsWhen creating a new drawing you must also decide whether a format is to beused in the new drawing. A drawing format contains 2-D items that typically


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

include boundary lines, referencing marks, tables, and text. A format has anextension of *.frm, and is created in Format mode. A format is then appliedto a drawing. Your company will likely have created customized formatsto be used, as they typically contain your company’s logo, title block, andtolerancing standards. In the lower figure, a C size drawing is shown with aformat having been applied.

If you specify a format during drawing creation you do not specifyan orientation or size, as these parameters are determined duringformat creation and carry into the drawing.

Adding and Changing FormatsYou can decide whether to add a format at the time of drawing creation orat a later time. To add a format to a drawing after the drawing has beencreated, you can either click File > Page Setup or you can double-click thedrawing size that is displayed along the bottom of the graphics window. Youcan then select your desired format, or replace an existing format with adifferent format.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating New Drawings and ApplyingFormats

ScenarioCreate a new drawing and apply different formats to it.

Applying_Formats Create New

Task 1: Create a new drawing and apply different formats to it.

1. Click New from the main toolbar.• In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type.• Edit the Name to NEW_DRAWING.• Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.

2. In the New Drawing dialog box,click Browse to specify theDefault Model.• Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRTand click Open.

• Edit the Standard Size to A inthe drop-down list.

• Click OK.

3. Notice the text below the sheet that displays the drawing scale, type,name, and drawing size.

4. Click File > Page Setup from the main menu.5. In the Page Setup dialog box, edit the Format from A Size to C Size

in the drop-down list.• Click OK.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. Click File > Page Setup.7. In the Page Setup dialog box,

click theCSize format to activatethe field. Click Browse from thedrop-down list.• In the Open dialog box, noticethat the location has defaultedto System Formats. Selectb.frm and click Open.

• Click OK.8. Notice that the text at the bottom

has updated again. Also noticethe new, empty format.

9. Click File > Page Setup.10. In the Page Setup dialog box,

click the B format to activate thefield. Click Browse from thedrop-down list.• In the Open dialog box, clickWorking Directory.

• Select c_format_generic.frmand click Open.

• Click OK.

11. In the message window, typeyour first initial, followed by yoursurname, and press ENTER.

12. Notice that the text at the bottomhas updated again. Also noticethe new format which contains aborder and title block.

13. Zoom in on the title block.

14. Click Refit .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating New Drawings using Drawing TemplatesDrawing templates work in conjunction with the model’s savedviews to automatically populate default drawing views.

Example of a Drawing Template

Drawing Templates arecustomizable:• Create templates that complete amajority of the initial drawing.

• Additional items can be added todrawing templates.– Other views– View options– Drawing formats– Drawing options

Drawing Created using Template

Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates TheoryLike part and assembly templates, a drawing template provides you with astarting point to create your drawings. You use drawing templates when youwant to create a standardized drawing. Drawing templates can automaticallycreate views, set the desired view display and view options, display formats,and show model dimensions based on the template. You can configurePro/ENGINEER to use a default drawing template when creating a newdrawing, or you can select a different one. A drawing template is shownin the upper figure, while a drawing created using the drawing templateis shown in the lower figure.Drawing templates contain three basic types of information for creating newdrawings:1. The first type is basic information that makes up a drawing but is not

dependent on the drawing model, such as sheet size, notes, symbols,formats, and so forth. This information is copied from the template intothe new drawing.

2. The second type is representative “view symbols,” which contain theoptions used to configure drawing views and the actions that areperformed on that view. The instructions in the template are used to


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

build a new drawing that references a model to place various views inspecific orientations and view states.

3. The third type is a parametric note. Parametric notes are notes thatupdate to new drawing model parameters and dimension values. Whena drawing is created from a template, the parametric notes update withthe proper information from the models used in the drawing.

Drawing Template UsesYou can use drawing templates to define the layout of views, set view display,define tables, place symbols and notes, show dimensions, and create snaplines. A drawing template can also be customized with your company formatsand standards. This enables you to automatically create drawings in afraction of the time it would take to sketch them.For example, you can create a template for a machined part versus a castpart. The machined part template could define the views that are typicallyplaced for machined part drawings, set the view display of each view (forexample, show hidden lines), place company standard machining notes, andautomatically create snap lines for placing dimensions.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating New Drawings using DrawingTemplatesScenarioCreate a new drawing using a drawing template.

Drawing_Templates cylinder_bracket.prt

Task 1: Create a new drawing using the DRAWING_TEMPLATE.DRWtemplate.

1. RotateCYLINDER_BRACKET.PRTto familiarize yourself with itsshape.

2. Click Window > Close.

3. Click New from the main toolbar.• In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type.• Edit the Name to NEW_DRAWING.• Verify that the Use default template check box is selected.• Click OK.

4. In the New Drawing dialog box,notice that the Default Modelis CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRTbecause it is still in session.You could browse and specify adifferent Default Model.

5. Notice the Template specifiedis drawing_template, as this isthe configured default template.

6. Click OK from the New Drawingdialog box.


8. Zoom in on the title block.9. Pan to the different drawing

views, zooming in and out asdesired.

10. Click Refit .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating and Orienting General ViewsA general view is usually the first view of a series to be created.

Edit the following attributes whencreating or editing general views:• View name• View type• View orientation– Model view name

General View Type

Another General View Type

Creating and Orienting General ViewsWhen you create a drawing, the first view added to a drawing is a generalview. A general view is usually the first of a series of views to be created.When you create or edit a general view in a drawing, the Drawing View dialogbox appears displaying the View Type category.You can edit the following attributes of a general view in the View Typecategory:• View name - The view name appears when you cursor over the view. Italso displays in the Layer tree when selecting the active layer object.

• View type - If there is more than one general view on the drawing, you canedit the view type from general to a different view type. This option is onlyavailable when editing an existing general drawing view.

• View orientation - Determines the orientation of the view in the drawing.You can set the view orientation using model view names that are createdin the model itself. These are the same model views that are found in themodel’s saved view list and view manager. A general view can be placed inany orientation.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating and Orienting General Views

ScenarioCreate and orient general views.

General_Views general_views.drw

Task 1: Create a 2-D general view.

1. Right-click in the drawing andselect Insert General View.

2. Click in the middle of the drawingto place the view.

3. In the Drawing View dialog box,edit the name to shaft_side.

4. Notice the default view of themodel. Also notice the modelviews available in the DrawingView dialog box.

5. In the Drawing View dialogbox, select model view nameFRONT, and click Apply.• Click model view name LEFTand click Apply.

• Click model view name RIGHTand click OK.

6. De-select the shaft_side view.

Task 2: Create a 3-D general view.

1. Right-click in the drawing andselect Insert General View.

2. Click in the upper-right of thedrawing to place the view.

3. In the Drawing View dialog box,edit the name to shaft_default.

4. Notice the model views availablein the Drawing View dialog box.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

5. In the Drawing View dialog box,select model view name 3D, andclick Apply.

6. In the Drawing View dialog box,select model view name DefaultOrientation, and click OK.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Adding Drawing Models and SheetsA drawing can contain multiple sheets and views of multipledrawing models.

Drawing Models:• Add/Delete models.• Set/Switch active model.

Drawing Sheets:• Add/Delete sheets.• Move sheets.

Different Models on DifferentDrawing Sheets

The Move Sheet Dialog Box Menu Manager

Adding Drawing Models TheoryWhen you create a drawing you typically specify the drawing model to beused in the drawing. Views placed in the drawing are of this specified drawingmodel. However, you can add additional drawing models to the drawing. Thisallows drawing views and information from multiple models to be captured ina single drawing.The system adds information to the drawing from the active model. The activemodel is displayed at the bottom of the graphics window. You can switch

between drawing models and set the active one using the Set Model iconfrom the drawing toolbar through the menu manager, or by right-clicking aview of a drawing model that is not the active model and selecting Set AsActive Model. The lower-right figure displays the menu manager, whichallows you to set the active model.You can also delete drawing models from the drawing through the viewmanager, as shown in the lower-right figure. You can only delete a drawingmodel if there are no views using it.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Adding Drawing Sheets TheoryEvery drawing has at minimum one sheet. You can insert additional sheetsinto your drawing using Insert > Sheet from the main menu. If your companyhas set up drawing title blocks that insert the model name, ensure that youfirst set the desired active model before inserting a new sheet. You may insertadditional drawing sheets because you need more space in the drawing toplace views or because your company standards require different sheets tohave different views.A new sheet is inserted after the currently active drawing sheet. For example,if sheet 2 of 6 is the currently active sheet when you insert a new sheet, thenew sheet will be inserted as sheet 3 of 7. You can also move the orderof the drawing sheets using Edit > Move Sheet from the main menu. Thesheet that is moved is the currently active sheet when this menu selection ismade. The Move Sheet dialog box is shown in the lower-left figure. Withinthis dialog box you select the sheet that you want the active sheet to become.For example, if you want to move sheet 1 to sheet 2, you would navigate tosheet 1, invoke sheet movement, and select Sheet 2 from the Move sheetdialog box. Sheet 2 now becomes sheet 1.You can also delete a sheet by clicking Edit > Remove > Sheets from themain menu and typing the sheet number you want to delete from the drawing.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Adding Drawing Models and Sheets

ScenarioAdd drawing models and sheets to a drawing.

Drw_Models_Sheets drw_models_sheets.drw

Task 1: Add the CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT to the drawing.

1. At the bottom of the graphics window, notice that SHAFT is the activewindow

2. Click File > Properties from the main menu.3. In the menu manager, click Drawing Models > Add Model.4. Select CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT and click Open. At the bottom

of the graphics window notice that CYLINDER_BRACKET is nowthe active model.

5. Click Insert > Sheet from themain menu.

6. In the message window, typeyour first initial, followed by yoursurname, and press ENTER.Sheet number 2 is added to thedrawing. Notice the model namein the title block.

7. Right-click and select InsertGeneral View.

8. Click in the drawing to place thegeneral view.

9. In the Drawing View dialog box,select FRONT as the model viewname and click OK.

Task 2: Add the ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT to the drawing.

1. Click File > Properties.2. In the menu manager, click Drawing Models > Add Model.3. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT and click Open. At the bottom of the

graphics window notice that ANGLE_GUIDE is now the active model.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

4. Click Insert > Sheet from themain menu.

5. In the message window, typeyour first initial, followed by yoursurname, and press ENTER.Sheet number 3 is added to thedrawing. Notice the model namein the title block.


7. Click in the drawing to place thegeneral view and click OK.

8. Click File > Properties.9. In the menu manager, click Drawing Models > Set Model > SHAFT.10. The SHAFT is now the active model.

11. Click Set Model from the drawing toolbar and selectCYLINDER_BRACKET.

Task 3: Switch the drawing sheet order.

1. Click Change Sheetfrom the drawing toolbar tonavigate to Sheet 1.

2. Click Edit > Move Sheet fromthe main menu.

3. In the Move Sheet dialog box,select Sheet 3 as the sheet tobecome and click OK.

4. Click Change Sheetfrom the drawing toolbarto navigate to Sheet 1.This sheet is now of theCYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Projection ViewsA Projection view Is an orthographic projection of another view’sgeometry along a horizontal or vertical direction from the parentview.

Projected view characteristics:• Child of view it is projected from• Orientation is 90° from parent view• Third angle or First angle

Example Projected Top View

Example Projected Left View Example General View

Creating Projection Views TheoryA Projection view is an orthographic projection of another view’s geometryalong a horizontal or vertical direction from the parent view. The orientationof the projection view is always 90° from the parent view, and its scale isdependent on the parent view. If the orientation of the parent view is updated,the orientation of the child projection views also updates.You can either insert projection views using Insert > Drawing View >Projection in the main menu or by using the right-click options. In eithercase, you must specify the parent view from which the projection viewprojects. When you create a projection view it is given a default name that isbased on the direction of projection.The default projection type for projection views is third angle. If desired, theprojection type can be changed to first angle.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Projection Views

ScenarioCreate projection views in a drawing.

Projection_Views projection_views.drw

Task 1: Create two projection views on sheet 1.

1. Click Insert > Drawing View >Projection from the main menu.

2. Select new_view_21, move thecursor above new_view_21, andclick to place the new projectionview. Notice the yellow rectanglethat snaps to your cursor untilyou click to place the view.

3. Select new_view_21, right-click,and select Insert ProjectionView.

4. Move the cursor to the right ofnew_view_21 and click to placethe new projection view.

Task 2: Create two projection views on sheet 2.

1. Click Change Sheetfrom the drawing toolbar andnavigate to sheet 2.


3. Move the cursor to the left ofnew_view_23 and click to placethe new projection view.


5. Move the cursor belownew_view_23 and click toplace the second new projectionview.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 3: Create three projection views on sheet 3.

1. Click Change Sheetfrom the drawing toolbar andnavigate to sheet 3.

2. Select shaft_side, right-click,and select Insert ProjectionView.

3. Move the cursor aboveshaft_side and click to place thenew projection view.


5. Move the cursor to the left ofshaft_side and click to place thesecond new projection view.


7. Move the cursor to the right ofshaft_side and click to place thethird new projection view.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Modifying Drawing ViewsYou can perform many operations on a drawing view to changeits display.

Modifying View Properties

Operations include:• Move the view.– Lock view movement

• Delete views.– Child views

• Modify properties.– Scale– View display

• Edit the sheet scale.

Editing the Sheet Scale Deleting Child Views

Modifying Drawing Views TheoryWhen a view is placed on a drawing, there are a variety of operations thatcan be performed to change how the view displays. In most cases, you canmodify a view that has already been placed on a drawing. The following aredifferent types of operations that can be performed on views in a drawing.

Moving ViewsBy default, when views are placed on a drawing they cannot be moved. Theyare locked to the drawing. You can unlock drawing views for movement inthe drawing either by toggling Lock View Movement from the drawingtoolbar or by selecting a view, right-clicking, and toggling the Lock ViewMovement option. The toggle for locking view movement is a system settingrather than an individual drawing view setting. If one view is unlocked, allviews are unlocked. Once your views have been moved to their locations,it may be desired to lock the view movement again so they cannot beaccidentally moved when adding other entities such as dimensions or notes.Once views are unlocked, a drawing view can be moved according to anyparent/child relationships that exist between views. Since a general view hasno parent views, it can be moved anywhere on the drawing. When a general


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

view is moved, any child views move accordingly. A child view, on the otherhand, can only move according to the angle of projection from the parent view.

Deleting ViewsYou can delete views from a drawing. All items associated with the deleteddrawing view including child views are also deleted. For example, if youdelete a general view that has three child projection views, the child projectionviews must also be deleted. The system highlights child views that are to bedeleted, as shown in the lower-right figure.

Modifying Drawing View PropertiesThe following are two types of drawing view properties that can be modified:• Scale - Is modified in the Scale category of the Drawing View dialog box.In most cases, the scale of a placed view is specified as the default scalefor the sheet, or the sheet scale. You can also define a custom scale for adrawing view that makes it larger or smaller than the defined sheet scale. Ifa custom scale is defined, it is listed under the drawing view, as shown inthe upper figure. Note that for some drawing views, such as a projectionview, you cannot specify a custom scale because the drawing view scaleis dependent upon its parent view.

• View Display - Is modified in the View Display category of the Drawing Viewdialog box. Three view display options that can be modified include:– Display style - Controls the display of the entire view. Options include

Follow Environment, Wireframe, Hidden, No Hidden, and Shading. TheFollow Environment display style may vary from company to companydepending upon how the default display style is defined. In the upperfigure, the display style was edited from No Hidden to Shading.

– Tangent edges display style - You can define how tangent edges displaywithin the drawing. Options include Default, None, Solid, Dimmed,Centerline, and Phantom.

– Colors come from - For display styles other than shading, you can definewhere the colors for the drawing view geometry lines come from. Thedefault option is that the colors are defined based on the drawing. Youcan specify that the colors come from how they are defined in the model.

Editing the Sheet ScaleYou can also edit the sheet scale at the bottom of the graphics window. Thesheet scale value edits the scale of the active model only. When you edit thesheet scale of the active model, any drawing views of that active model onthat sheet update their scale based on the new value. In the lower-left figure,the sheet scale was increased from 1 to 1.75.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Modifying Drawing Views

ScenarioModify views in a drawing.

Modifying_Views modifying_views.drw

Task 1: Modify the views on sheet 1 of a drawing.

1. Select the front general viewnew_view_7, right-click,and de-select Lock ViewMovement.

2. With new_view_7 still selected,click and drag new_view_7down and to the left. Notice thatthe two projection view childrenmove along with the generalview parent.

3. With the general view stillselected, press CTRL and selectthe two projection views.

4. Right-click and selectProperties.

5. In the Drawing View dialog box,edit the Display Style to Hiddenand click OK.


1. Click Change Sheet and navigate to sheet 2.

2. Click Set Model and select ANGLE_GUIDE.3. In the bottom left of the graphics window, double-click the scale, edit

it to 1.25, and press ENTER.

4. Press CTRL and select the two2-D views.

5. Right-click and selectProperties.

6. In the Drawing View dialog box,edit the Tangent edges displaystyle to Phantom and click OK.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. Select 3-D view new_view_4,right-click, and selectProperties.

8. In the Drawing View dialogbox, select the View Displaycategory, edit the Display Styleto Shading, and click OK.


1. Click Change Sheetand navigate to sheet 3.

2. Select upper view top_13 andmove it further up in the drawing.

3. Select general 2-D viewnew_view_12, right-click, andselect Delete. The three childprojection views highlight inpurple boxes.

4. Click Yes from the Confirmationdialog box.

5. Click Undo .

6. Select the 3-D general viewnew_view_17, right-click, andselect Properties.

7. In the Drawing View dialog box,select the Scale category, selectthe Custom scale option, editthe value to 2, and click Apply.

8. In the Drawing View dialogbox, select the View Displaycategory, edit the Display styleto Shading and click OK.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Assembly and Exploded ViewsYou can create a drawing that displays assembly views. You canfurther modify an assembly view to display it in an explodedstate.

• Make an assembly the activemodel to create assembly views.– All components included.

• Display an assembly view in anexploded state.– Views reference 3-D model

explode states.– Explode states can be edited

from the drawing.– Explode lines can be shown.

Assembly View Exploded Assembly View

Creating Assembly ViewsSimilar to creating part drawings, you can also create assembly drawingsthat display assembly views. When creating a new drawing, simply makean assembly the default model or add it as a drawing model to an existingdrawing. With an assembly set as the active model you can add views of theentire assembly without having to add each of its individual components.

If your company requires that assembly drawings display individualcomponents on different sheets, you must add each component asa drawing model.

When placing an assembly view, you are prompted to select a combinedstate. A combined state is a combination of various state representationscreated in the 3-D model using the All tab of the view manager. For example,you can create a combined state in the 3-D model that consists of a specificorientation, a specific explode state, and a specific style representation.When the combined state is selected, the view displays with all three staterepresentations enabled. For this topic, you should specify no combinedstate.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Assembly Exploded ViewsExploded views are used to illustrate assembly and disassembly (taking aproduct apart). With exploded views, you can create customized drawingsbased on 3-D models; these views can display information needed bymanufacturing personnel to produce your product, or they can be used asa general reference.To display an assembly view in an exploded state, select the Explodecomponents in view check box in the View States category of the DrawingView dialog box. You must then select the desired saved explode state or thedefault exploded state previously created in the 3-D assembly model. Youcan add an exploded view of an assembly without having to explode it inAssembly mode. If an exploded view is edited on the drawing, the explodestate in the 3-D model is not affected. However, if the explode state is editedin the 3-D model, the associated exploded drawing view updates.Exploded views also typically contain offset lines, created in the 3-D model.In addition, BOM Balloons and a table indexing the parts can also be addedto the drawing; this enables people to easily reference the componentinformation.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly and Exploded Views

ScenarioCreate assembly and exploded views in a drawing.

Assembly_Exploded_Views Create New

Task 1: Create a new drawing from template and add an assembly view.

1. Click New , select Drawing, edit the name to EXPLODE_VIEW,and click OK.

2. In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse, select VALVE.ASM,and click Open.• Verify that Use Template is specified, and that the template tobe used is drawing_template.

• Click OK.


4. If necessary, double-click thesheet scale value, edit it to 1,and press ENTER.


6. Select No Combined State andclick OK.

7. Click near the upper-right cornerto place the view.

8. In the Drawing View dialog box,select Default Orientation asthe Model view name, and clickOK.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Insert a drawing sheet and add an exploded assembly view.

1. Click Insert > Sheet.2. In the message window, type

your first initial, followed by yoursurname, and press ENTER.


4. Select No Combined State andclick OK.

5. Click near the middle of thedrawing to place the view.

6. In the Drawing View dialog box,select 3D as the Model viewname, and click Apply.

7. Click Repaint .8. In the Drawing View dialog box,

select the View States category.• Select the Explodecomponents in view checkbox, and select Assemblyexplode state EXP0001 fromthe drop-down list.

• Click OK.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Cross-Section ViewsYou can add cross-sections to drawing views and edit theirXhatching.

Cross-section views:• Use cross-sections from the3-D model.

• Have Xhatching that can beedited.

• Enable you to add arrows toa perpendicular view.– Flip material direction

Cross-Section Views Use 3-D ModelCross Sections

Add Arrows to PerpendicularView Edit Xhatching

Creating Cross-Section Views TheoryYou can add cross-sections to drawing views using the Sections category ofthe Drawing View dialog box. When you specify that you want to add a sectionto a drawing view, a list of available cross-sections displays in a drop-downlist. This list of available cross-sections comes from the 3-D model itself.You can only select valid cross-sections for a given drawing view. A validcross-section is one that is parallel to the screen when placed in the view.A cross-section displays in a drawing view with a set of Xhatching. You canedit the following attributes of the Xhatching lines.• Spacing - For spacing, you can select either Half or Double from themenu manger. Each time you select half or double the spacing betweenXhatching lines halves or doubles, respectively. You can also type aspacing value for the Xhatching lines. In the lower-right figure, the spacinghas been changed to a value of 0.15.

• Angle - For angle, you can select a Xhatching line angle in 30 or 45 degreeincrements between 0 and 150 degrees. You can also type an angle value.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

In the lower-right figure the Xhatching line angle has been modified from45 degrees to 120 degrees.

In addition to creating a section view, you can optionally add section arrowsto any view that is perpendicular to the section view. In the lower-left figure,the arrows were added to the drawing view. The direction that the arrowspoint indicates the direction of material to keep in the section view. You canflip this material direction if desired.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Cross Section Views

ScenarioAdd a cross section view to a drawing.

Section_Views section_views.drw

Task 1: Add cross section A to a view in a drawing.

1. In the model tree, right-click onSHAFT.PRT and select Open.

2. Click View Manager andselect the Xsec tab.

3. Right-click section A and selectVisibility.

4. Right-click section A and selectSet Active.

5. Right-click section A and de-select Visibility.6. Right-click No Cross Section and select Set Active.7. Click Close from the View Manager.8. Click Window > Close to return to the drawing.

9. Select the main 2-D generalview new_view_12. Right-clickand select Properties.

10. In the Drawing View dialog box,select the Sections categoryand select the 2D cross-sectionoption.• Click Add Section andselect A from the drop-downlist.

• Click OK.11. Click in the background to

de-select the view.

12. In the section view, select theXhatching, right-click, and selectProperties.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

13. In the menu manager, clickSpacing > Half > Double >Half, noticing what happens tothe Xhatch spacing in the view.

14. In the view manager, click Value,type 0.15, press ENTER, andclick Done.

15. De-select the X-hatching.

16. Select the cross-section view,right-click, and select AddArrows.

17. Select the top projection viewtop_13.

18. Select the arrows, right-click, andselect Flip Material RemovalSide.

19. Right-click and select Flip Material Removal Side to flip the directionback.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Detailed ViewsA Detailed view is a small portion of a model shown enlarged inanother view.

Sketching the Spline

Detailed view components:• Location on drawing• Sketched spline• View name• Scale• Xhatching (if applicable)

Placed Detailed View

Resulting Spline Boundary

Creating Detailed Views TheoryA detailed view is a small portion of a model shown enlarged in another view.A reference note and border is included on the parent view as part of thedetailed view setup. The orientation of the detailed view is the same as itsparent, but the detail view is typically assigned a much larger scale thanthe parent view.You must define the following when creating a detailed view:• Location - Select a location on the drawing where the resulting detailedview is to be placed. Like any other view, you can always move the drawingview at a later time.

• Spline - Select a point in an existing drawing view that you want to enlargein the detailed view. You must then sketch a spline around the area ofthe view that you want enlarged in the resulting detailed view. You donot have to worry about sketching a perfect shape because the spline isautomatically converted into a boundary shape. The default boundaryshape is a circle, although you can change the boundary to an ellipse,an ASME 94 Circle, or leave it as a spline. In the lower-right figure, theboundary shape is a circle.

You may also define the following optional items when creating a detailedview:• View name - Provide a different detailed view name. The View name ofthe detailed view is displayed in the detail note, as shown in the lower-right


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

figure. The View name is also displayed under the detailed view, as shownin the lower-left figure.

• Scale - You can specify the scale of the resulting detailed view.• Xhatching (if applicable) - If you create a detailed view for a drawing viewthat contains a cross-section, you can edit the Xhatching to somethingdifferent than the parent cross-section view if desired. The default detailedview Xhatching is governed by the parent.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Detailed Views

ScenarioCreate a detailed view in a drawing.

Detailed_Views detailed_views.drw

Task 1: Create a detailed view in a drawing.

1. Click Insert > Drawing View >Detailed from the main menu.

2. In the section view, select thecenter point for the detailed view.

3. Click points to create a splinecurve around the SHAFT.PRTend. Do NOT close the splinecurve when sketching it. Instead,leave a “gap.”

4. Middle-click to complete thespline curve.

5. Select a point in the top left ofthe drawing to place the detailview.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. Select the detailed view note,double-click the 3.000 scaleon the view, type 4, and pressENTER. Click in an emptyarea of the graphics window tode-select the scale value.

7. Move the drawing views asnecessary.

8. In the detailed view, select theXhatching, right-click, and selectProperties.

9. In the menu manager, select DetIndep to make the detailed viewdisplay mode independent of itsparent.

10. In the menu manager, clickSpacing > Half > Done.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Auxiliary ViewsAn auxiliary view is projected perpendicular to a selected planarreference or projected along the direction of an axis.

You can select the followingreferences:• Planar reference– Datum plane

• Linear reference– Datum axis– Edge

Edit the View name.Add optional arrows.

An Auxiliary View

Creating Auxiliary Views TheoryAn Auxiliary view is a special type of projection view. Instead of beingprojected orthogonal, the auxiliary view is projected perpendicular to aselected planar reference (a datum plane), or projected along the directionof an axis. The resulting auxiliary view can be moved only along its angleof projection. In the figure, the datum plane is selected as the projectionreference.You may also edit the View name to a more meaningful name, as well as addprojection arrows, as shown in the figure. The View name is displayed whenprojection arrows are created. The projection arrows can also be movedindividually with respect to the auxiliary view.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Auxiliary Views

ScenarioCreate an auxiliary view in a drawing.

Auxiliary_Views auxiliary_views.drw

Task 1: Create an auxiliary view in the drawing.

1. In the model tree, expandExtrude 2, right-click DTM2 andselect Unhide.

2. Click Insert > Drawing View >Auxiliary from the main menu.

3. Select datum plane DTM2 as theplanar reference.

4. Move the cursor down and tothe right and click to place theauxiliary view.

5. In the model tree, right-clickdatum plane DTM2 and selectHide.

6. Select auxiliary view, right-click,and select Properties.

7. In the View Type category of theDrawing View dialog box, editthe View name to AUX.• Select the Add projectionarrows check box.

• Click OK.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

8. Select the arrows, then clickand drag the diagonal line to theright.

9. Click and drag the arrows toreposition them.

10. Select the auxiliary view.Right-click and select LockView Movement if necessaryto unlock view movement. Clickand drag to move the view.Notice that the view can onlybe moved along the angle ofprojection.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module20Creating Drawing Details

Module OverviewDrawing views alone are typically not sufficient to convey all the informationneeded to manufacture a given model. In this module, you learn how to showall the necessary detail that manufacturing needs to create production parts.This information includes dimensions, axes, notes, Bill of Materials (BOM)tables, and BOM Balloons.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Analyze drawing detail concepts and types.• Show and erase detail items.• Clean up and manipulate dimensions.• Create driven dimensions, notes, and Bill of Materials.• Analyze drawing associativity.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Detail Concepts and TypesYou can add additional detail to drawing views to conveyinformation needed to manufacture the part or components ofthe assembly.

Add the following detailitems to drawings:• Dimensions– Driving– Driven (Created)

• Axes• Notes• Tables• Bills of Material

Viewing Detail Items on a Drawing

Analyzing Detail Concepts and Types TheoryYou can add additional detail to drawing views to convey information neededto manufacture the part or components of the assembly. There are numerousways to add additional information to a drawing, including:• Dimensions - Used to display measurements, distances, and depthsbetween specific geometric entities on a drawing view. You can add bothdriving dimensions from the model, or create your own dimensions.

• Axes - Used to show the centers of holes or bolt circles.• Notes - Add additional information to a drawing that may not be found indimensions.

• Tables - Used to show additional drawing information in tabular format.Examples include names of optional components in an assembly, specificdimension values for part numbers in a common drawing, and cam liftvalues per degree.

• BOM - Used to show components in an assembly and their quantities.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Showing and Erasing Detail ItemsDimensions and other detail items created in a 3-D model canbe shown in drawings.

• Show or erase numerous itemtypes at the same time.

• Filter what dimensions get shownto reduce dimension cleanup.

• Select which items to keep orerase.

Showing Axes and Dimensionsby Feature The Show/Erase Dialog Box

Showing Detail Items TheoryWhen you create a 3-D model, you simultaneously create various informationuseful for detailing the model in a drawing, including dimensions, axes, andothers. When creating a 2-D drawing you can select which information toshow in the drawing.The following information types from the 3-D model can be shown in the2-D drawing:

• Dimensions • ReferenceDimensions

• GeometricTolerances

• Notes • Balloons • Axes

• Symbols • Surface Finishes • Datum Planes

• Cosmetic Features • Datum Targets

You can control which 3-D information displays on the drawing and where byspecifying any of the following Show By options:• Feature - Shows the selected item types for a particular feature on thedrawing.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Feature and View - Shows the selected item types for a feature that appearin several views in one selected view. If an item is not appropriate to thatview it does not display.

• Part - Shows the selected item types for a particular part on the drawing.• Part and View - Shows the selected item types for a part that appear inseveral views in one selected view. If an item is not appropriate to thatview it does not display.

You can quickly show dimensions for a given drawing view byselecting the drawing view, then right-clicking and selectingShow Dimensions.

• View - Shows all the selected item types for the features and parts withina particular drawing view.

• Show All - Shows all selected item types from the 3-D model in the drawing.The selected item types show in the drawing in a preview mode. Of the itemsthat show, there may be some that you do now want to show. You can usethe following options to filter items:• Sel to Keep - Enables you to select the individual items to show in thedrawing. Any items not selected are erased.

• Sel to Remove - Enables you to select items to remove from the drawing.Any items not selected remain in the drawing.

• Accept All - Keeps all the previewed items.• Erase All - Erases all the previewed items.If detail items overlap when showing them, you can pause the show anderase tool and move the drawing items to enable you to view and correctlyselect the items to show or erase. To do this, you can right-click anywhereon the drawing and select Pause Show and Erase. You can then move thedrawing items within the view as necessary. Before continuing with the showand erase process, you then right-click and select Resume Show and Erase.

Erasing Detail Items TheoryAt any point during drawing creation if you decide that you no longer wantcertain shown items, you can erase them. You can select the same itemTypes to erase from the drawing as you could when showing items. Thefollowing options available for erasing dimensions:• Selected - Erases all selected items.• Feature - Erases all items from the selected feature.• Feature and View - Erases all items from the selected feature and view.• Part - Erases all items from the selected part.• Part and View - Erases all items from the selected part and view.• View - Erases all items in the selected view.• Erase All - Erases all items from the drawing.

You can also erase items by selecting them in the drawing, thenright-clicking and selecting Erase.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Showing and Erasing Detail Items

ScenarioShow and erase detail items in a drawing.

Show_Erase show_erase.drw

Task 1: Show dimensions by feature and view.

1. Click Show and Erase fromthe drawing toolbar.

2. In the Show/Erase dialog box,click Show.• Select Dimensionsas the Type, de-selecting allother Types as necessary.

• Select Feature as the ShowBy option.

• Select the lower-right hole inthe top view and click OK fromthe Select dialog box. Noticedimensions in three views.

• Click Erase All.

3. In the Show/Erase dialog box,select Feature and View as theShow By option.

4. Select the same hole and clickOK from the Select dialog box.The dimensions are now onlyshown on the view selected.

5. Click Accept All from thePreview tab.

6. In the Show/Erase dialog box,select View as the Show Byoption.

7. Select the front view. Alldimensions are shown on theselected view.


9. ClickClose from the Show/Erasedialog box.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Show all dimensions and erase by feature.

1. Click Change Sheetand navigate to sheet 2.

2. Click Show and Erase .3. In the Show/Erase dialog box,

click Show All and click Yesfrom the Confirm dialog box.


5. In the Show/Erase dialog box,click Erase and click Feature asthe Erase By option.

6. Select both holes in the uppertop view.

7. ClickClose from the Show/Erasedialog box.

Task 3: Show axes by drawing view.

1. Click Change Sheet and navigate to sheet 3.

2. Click Show and Erase .

3. In the Show/Erase dialog box,click Show.• De-select Dimensions

.• Click Axes as theType.

• Click View as the Show Byoption.

4. Select the front view and clickAccept All from the Show/Erasedialog box.

5. Select the top view and clickAccept All from the Show/Erasedialog box.• Click Close.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Cleaning Up DimensionsPro/ENGINEER can automatically arrange the display of selecteddimensions based on controls that you set.

Functions include:• Offset dimensions in evenlyspaced increments.

• Create breaks in witness lines.• Flip dimension arrows that do notfit between witness lines.

• Center dimensions betweenwitness lines.

• Create snap lines.

The Clean Dimensions Dialog Box

Dimensions Before Cleanup Dimensions After Cleanup

Cleaning Up Dimensions TheoryYou can use Pro/ENGINEER’s clean dimensions functionality to automaticallyperform the following tasks:• Clean dimensions by view, or by selecting individual dimensions. Youcannot clean angle or diameter dimensions.

• Offset dimensions from edges or view boundaries.• Space dimensions in even increments.• Create breaks in witness lines where they intersect other witness linesor draft entities.

• Automatically flip arrows on dimensions when they do not fit betweenwitness lines.

• Center dimensions between witness lines.The lower-left figure displays dimensions before the cleanup process hasbeen performed, while the lower-right figure displays dimensions after thecleanup process has been performed.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Snap LinesWhen cleaning dimensions you have the option of creating snap lines withthe offset dimensions. Objects snap to these lines, which are created atthe specified offset value. The lower-right figure displays snap lines thatwere created during the dimension cleanup process. Even after the cleanupprocess has been performed, you can manipulate dimensions and snapthem to the displayed snap lines. There are two important points to knowabout snap lines:• Snap lines do not display in a printed drawing.• You can delete snap lines after use.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Cleaning Up Dimensions

ScenarioClean up dimensions in a drawing.

Clean_Up dim_clean-up.drw

Task 1: Clean up dimensions on sheet 1.

1. Select the front view,right-click, and select CleanupDimensions.

2. Accept all default options.3. Click Apply > Close.4. Notice the snap lines that were

created, and that the dimensionshave snapped to these lines.

Task 2: Clean up dimensions on sheet 2.

1. Use Change Sheet tonavigate to sheet 2.

2. Press CTRL and select the topand front views.

3. Right-click and select CleanupDimensions.

4. In the Clean Dimensions dialogbox, edit the Offset to 0.625.• Edit the Increment to 0.5.• Clear the Create Snap Linescheck box.

• Click Apply > Close.5. Notice that angle and diameter

dimensions are not affected bythe dimension cleanup process.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Manipulating DimensionsWhen dimensions are placed on a drawing, they typically mustbe modified in some way either for clarity or so they adhere toyour company’s drawing standards.

Dimensions can bemanipulated in the followingways:• Move (handles)• Align Dimensions• Flip Arrows• Move Item to View• Edit Attachment Flipping Arrows

Dimension Move Handles

Manipulating Dimensions TheoryYou can manually manipulate a dimension or dimensions to display them inthe desired location. The following operations can be manually performedon dimensions:• Move dimensions - Select a dimension and move it to a different locationof the drawing view. Each dimension, when selected, displays a series ofmove handles, as shown in the lower figure. Clicking and dragging thedifferent move handles yields different move results. The following moveoptions are available:– Move Dimension and Text - Use the handle circled in blue in the lower

figure to move both the dimension and the dimension text.– Move Text - Use either handle circled in green in the lower figure to

move just the dimension text.– Move Dimension - Use the handle circled in yellow in the lower figure at

either arrow tip to move the dimension.– Move Witness Line - Use the handle circled in orange in the lower

figure to move the witness line. This handle is the one at the end of thewitness line side that touches the model geometry.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Align Dimensions - You can select multiple dimensions including linear,radial, and angular, and align them to one another. The selecteddimensions align to the first dimension selected.

• Flip Arrows - You can flip arrows by right-clicking and selecting FlipArrows, or you can right-click while dragging a dimension to toggle throughthe different arrow flipping options. For radius dimensions there are fourdifferent flip options available, for diameter dimensions there are threedifferent flip options available, and for linear dimensions there are twodifferent flip options available. In the upper figure you can view all theavailable arrow flipping options for radius dimensions.

• Move Item to View - Move dimensions from one drawing view to another.• Edit Attachment - Specify a new attachment position for certain dimensions,a radius dimension, for example. The available new attachment positionshighlight in all drawing views and enable you to select a new surface oredge.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Manipulating Dimensions

ScenarioExperiment with the different dimension manipulation options.

Manipulate_Dims manipulate_dims.drw

Task 1: Manipulate dimensions in a drawing.

1. In the top view, select the 51dimension.• Click and drag the handle atthe center of the dimensiontext shown in the top figure tomove both the dimension andtext.

• Click and drag either the leftor right handle around thetext shown in the top figure tomove the text up or down.

• Click and drag either handle atthe arrow head tips shown inthe middle and lower figuresto move the entire dimensionleft or right.

• Click and drag the left handleat the end of the bottomwitness line shown in thelower figure to move thewitness line until it no longertouches the model.

2. With the 51 dimension stillselected, right-click and selectFlip Arrows.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

3. With the 51 dimension stillselected, press CTRL and selectthe 33 dimension.

4. Right-click and select AlignDimensions.

5. Move the dimensions so theyare properly centered betweenthe other two dimensions.

6. In the top view, select the 12.65diameter dimension.

7. Click and drag the center handle(the left-most handle in thefigure) to move the dimensionand text. You can also click anddrag the dimension itself.

8. Click and drag either of thehandles around the text to movejust the text left or right.

9. Right-click and select FlipArrows.

10. In the front view, select the 12.65diameter dimension.

11. Right-click and selectMove Itemto View.

12. Select the top view.

13. In the front view, select the R22dimension.

14. Right-click and select FlipArrows.

15. Right-click and select FlipArrows two more times.

16. Move the dimension and textupward until it snaps to the snapline.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Driven DimensionsYou can create additional dimensions within a drawing asneeded if a dimension is not available to be shown or ascompany standards dictate.

Driven dimension types include:• Linear• Angular• Radial/Diameter• Point-Point

Viewing Created Dimension Types

Creating Driven Dimensions TheoryA driven dimension is created by the user. This type of dimension reports avalue based upon the references selected when the dimension is created.That is, the dimension value is driven by the geometry selected, and thereforeit is not possible to modify the value of a driven dimension. A driven dimensiondoes not pass back to the model; it appears only within the drawing.You can create a Standard driven dimension using Dimension NewReferences or Insert > Dimension > New References from the mainmenu. The system creates a dimension based upon one or two selectedreferences similar to how you create dimensions in Sketcher.

Driven Dimension TypesStandard dimension types include linear, angular, radial, diameter, orpoint-point dimensions.When creating a driven dimension, you can select an edge, edge and point,two points, or a vertex. You can further filter what entities the dimensionattaches to using the following attach type menu commands in the menumanager:• On Entity - Attaches the dimension to the entity at the pick point, accordingto the rules of creating regular dimensions.

• On Surface - Attaches the dimension to the location selected on a surface.• Midpoint - Attaches the dimension to the midpoint of the selected entity.• Center - Attaches the dimension to the center of a circular edge. Circularedges include circular geometry such as holes, rounds, curves, andsurfaces, and circular draft entities.

• Intersect - Attaches the dimension to the closest intersection point of twoselected entities.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Make Line - References the current X and Y-axes in the orientation of themodel view.

Depending upon the selected references, you may have to further specify thetype of dimension to be created. For example, you may be asked to specifywhether the dimension you create is to be Horizontal, Vertical, Slanted,Parallel, or Normal to the selected references. If your selected referencesare arcs or circles, you must specify whether the dimension is to be createdbetween the arc centers, tangent, or concentric.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Driven Dimensions

ScenarioCreate a driven dimension in a drawing.

Driven_Dims driven_dims.drw

Task 1: Create a driven dimension in a drawing.

1. Navigate to the top view in sheet1.

2. Notice the 14 dimension thatlocates the holes from the centerof the model. Manufacturingrequires a dimension from themodel edge.

3. Select the unwanted 14dimension, right-click, and selectProperties.

4. In the Dimension Propertiesdialog box, select theDimension Text tab.• In the Postfix field, type REF.• Click OK.

You could also erase thedimension rather thanmaking it a referencedimension.

5. Click Dimension NewReferences from thedrawing toolbar.

6. Select the right edge of the blockand select the hole edge.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. Middle-click to place the 19dimension.

8. Click Center from the menumanager.

9. Click Return from the menumanager.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating NotesYou can create notes on a drawing with or without leaders thatcan contain dimensions.

• Note types include:– No Leader– With Leader– ISO Leader– On Item– Offset

• Specify Attach Type.• Use dimension symbols in notes. Note with No Leader

Creating Notes with Dimensions Note with a Leader

Creating Notes TheoryYou can create notes on a drawing to convey additional information. Forexample, you can create a note stating that all sharp edges must be broken,as shown in the upper-right figure.The following types of notes can be created:• No Leader - Creates a free note.• With Leader - Creates a note with a leader.• ISO Leader - Creates a note with an ISO leader.• On Item - Creates a note directly attached to an edge, surface, or datumpoint.

• Offset - Creates a note relative to a detail entity. If the detail entity ismoved, the note moves with it.

Notes can be created horizontally, vertically, or at an angle, and you canspecify the justification as Left, Center, or Right.When you specify that the note has a leader, the following leader attachtypes are available:• On Entity - Attaches the leader to selected geometry in a drawing view.• On Surface - Attaches the leader to a selected location on the surface ofa drawing view.

• Free Point - Attaches the leader to a location on the screen that you select.• Midpoint - Attaches the leader to the midpoint of a specified entity.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Intersect - Attaches the leader to the intersection of two entities.You can also specify what the attach point of the leader looks like. Optionsinclude arrow head, dot, filled dot, no arrow, slash, integral, box, filled box,double arrow, and target. In the lower-right figure, the note was created withan arrow head leader.

Adding Dimensions to NotesYou can also take existing dimensions in a drawing and add them into anote. Using Info > Switch Dims from the main menu switches the numericaldimensions to their symbolic values. When you create a note the dimensionsare automatically switched to their symbols, enabling you to type their symbolvalues. In the left image of the lower-left figure, the dimensions are displayedas their symbols, while in the right image they are displayed in their numericalformat. When dimensions are added to notes, the original dimensions areremoved, having been replaced by the dimensions in the note.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Notes

ScenarioCreate notes in a drawing.

Create_Notes notes.drw

Task 1: Create notes in a drawing.

1. Click Note from the drawingtoolbar.

2. In the menu manager, clickWithLeader > Make Note > OnSurface.

3. Select the cylindrical cut on the3-D view.

4. Click Done from the menumanager.

5. Click on the drawing to specifythe location for the note.

6. In the message window, typeCYLINDER SURFACE.

7. Press ENTER twice to completethe note.


9. In the menu manager, click NoLeader > Make Note.

10. Click below the 3-D view tospecify the note location.

11. In the message window, typeBREAK ALL SHARP EDGES.

12. Press ENTER twice to completethe note.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


14. Zoom in on the detail and topviews.

15. Notice the four dimensions.16. Click Info > Switch Dimensions

from the main menu.

17. ClickRepaint and notice thatthe dimensions have switched tosymbols.

18. In the menu manager, clickWithLeader > Make Note > OnEntity.

19. Select the top edge of thekeyway and click Done from themenu manager.

20. Click above the detail view tospecify the note location.

21. In the message window, typeMILL KEYWAY and pressENTER.

22. Type &d22:4 RADIUS and pressENTER.

23. Type &d21:4 WIDE and pressENTER twice to complete thenote.

24. Click Done/Return from themenu manager.

25. Click Repaint .26. Move the note if necessary.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating a Bill of MaterialsBill of Materials tables can be used to detail the location andnumber of parts included in the assembly for manufacturers.

• BOM tables areassociative.

• BOM tables use repeatregions.– Created manually– Imported from file

• You can show BOMBalloons from a BOMTable.

BOM Table and Balloons

Creating a Bill of Materials TheoryBill of Materials (BOM) tables can be used to detail the location and numberof parts included in the assembly for manufacturers.BOM tables are typically created to be associative, so the table automaticallyupdates whenever you add or delete a part to the assembly. You cancreate the tables manually or you can import them from a table file that waspreviously created and saved. BOM tables are created with repeat regions. Arepeat region is a group of “smart” user-designated table cells that expandor contract to accommodate the amount of data that the model currentlycontains.

Showing BOM BalloonsYou can also detail parts and assemblies with BOM balloons, which arecircular callouts in an assembly drawing that display components listed inthe BOM Table. As components are selected, the corresponding row in thetable highlights for easy identification. The BOM balloons are tied to thebill of material table.There are three different types of BOM balloons:• Simple - Balloons that show only one report symbol, usually the indexnumber from the table.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• With Qty - Balloons that are split to show the index number in one halfof the balloon circle and the quantity of the part used in the assembly inthe other half of the balloon circle.

• Custom - Enables you to specify a custom drawn symbol that you havecreated and stored.

Once BOM balloons have been added to the drawing, you can move them totheir desired location. You can also automatically set the position and spacingof the balloons using snap lines or stagger increment values by selecting aballoon and either clicking Edit > Cleanup > BOM Balloons from the mainmenu or right-clicking and selecting Cleanup BOM Balloons.You can also edit the balloon leader so it attaches to a different location onthe component it points to.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating a Bill of Materials

ScenarioCreate a bill of materials in a drawing and display the BOM balloons.

BOM bom.drw

Task 1: Create a bill of materials in a drawing and display the BOMballoons.

1. Click Table > Insert > TableFrom File from the main menu.

2. In the Open dialog box, selectbom_table.tbl and click Open.

3. Click in the upper-right of thedrawing to place the table.Notice that the assemblycomponents and their quantitiesare displayed in the table.

4. Click Table > BOM Balloonsfrom the main menu.

5. Select the table to specify theregion.

6. Click Create Balloon > ShowAll > Done from the menumanager.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Drawing AssociativityDue to Pro/ENGINEER’s bi-directional associativity, a changemade to a model automatically updates in a drawing andvice-versa.

Examples of drawing associativityinclude:• BOM tables update basedon added/removed assemblycomponents.

• Drawing views and showndimensions update based onmodel modifications.

• A modified shown drawingdimension automatically updatesin the model.

BOM and Drawing ViewAssociativity

Model and Drawing Associativity

Analyzing Drawing AssociativityDue to Pro/ENGINEER’s bi-directional associativity, a change made to amodel automatically updates in a drawing and vice-versa. Examples ofdrawing associativity include the following:• If components are added or removed from an assembly, the BOM table inthe assembly drawing automatically updates to reflect the new quantities.

• If a dimension is modified in a model, the matching shown drawingdimension is automatically updated along with the drawing view geometry.

• If a shown drawing dimension is modified, the dimension in the model aswell as its geometry updates automatically.

Depending on your Pro/ENGINEER settings, it may be necessary to useUpdate Current Sheet to refresh the display of all views in the activedrawing sheet in order to see a change made at the model level.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Drawing Associativity

ScenarioExperiment with drawing associativity.

Drw_Associativity associativity.drw

Task 1: Update the pattern member quantity in VALVE.ASM to view thedrawing associativity.

1. Notice in the BOM table that the BOLT.PRT quantity is 6.2. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1 of BOLT.PRT and notice that

there are 4 pattern members.3. In the model tree, right-click VALVE.ASM and select Open.

4. In the model tree, expandCOVER.PRT.• Right-click Pattern (Hole) andselect Edit.

• Zoom in and edit the numberof pattern members from 4HOLES to 3 HOLES.

• Click Regenerate .5. Close the assembly window to

return to the drawing.

6. Click Update Current Sheetfrom the drawing toolbar.

7. Notice that the BOM quantity ofBOLT.PRT has updated and thatthe view has changed as well.

Task 2: Edit the dimension length to view the associativity in the drawinggeometry and model.


2. In the front view, select the 76dimension.

3. Double-click the 76 dimensionand edit it to 102.

4. Click Regenerate .5. Notice that the drawing view

geometry has updated.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

6. In the model tree, right-clickARM.PRT and select Open.

7. Right-click Protrusion id 21 andselect Edit.

8. Edit the length from 102 to 84.

9. Click Regenerate .10. Close the part window to return

to the drawing.

11. Notice that the dimension anddrawing view geometry haveupdated to the new length value.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module21Measuring and Inspecting Models

Module OverviewYou can set up your models with a system of units and a density value forthe material type. Then you can create various types of analyses, such asmeasuring distances, angles, and surface areas. You can also calculatemass properties and perform interference checks on assemblies. Theseanalyses can be useful to extract data from a model, or to determine whetherthe model meets the required design intent.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Measure models and global interferences.• Create planar cross-sections.• Analyze model units and mass properties.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Measuring ModelsSeveral types of measurements can be made on models.

Measurements include:• Diameter• Area• Length• Angles• DistancesMeasurements can be saved forquick reuse.

Measuring an Angle

Viewing Different Measurements on a Model

Measuring DiametersYou can measure the diameter of a cylindrical surface. Surfaces can includethose created by revolving a sketched entity, extruding a sketched arc,extruding a sketched circle, or round features. When measuring a diameter,you select the surface you wish to measure, and Pro/ENGINEER displays themeasurement. The entity you select is called the surface reference. In thelower figure, the diameter of the cylindrical surface is 14.You can also measure the diameter at a selected point on a surface. Thismeasurement is good for surfaces with non-constant diameter.

Measuring AreaYou can measure the area of a surface, quilt, facet, or the entire model. Theentity you select is called the geometry reference. You can also select adirection reference to project the area onto a two-dimensional plane.

Measuring LengthYou can measure the length of curves or edges on a model. Simply selectan edge or curve to display its length. You can also measure an edge chain.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Pro/ENGINEER will report the total length of all selected edges, as shownby the red highlighted edges in the lower figure.

Measuring AnglesYou can measure the angle between two entities. These two entities arecalled the “From” reference and the “To” reference, and can consist ofsurfaces, planes, or edges. You can also specify the direction reference,which projects the angle of the entities onto a two-dimensional plane. Whenmeasuring angles, you can optionally modify the Plot Scale and Plot Rangethat Pro/ENGINEER uses to display the measurement. Scale enables you toadjust the scale of the arrows using the wheel button, specifying the requiredscale, or by dragging the scale handle. Range enables you to display theangle from 0–360 degrees or from +/–180 degrees.

Measuring DistancesYou can measure the distance between two references. These tworeferences are called the “From” reference and the “To” reference. You canselect points and vertices, edges and curves, surfaces and planes, and axesand coordinate systems.You can also measure the distance in a projected direction. There are twotypes of projected distances that can be measured:• Direction Reference — Enables you to measure a distance projected in thedirection of a selected reference. In the lower figure, the distance betweentwo vertices, 24.9280, is projected along the model’s side planar surfacefor a value of 21. Measuring projected distances is beneficial becauseit enables you to easily select a direction reference instead of having tocreate specific geometry in order to create the measurement.

• View Plane — Enables you to measure the projected distance based uponthe orientation of the part in the graphics window.

Measurement OptionsThere are three options available when measuring geometry on models:• Quick — Enables you to compute measurements without saving theanalysis or creating a measurement feature in the model tree.

• Saved — Enables you to save the measurement for future use. Youcan specify a unique name for the measurement analysis so it meanssomething to you at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses byclicking Analysis > Saved Analysis.

• Feature — Enables you to save the measurement as a feature in themodel tree.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Measuring Models

ScenarioMeasure different parts of a model.

Measuring measure.prt

Task 1: Measure different parts of a model.

1. Click Analysis > Measure >Diameter from the main menu.

2. In the Diameter dialog box,edit the measurement type toQuick from the drop-down list ifnecessary.

3. Select the curved model surface.Notice the diameter is 14.

4. Click Accept from theDiameter dialog box.

5. Click Analysis > Measure >Area from the main menu.

6. Select the flat model surface.Notice the surface area is478.819.

7. Click Accept from the Areadialog box.

8. Click Analysis > Measure >Length from the main menu.

9. Select the left-most edge. Thenpress SHIFT and select twoother edges. Notice the lengthis 35.2539.

10. Click Accept from the Lengthdialog box.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. Click Analysis > Measure >Angle from the main menu.

12. Select the left surface, thenselect the right surface. Noticethe angle is 27.5268.

13. In the Angle dialog box, activatethe Direction collector and selectthe top surface. Notice theprojected angle is now 332.473.

14. Click Accept from the Angledialog box.

15. Click Analysis > Measure >Distance from the main menu.

16. Select the two vertices. Noticethe distance is 24.9280.

17. Right-click and select DirectionCollector and select the rightsurface. Notice the projecteddistance is now 21.

18. Click Accept from theDistance dialog box.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating Planar Part Cross-SectionsYou can create planar cross-sections in a 3-D model.

• Use Xsec tab in view manager• Display– Visibility– Set Active– Flip

• Redefine cross-sections– Hatching– Rename– Description

Cross-Section with Visibility On

The Active Cross-SectionActive Cross-Section with

Visibility On

Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections TheoryYou can create new planar part cross-sections using the Xsec tab of the viewmanager. Simply select a datum plane or planar surface on a model and thecross-section is created on that plane.

Cross-Section Display OptionsThere are three different display options for cross-sections:• Visibility — Toggles the cross-section display on or off. In the upper-rightfigure, the cross-section display is enabled.

• Set Active — Sets the active cross-section, with the default selection as NoCross Section. When a cross-section is set as active, the model geometryis clipped at that section location. In the lower-left figure, a cross-sectionis set as the active section.

• Flip — Flips the geometry side that is clipped about the active section.

Editing Cross-SectionsThere are numerous editing operations that you can perform oncross-sections, including the following:• Redefine — Enables you to redefine a cross-section’s hatching spacingand angle. Spacing options include Half, which halves the spacing, Double,which doubles the spacing, and Value, which enables you to specify a


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

spacing value. Angle values range from 0 to 150 degrees at intervals of30 and 45 degrees.

• Remove — Enables you to delete a cross-section from a model.• Rename — Enables you to rename the cross-section name.• Copy — Enables you to copy a cross-section from another model andspecify a new reference.

• Description — Enables you to add a text description to a cross-section.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections

ScenarioCreate a planar cross-section in a model.

Cross-Sections x-sec.prt

Task 1: Create a planar cross-section in a model.

1. Start the View Manager .2. In the View Manager, select the

Xsec tab.• Click New and press ENTERto accept the default name.

• Accept the default optionsand click Done from the menumanager.

• Select datum plane FRONT.

3. In the view manager,double-click Xsec0001 tomake it the active section.

4. In the view manager, right-clickXsec0001 and select Visibility.Notice the eyeball icon.

5. In the view manager, clickDisplay > Flip to flip the sidethat is displayed.

6. Click Display > Flip to flip thedisplay back.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. In the view manager, click Edit >Redefine and select Hatchingfrom the menu manager.• Click Spacing > Half from themenu manager.

• Click Angle > 60.• Click Done > Done/Return.

8. In the view manager,double-click No Cross Section.Notice that the section is stillvisible but the clipping has beentoggled off.

9. In the view manager, right-clickXsec0001 and select Visibilityto toggle it off. Notice the eyeballicon disappears.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Model Units and Mass PropertiesYou can specify a model’s units and calculate its massproperties.

Units Manager

Model Units• Analyses are reported in currentmodel units.

• Units come from templates.• You can change them if desired.

Mass Properties• Analyses require model density.

Performing a Mass PropertiesAnalysis

Converting Model Dimensions

Analyzing Model Units TheoryA model’s units are typically derived from a specific model template that waschosen when you first began creating a part model. Pro/ENGINEER’s defaultsystem of units is English, specifically in_lbm_sec. For all new modelscreated in PTC courses, the units are mm_kg_sec.There are several unit systems available, including:• Centimeter Gram Second (CGS)• Foot Pound Second (FPS)• Inch Pound (mass) Second (IPS)• Inch Pound (force) Second (IPS)• Meter Kilogram Second (MKS)• Millimeter Newton (force) Second (mmNs)If none of these default unit systems are desirable, you can customize yourown unit system using any combination of units.You can change the units for a model by using the Units Manager dialog box,which you can access by clicking Edit > Setup from the main menu andclicking Units from the menu manager. When you switch from one set ofunits to another, you must specify how the dimensions are to be handled. Inthe lower-right figure the diameter of the socket is 25.4mm. When the systemof units is converted from Metric to English you must specify whether the


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

English diameter is to be 1in (the same size), or 25.4 (the same value). Thesystem automatically changes the model based on your decision.

The same systems of units are available for assemblies, also.

Analyzing Mass Properties TheoryYou can calculate the mass properties of a model by clicking Analysis >Model > Mass Properties from the main menu. Before you can calculateaccurate mass properties for a model, however, its density must be defined.A mass properties calculation is dependent upon the density entered for agiven model. If the density is updated for a model and its mass propertiesare recalculated, the results update.When the system performs a mass properties analysis, the following massproperty information is calculated:• Volume• Surface Area• Density• Mass• Center of Gravity — The center of gravity (COG) is displayed on the modelas a coordinate system with axes 1, 2, and 3, as shown in the lower-leftfigure.

You can also perform mass properties analyses on assemblies. You mustconfigure the density of each part model.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Model Units and MassProperties

ScenarioAnalyze the model units and mass properties in models.

Units-Mass-Props units-mass-props.prt

Task 1: Analyze the mass properties of a model.

1. Double-click the outer cylindricalmodel surface. Notice the mainouter diameter is 25.4.

2. Click Edit > Setup from the mainmenu and select Units from themenu manager.

3. Notice the current unit systemin the Units Manager dialog boxand view the Description.• Select the Inch lbm Secondsystem of units and click Set.

• In the Changing Model Unitsdialog box, notice the twooptions and click OK > Close.

• Click Done.

4. Click Refit .5. Double-click the outer cylindrical

model surface. Notice the mainouter diameter is now 1.

6. Click Edit > Setup from the main menu and click Mass Props fromthe menu manager.

7. In the Setup Mass Properties dialog box, edit the Density to .285,the density of steel, and click OK.

8. Click Done from the menu manager.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

9. Click Analysis > Model > MassProperties from the main menu.

10. Click Preview Analysisfrom the Mass Properties dialogbox.

11. Notice the values for volume,surface area, density, mass, andcenter of gravity.

12. Click Accept from the MassProperties dialog box.

Task 2: Analyze the mass properties in an assembly.

1. Click Open , selectVALVE.ASM, and click Open.

2. Click Analysis > Model > MassProperties.

3. Click Preview Analysisfrom the Mass Properties dialogbox.

4. Notice the values for volume,surface area, density, mass, andcenter of gravity.

5. Notice the center of gravity 1-2-3coordinate system location.

6. Click Accept from the MassProperties dialog box.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Measuring Global InterferenceYou can calculate interferences between components in anassembly.

Viewing Exact Global InterferenceComputation

Setup:• Parts only• Sub-assembly only

Computation type:• Exact• Quick

Interference pairs:• Displayed in red• Volume can be calculated

Viewing Quick Global InterferenceComputation

Measuring Global Interference TheoryYou can calculate interferences between components in an assembly. Thereare two different setup options available when computing global interference:• Parts only — Interference is checked between all parts, regardless of whichsub-assembly, if any, they belong to.

• Sub-assembly ony — Interference is checked between all sub-assembliesin the top level assembly without determining whether individual partswithin the sub-assembly interfere.

When components interfere, the geometry of one part is embedded in anotherpart. The system displays the interference between these two componentsas a pair in the Global Interference dialog box. Selecting the interfering pairin the dialog box causes the components to be highlighted in the graphicswindow, one in green and one in blue, as shown in the figures. There are twodifferent computational methods available for computing interferences:• Exact — When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting theinterfering components, the system also highlights the interfering volumeshared between the two components in red. In addition, the volume ofinterference is calculated and displayed in the dialog box, as shown inthe upper figure.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Quick — When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting theinterfering components, the system highlights the approximate interferingvolume with a red plus symbol in the graphics window, as shown in thelower figure. The volume of interference is not calculated.

Analysis OptionsThere are three options available when computing global interference onmodels:• Quick — Enables you to compute global interference without saving theanalysis or creating a feature in the model tree.

• Saved — Enables you to save the analysis for future use. You can specifya unique name for the global interference analysis so it means somethingto you at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses by clickingAnalysis > Saved Analysis.

• Feature — Enables you to save the global interference analysis as afeature in the model tree.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Measuring Global Interference

ScenarioMeasure global interferences in an assembly.

Global-Interference interference.asm

Task 1: Measure global interferences in an assembly.

1. Click Analysis > Model >Global Interference from themain menu.

2. Click Preview Analysisfrom the Global Interferencedialog box.• Notice the four interferingpairs. Select each pair to seethe highlighting, and noticethe volume of interference.

• Click Accept .

3. In the model tree, right-clickBODY.PRT and select Activate.• Expand BODY.PRT andexpand the second Pattern(Hole).

• Edit the diameter of Holeid 299 from 3 to 4 and click

Regenerate .

4. In the model tree, right-clickINTERFERENCE.ASM andselect Activate.

5. Click Analysis > Model >Global Interference.

6. Click Preview Analysis .• Notice that there is only oneinterference pair.

• Click Accept .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. In the model tree, right-clickBODY.PRT and select Activate.• Edit the diameter of Hole id37 from 49 to 51 and click

Regenerate .

8. In the model tree, right-clickINTERFERENCE.ASM andselect Activate.

9. Click Analysis > Model >Global Interference.

10. Click Preview Analysis .• Notice that the pair stillinterferes, but its volume isless.

• Click Accept .

11. Click Drag Components ,select ARM.PRT, and drag itapproximately 45 degrees.


13. Click Analysis > Model > Global Interference.14. Click Preview Analysis .

• Notice that there are now no interfering parts.• Click Accept .



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module22Using Layers

Module OverviewLayers provide a means of organizing model items, such as features,datum planes, parts in an assembly, and even other layers, enabling you toperform operations on those items collectively. Layers enable you to simplifygeometry selection by temporarily hiding or displaying specific model featuresor assembly components in the graphics window. Layers can also be used toperform actions, such as suppressing all the items in a layer at once.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand layers.• Create and manage layers.• Utilize layers in part models and assembly models.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding LayersA layer is a container object that enables you to organizefeatures, parts in an assembly, and even other layers.

Uses include:• Collectively perform operations– Hide/Unhide– Select

• Model management

Layer types include:• Default• Automatic• User-created Viewing the Layer Tree

Hiding Items using Layers

What is a Layer?A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, parts inan assembly, and even other layers. You can create as many layers as youneed and associate items with more than one layer.

Layer UsesA layer enables you to collectively perform operations on items in a layer.Layers are most often used from a model management standpoint to controlthe amount of information displayed in the graphics window. This helps youto more easily perform the desired task at hand.The two most common operations performed to item on a layer include:• Hiding and Unhiding Layers — You can hide and unhide layers in partsand assemblies. This in turn hides or unhides the items on the layer. Inthe bottom figure the datum axes layer has just been hidden, and thus youcannot see any datum axes on the model.Hiding items on a layer may appear to be similar to suppressing thosesame items. However, there are significant differences:– When you suppress an item it is removed from the regeneration cycle

of the model, whereas hiding an item just removes it from the graphicswindow.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

– A hidden item is still included in Pro/ENGINEER calculations suchas mass properties analyses. A suppressed item is not included incalculations.

• Selecting Items on the Layer — Layers provide you with a means to easilyselect multiple items, instead of having to select them individually. Whileindividual selection may appeal to you, if you need to select 82 out of 100part axes, then you can understand that mass selection is beneficial andsaves time.

Once the items in a layer are selected you can perform operations on them.Typical operations include deleting those items or suppressing/resumingthem. However, you could also edit their display or add them to a simplifiedrepresentation.

The Layer TreeYou use the layer tree to add items to layers and perform operations onlayers. You can access the layer tree by clicking Layers from the maintoolbar. This turns the layer tree on. Clicking the icon again turns the layertree off. You can also click Show > Layer Tree from the top of the model tree,or you can click View > Layers from the main menu to turn the layer tree on.The top figure shows the layer tree.

Layer TypesThere are three different types of layers that can be created in a model:• Default — Layers can be included in part and assembly templates. Ifyou use part and assembly templates containing default layers at yourcompany, Pro/ENGINEER automatically associates different features ofa model to specific default layers. Using default layers also causes allparts to have the same initial set of default layers. This enables you to usecascading layer control at the assembly level because each model haslayers of the same name.

• Automatic — When you hide items in the model tree, those hidden itemsare automatically added to the Hidden Items Layer.

• User-Created — You can create your own layers in a model and add itemsmanually to them.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Creating and Managing LayersYou can create layers manually by naming the layer and pickinggeometry items or components to add from the model tree or thegraphics window.

• Layer Properties:– Name– Contents– Rules

• Different icons for layerswith/without rules

• Set the Active Layer• Status– Save– Reset– Warning

Layer Properties Dialog Box

Layer with No Rule Layer Created with Rule

Creating and Managing Layers TheoryYou can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometryitems or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window. Thistype of layer is useful for specific tasks. As a best practice, you should namethe layer so other designers recognize the task.When you create a layer the Layer Properties dialog box displays, as shownin the top figure. The dialog box displays the following information:• Name — This is the name of the layer.• Contents — The contents tab displays the items that are included orexcluded from the layer. Items that are included on the layer are displayedwith a green “+” symbol in the Status column, while items that are excludedfrom the layer are displayed with a red “—” symbol in the Status column.Items, when selected, are included on the layer if the Include button isturned on, while items are excluded from the layer if the Exclude buttonis turned on.

• Rules — The Rules tab displays the rules, if any, that are defined for thelayer. Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria. Tocreate a layer based on a rule, you simply need to create a layer, nameit, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the LayerProperties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool. In


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

addition to being useful in specific tasks, this type of layer is excellent whencreating templates.

There are three options for ruled layers:– Associative — Enables the rules to apply for existing model features.– Rules Enabled — Enables the rules to apply for new features as they

are created.– Independent — Enables the layer to be independent of the default layer

model, and therefore can be customized.Layers that are created with rules display with a different icon than thoselayers that were created with no rules. In the lower-left figure, the layerdoes not contain any rules, while in the lower-right figure, the layer wascreated with a rule.

The Layer Properties dialog box also displays if you look at the layerproperties of any existing layer by selecting the layer, right-clicking, andselecting Layer Properties.You may also decide to make a layer the active layer. When a layer is madethe active layer, all subsequently created features are automatically placedon the active layer. Note that a layer containing rules cannot be set as theactive layer.

Understanding Layer StatusWhenever you hide or unhide any layer, you are modifying the layer status forthat model. This new layer status is not automatically saved, even when themodel is saved. Thus, it is necessary for you to save the layer status if youwant it to be retained the next time the model is opened. You can save thelayer status either by clicking View > Visibility > Save Status from the mainmenu. You can also right-click in the layer tree and select Save Status oryou can click Layer > Save Status from the top of the layer tree.If you save a model and forgot to save the layer status, themessage window alerts you with a warning message, as shown here:

You can also reset the layer status to the last saved status by clicking View >Visibility > Reset Status from the main menu, by right-clicking in the layertree and selecting Reset Status, or by clicking Layer > Reset Status fromthe top of the layer tree.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Utilizing Layers in Part ModelsWhen you hide a layer, only the non-solid geometry from thefeature items added to the layer is hidden in the graphicswindow.

• Add most any feature toa layer

• Only non-solid geometryis hidden– Datum features– Surfaces

Hiding a Layer with Default Datums

Hiding a Layer with Holes

Utilizing Layers in Part Models TheoryYou can add most any feature item in a part to a layer. However, when youhide the layer, only the non-solid geometry from the feature items added tothe layer, such as datum features and surface, is hidden. For example, ifyou add a hole feature to a layer and hide the layer, as shown in the lowerfigure, the hole geometry still displays in the graphics window, but the holeaxes associated with the hole feature are hidden.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Layers in Part Models

ScenarioUse layers within part models.

Utilize_Part_Layers layer.prt

Task 1: Use layers within a part model.

1. In the model tree, expandExtrude 4.• Press CTRL, select the fiveinternal datum features, andselect Hide.

2. Click Show > Layer Tree fromthe model tree.

3. Expand the Hidden Items layer.Notice that the five internaldatum features you hid are nowon this layer.

4. Select the01__PRT_DEF_DTM_PLNlayer, right-click, and selectHide.

5. Click Repaint .

6. Right-click in the layer tree andselect New Layer.• Type OTHER_DATUMS asthe Name.

• Select DTM1 and A_1 asitems to add and click OK.

• Right-click on the new layerand select Hide.

• Click Repaint .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. Right-click in the layer tree andselect New Layer.• Type TOP_HOLES as theName.

• Select the four holes on top ofthe model and click OK.


• Click Repaint .

8. In the layer tree, right-click onlayer TOP_HOLES and selectSelect Items.

9. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Suppress.

10. Click OK from the Suppressdialog box.

11. Click Repaint .

12. Click Edit > Resume > ResumeAll.

13. Click Save and click OK.14. Notice the warning in the

message window.


16. Click Save and click OK.17. Notice that there was no warming this time.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Utilizing Layers in Assembly ModelsUnlike parts, you can also add components to layers in anassembly and hide the geometry of those components.

• Add most any feature to a layer– Only non-solid geometry is hidden

• Add assembly components– Solid geometry is hidden

• Cascading layer control available for layers of same name• Placing external items options

Cascading Layer ControlPlacing External Item on a Layer

Hiding a Layer with Assembly Components

Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models TheorySimilar to parts, you can hide non-solid geometry of assembly featuresincluding assembly datum features and surfaces. For example, if youcreate an assembly level hole, add it to a layer, then hide the layer, the holegeometry still displays, while the hole axis is hidden.Unlike parts, you can also add components to layers in an assembly. If youadd components to a layer and then hide the layer, the component geometryhides. In the bottom figure, the nut and bolt components were added to theHARDWARE layer and hidden. Notice that the components are removedfrom the display in the graphics window.

Cascading Layer Control in AssembliesLayers in assemblies can provide you with cascading control. You can controla part level layer from an assembly if the part and assembly both contain alayer of the same name. When this circumstance occurs, you can edit the


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

layer properties and layer display of each component individually, as shownin the upper-left figure.

The layer tree also displays a different layer icon for the commonlayer.

Placing External Items on Assembly LayersYou can place any assembly feature or assembled component onto anassembly layer the same as you can with a part layer in a part. However, ifyou try to place an external item onto an assembly layer, such as a partfeature from an assembled component, or a component belonging to anassembled sub-assembly, the Place External Item dialog box appears,requiring you to make some decisions.• Place component on current layer — If you select a component to place ona layer that is found within a sub-assembly, you can select this option toplace the component on the layer.

• Place item on selected layers — If you select a part level feature froma component, the dialog box displays all the layers found in the part. Itautomatically selects the layer or layers that the feature is already on. Youthen have the option of selecting additional layers that you want the featureadded to. Remember that clicking this option causes the part feature itemto be placed on a part level layer, not the assembly level layer.

• New layer — Enables you to create a new part layer “on-the-fly” that theselected component or part feature is placed on. Again, note that the layeris created in the part that the selected component or feature is selectedfrom.

• Ignore item — Closes the dialog box and does not create any new layers oradd any features or components to existing layers.

• Ignore All — Closes the dialog box and does not create any new layers oradd any features or components to existing layers.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models

ScenarioUse layers in assemblies.

Utilize_Assy_Layers layer.asm

Task 1: Use layers in assemblies.

1. Click Show > Layer Tree fromthe model tree.

2. Expand the Hidden Items layer.Notice that there are threecomponents in this layer thatcontain hidden items.

3. Expand each of thesecomponent layers.

4. Expand the01___PRT_DEF_DTM_PLNlayer.• Press CTRL and selectthe in BOLT.PRT and inLAYER.ASM layers, right-clickand select Hide.

5. Click Repaint .

6. In the layer tree, select the01__ASM_DEF_DTM_PLN,right-click, and select Hide.

7. Click Repaint .

8. Right-click in the layer tree andselect New Layer.• Type HARDWARE as theName.

• Select the NUT.PRT andBOLT.PRT components andclick OK.


• Click Repaint .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

9. Right-click the HARDWARElayer and select Unhide.

10. Click Repaint .

11. In the layer tree, right-click onlayer HARDWARE and selectSelect Items.

12. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Suppress.

13. Click OK from the Suppressdialog box.

14. Click Edit > Resume > ResumeAll.

15. In the layer tree, right-click onlayer HARDWARE and selectSelect Items.

16. Click View > Display Style >Transparent.

17. Click Save and click OK.18. Notice the warning in the

message window.


20. Click Save and click OK.21. Notice that there was no warning this time.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module23Investigating Parent/Child Relationships

Module OverviewIn a model, the order in which features are created and the referencesthat they are provided creates hierarchical relationships. These are calledparent/child relationships and they determine feature interaction.In this module, you learn about parent/child relationships and how to viewinformation about your models.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand parent/child relationships.• View part and assembly parent/child information.• View model, feature, and component information.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Parent/Child RelationshipsThe parent/child relationship is one of the most powerful aspectsof Pro/ENGINEER and parametric modeling in general.

• Defining parent/child relationship• Effects of parent/childrelationships when editing

• How parent/child relationships arecreated

Viewing KEY_HANDLE.PRT Parent/Child Relationship Flowchart

Defining Parent/Child RelationshipsYou can use various types of Pro/ENGINEER features as building blocksin the progressive creation of solid parts. Certain features, by necessity,precede other more dependent features in the design process. Thosedependent features rely on the previously defined features for dimensionaland geometric references. This is known as a parent/child relationship.The parent/child relationship is one of the most powerful aspects ofPro/ENGINEER and parametric modeling in general. This relationship playsan important role in propagating changes across the model to maintainthe design intent. After a parent feature in a part is changed, all childrenare dynamically altered to reflect the changes in the parent feature. If yousuppress or delete a parent feature, Pro/ENGINEER prompts you for anaction pertaining to the related children. You can also minimize the cases ofunnecessary or unintended parent/child relationships.It is therefore essential to reference the desired geometry when creatingfeature dimensions so Pro/ENGINEER can correctly propagate designchanges throughout the model. When working with parent/child relationships,it can be helpful to remember that parent features can exist without childfeatures. However, child features cannot exist without their parents.

Effects of Parent/Child Relationships When EditingConsider how the following editing functionality is affected by parent/childrelationships:• Edit – children of the feature or component update as edits are regenerated.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Edit Definition – enables you to change the parent of the feature orcomponent.

• Suppress/Resume – enables you to remove a feature or component and itschildren from the graphics window and the regeneration cycle.

• Delete – deletes all children of the selected feature or component bydefault. You can also choose to suspend the children, and then redefineeach in turn.

• Hide/Unhide – does not affect parent/child relationships.

How Parent/Child Relationships are CreatedConsider how the following sketching functionality is affected by parent/childrelationships:• Sketch Plane and Orientation Reference Plane — Are parents to thesketch feature.

• Sketcher References — Additional sketcher references, including selectedreferences, dimension references, and constraint references, are parentsto the sketch feature. Constraints and dimensions can create relationshipsbetween the constrained entity and its reference. Hence, the constrainedentity becomes a child of the referenced feature.

Consider how the following feature and tools functionality is affected byparent/child relationships:• Selected References — The edges or surfaces selected for rounds andchamfers become parents to the rounds and chamfers. A depth referenceselected for a sketch-based feature becomes a parent to the sketch-basedfeature. Similarly, an axis of revolution specified for a Revolve featurebecomes a parent to the revolve feature.

• Selected Sketch — An external sketch selected for a sketch-based featuresuch as an Extrude feature becomes a parent to the Extrude feature.A sketch-based feature that has an internal sketch inherits all sketchreferences as its own, including sketch plane, reference plane, references,constraints, and dimensions. A sketch-based feature that containsembedded datum features inherits all datum references as its own.

Consider how the following assembly functionality is affected by parent/childrelationships:• Templates — Like part templates, assembly templates do not createparent/child relationships between the template and the assembly file.

• Constraint References — Existing models that are referenced whenassembling components with constraints or connections become parents tothe components being assembled. Assembly models can also be childrenif they are assembled to other assembly models.

Consider how the following drawings functionality is affected by parent/childrelationships:• Templates — Are similar to part and assembly templates because theydo not create a parent/child relationship between the template and thedrawing file.

• Views — Are children to either the saved views in the part or to thereference orientations selected. Also, drawing views are children to otherviews. For example, a projection view is a child to the general view from


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

which it was projected. Finally, a drawing view is a child to the sourcemodel.

• Details — Are generally children to their respective models. Examples ofdrawing details include dimensions, parametric notes, and BOM tables.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Viewing Part Parent/Child InformationYou can use the Reference Viewer to view parent/childrelationships between features in a part model.

• Current Object• Parents• Children• Highlight entities inmodel:– Features– References

Full Path BetweenFeatures

Reference Viewer Graph

Viewing Part Parent/Child InformationYou can view parent/child relationships of features in a part model by usingthe Reference viewer. You can launch the Reference Viewer by selecting thedesired feature and then either clicking Info > Reference Viewer from themain menu or right-clicking and selecting Info > Reference Viewer.The Reference Viewer displays a graph of parent/child relationships for agiven feature. This graph is broken down into three columns from left to right:• Parents — Displays the Parents for the currently selected feature.• Current Object — Displays the currently selected feature for which youwish to view parent/child relationships.

• Children — Displays the Children of the currently selected feature.The graph of parent/child relationships in the Reference Viewer is interactivewith the model in the graphics window:• You can cursor over the feature node to highlight it on the model.• You can expand the feature nodes to see the list of references that createsthe parent/child relationships. You can also select the reference to see ithighlight in the model. You can also see which feature the reference is aparent to, as it highlights the Reference Type arrow to the proper childfeature node in the graph. In the right figure, datum axis A_7 createsa parent/child relationship between the Hole_2 feature and the Hole_3feature.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Obtaining Full Path Information Between ComponentsYou can display the full parent/child relationship path between two features intree representation by selecting the Reference Type arrow, then right-clickingand selecting Display Full Path. For example, the graph in the left figuredisplays the full chain of parent/child relationships between the Hole 2 andHole 3 features. It shows that datum axis A_7 is a child to Hole 2, which is achild back to the part. It also shows that datum axis A_7 is a parent to Hole 3.

Switching the Current ObjectYou can switch which feature is the current object either by double-clickingthe desired feature node in the graph, right-clicking it and selecting Info >Set as Current, or by clicking Actions > Set as Current from the ReferenceViewer dialog box menu. You can also revert back to the previously selectedCurrent Object by clicking Use Previous at the top of the graph or clickingthe down arrow next to it to view the history of Current Objects and selectingand earlier one.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Viewing Part Parent/Child Information

ScenarioView Parent and Child information for features in a part using the ReferenceViewer.

Part_PC part_pc.prt

Task 1: View Parent and Child information for features using the ReferenceViewer.

1. Select Hole 2 from the model.2. Click Info > Reference Viewer

from the main menu.3. Notice that the reference graph

displays the current object, Hole2, in the middle, that object’sParents on the left, and thatobject’s Children on the right.

4. Cursor over each node in theReference View to highlight therespective feature on the model.

5. Click the down arrows on eachParent node to view its entities.

6. Select each of these entities tohighlight them on the model.

7. Click the down arrows on theCurrent Object to see its entities.

8. In the Reference Viewer, selectExtrude 3, right-click, and selectInfo > Reference Info.

9. Click Close to close theInformation Window.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. In the Reference Viewer dialogbox, select Extrude 3, right-click,and select Info > Feature Info.

11. Click Close to close theInformation Window.

12. In the Reference Viewer, selectthe arrow leading to the Hole3 node, right-click, and selectDisplay Full Path.

13. Notice that Hole 3 refers todatum axis A_7 in Hole 2.

14. Click Close from the ReferenceGraph dialog box.

15. In the Reference Viewer,right-click on the Hole 3 nodeand select Set as Current.• Notice that the graph has nowupdated.

• Notice the Parents specifiedfor the Hole 3 feature.

• Notice the Children specifiedfor the Hole 3 feature.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Viewing Assembly Parent/Child InformationYou can use the Reference Viewer to view parent/childrelationships between components in an assembly.

• Current Object• Parents• Children• Highlight entities inmodel:– Components– Features– References

• Set Current:– Model– Component

Placement– Both

Full Path BetweenComponents

Reference Viewer — Model as Current Object

Reference Viewer — Component Placementas Current Object

Viewing Assembly Parent/Child InformationYou can view parent/child relationships of components or their features inan assembly using the Reference viewer. You can launch the ReferenceViewer by selecting the desired component and then either clicking Info >Reference Viewer from the main menu or right-clicking and selecting Info> Reference Viewer.

Reference Viewer SectionsThe Reference Viewer displays a graph of parent/child relationships for agiven component or that component’s features. This graph is broken downinto three columns from left to right:• Parents — Displays the Parents of the currently selected component.• Current Object — Displays the currently selected component for which youwish to view parent/child relationships.

• Children — Displays the Children of the currently selected component.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Reference Viewer FunctionalityThe Reference Viewer can be utilized in one of three ways, depending uponthe type of information you wish to view:• Model as Current Object — Displays parent/child relationships forreferences in the context of the solid model. In the upper-right figure, theparent/child relationships are displayed in the context of the model. Assuch, the assembly is a child to the part because if the assembly cannotfind that part it will fail.

• Component Placement as Current Object — Displays parent/childrelationships for assembly level, or placement, references. Theserelationships are described in the context of the assembly, as shown in thelower-right figure. Note that not only are the components shown as parentsand children, but the components’ features that create the parent/childrelationships are shown as well.

• Both as Current Object — Displays parent/child relationships for referencesin the context of both the solid model and the assembly level.

The graph of parent/child relationships in the Reference Viewer is interactivewith the assembly in the graphics window:• You can cursor over the component or feature node to highlight it on themodel.

• You can expand the component or feature nodes to see the list ofreferences that creates the parent/child relationships shown. You can alsoselect these references to see them highlight in the model.

Obtaining Full Path Information Between ComponentsYou can display the full parent/child relationship path between twocomponents in tree representation by selecting the Reference Type arrowbetween two components, then right-clicking and selecting Display FullPath, as shown in the left figure. For example, the graph in the left figuredisplays the full chain of parent/child relationships between the BOLT.PRTand PLATE.PRT components. It shows that Surface id 55 is a child to Extrude1 in PLATE.PRT, which is a child of assembly ASSY_PC.ASM. It also showsthat the BOLT.PRT is assembled to Surface id 55 in PLATE.PRT.

Switching the Current ObjectYou can switch which feature or component is the current object eitherby double-clicking the desired feature node or component in the graph,right-clicking it and selecting Info > Set as Current, or by clicking Actions> Set as Current from the Reference Viewer dialog box menu. You canalso revert back to the previously selected Current Object by clicking UsePrevious at the top of the graph or by clicking the down arrow next to it toview the history of Current Objects and selecting an earlier one.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Viewing Assembly Parent/ChildInformation

ScenarioView Parent and Child information for components in an assembly usingthe Reference Viewer.

Assy_PC assy_pc.prt

Task 1: View Parent and Child information for components using theReference Viewer.

1. Select PLATE.PRT from theassembly.

2. Click Info > Reference Viewerfrom the main menu.

3. If necessary, widen both theReference Viewer dialog boxand the Parents column.

4. Click Model As Current Objectfrom the Reference Viewer

dialog box.5. Click the down arrows on the

Children assembly node to viewthe components.

6. Notice the two BOLT.PRTcomponents.

7. Cursor over each of theBOLT.PRT models to highlightthem in the model.

8. Click Component PlacementCurrent from the ReferenceViewer dialog box.

9. Notice that the graph updatesto now show PLATE.PRT as acomponent in the assembly, aswell as its Parents and Children.

10. Cursor over each node tohighlight the respective featuresand components on the model.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. Click the down arrows on eachParent node to expand it andview its referenced entities.

12. Select each of these entities tohighlight them on the model.

13. In the Reference Viewer, selectthe arrow leading to the Comp id47 (BOLT.PRT) node, right-click,and select Display Full Path.• Notice that BOLT.PRT isassembled to a surface inExtrude 1.

• Click Close.

14. In the Reference Viewer,right-click on the Comp id 47(BOLT.PRT) node and selectSet as Current.• Notice that the graph has nowupdated.

• Notice the Parents specifiedfor the Comp id 47(BOLT.PRT) component.

• Cursor over Hole 2 inPLATE.PRT to highlight it.

• The BOLT.PRT is assembledinto this hole. Hence, thecomponent is a child to thehole.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

15. In the Reference Viewer dialogbox, click the arrow next to UsePrevious to expand its history.

16. Select Comp id40 (PLATE.PRT) inASSY_PC.ASM from thedrop-down list.

17. In the Reference Viewer,right-click on the Comp id 50(BOLT.PRT) node and selectSet as Current.• Notice that the graph has nowupdated.

• Notice the Parents specifiedfor the Comp id 50(BOLT.PRT) component.

• Cursor over Hole 3 inTERMINAL.PRT to highlightit.

• This BOLT.PRT is assembledto a different parent than theother BOLT.PRT.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Viewing Model, Feature, and ComponentInformation

You can view the followinginformation:• Feature• Model• Component• Bill of Materials

Viewing Model Information

Viewing BOM Information Viewing Feature Information

Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information TheoryYou can access the menu selections to view model, feature, and componentinformation either through the Infomenu on the main menu or by right-clickingon the appropriate item in the model tree or graphics window.When information is displayed about the item you have selected, the systemhelps you identify that item by displaying the following:• Name — Either the model, component, or feature name of the item youhave selected.

• Feature Number/Component Number — Displays the feature number orcomponent number in the model tree as it is found in the model tree.

• ID — The internal identification number that the system has assigned tothe item you select.

Understanding the Browser Information Window’s ContentsThe information for the item you have selected is displayed in the Browserwindow. The information is categorized, depending upon its type, forexample, Parents, Children, Feature List, and Dimensions.Because information is displayed in the Browser window, there are manyclickable items that can be selected to yield even more information. Thefollowing items can be clicked on in the Browser information window:• Blue Links — Call out the name of something, such as a Feature Name orModel name. Clicking these blue links highlights the item in the model. Anitem that’s name is a series of three dashes simply means that no name isgiven for that particular item.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Dimensions — Dimensions are listed by their internal identification number.Clicking the dimension link highlights the dimension in the model.

• Highlight Feature — Highlights the feature in the model.

• Feature Info — Enables you to jump to information for that feature orcomponent.

Viewing Model and Feature Information in PartsWhen you view the model information for a part, the Browser window displaysthe following information:• Part Name — Displays the name of the model.• Unit Information — Displays the units that the model was created in,including Length, Mass, Force, Time, and Temperature.

• Feature List — Provides a list of features, similar to the model tree.When you view the feature information for a given feature in a model, theBrowser window displays the following information:• Part Name, Feature Number, and Feature ID.• Parents, if any.• Children, if any.• Feature Elements — Displays the elements that comprise the feature.• Layers — Displays any layers that the feature is on, and the layer status.• Feature Dimensions — Displays all dimensions found in the feature.

Viewing Model, Component, and BOM Information in AssembliesWhen you view the model information for a component in an assembly, youmust select whether you want the information for the top level assembly ora component in the assembly. The Browser window displays the followinginformation:• Part Name — Displays the name of the model.• Component Information — Displays a list of the assembled components,only displays when model information is displayed for the top levelassembly.

• Feature List — Provides a list of feature, similar to the model tree.When you view the component information for a component in an assembly,the Component Constraints dialog box displays the assembly constraintsused to assemble the component. You can highlight each constraint pair onthe model by selecting it from the dialog box. The Browser window thendisplays the following:• Component Name, Parent Assembly, Component Number in Parentassembly, Feature Number, and Feature ID.

• Parents List — Any components in the assembly which are parents.• Children List — Any components in the assembly which are children.When you view the Bill of Materials information for an assembly, the Browserwindow displays the components found in the assembly, and their quantities.You must specify whether the BOM is to be created for the Top Levelassembly or a Sub-assembly.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Viewing Model, Feature, and ComponentInformation

ScenarioView information about assemblies and parts.

View_Info assy_info.asm

Task 1: View assembly information using Pro/ENGINEER’s tools.

1. Click Info > Model from themain menu.

2. Click Apply > Close from theModel Info dialog box.

3. View the information thatdisplays in the Browser.

4. Close the Browser.

5. Click Info > Component fromthe main menu.

6. Select PLATE.PRT from themodel tree.

7. Notice the componentconstraints used to assemblethis component. Select theconstraints in the dialog box andnotice that the pair highlights inthe model.

8. Click Apply > Close from theComponent Constraints dialogbox to display the componentinfo for PLATE.PRT.

9. Click Info > Bill of Materialsfrom the main menu.

10. Verify that Top Level is selectedin the BOM dialog box and clickOK.

11. Notice that there are 2 BOLT.PRTcomponents in the assembly.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: View part information using Pro/ENGINEER’s tools.

1. In the model tree, right-clickPART_INFO.PRT and selectOpen.

2. Click Info > Model from themain menu.

3. Notice the model information forthe model.

4. Click Info > Feature from themain menu.

5. Select Hole 2 from the modeltree.

6. Collapse the model tree andleave the Feature info windowopen.

7. Arrange the model and Browserwindow so both can be seen inthe graphics window.

8. Scroll the Feature info windowdown to the Feature’sDimensions section.

9. Select each of the dimensions tohighlight them in the model.

10. Click Repaint .

11. Scroll the Feature info windowup to the Parents section.

12. Click the link for Extrude 3.

13. Click Repaint .

14. In the Children section of theFeature info, click the Hole 3link.

15. Click Repaint .

16. Click Feature Info next toChamfer 1.

17. Notice that the Feature info forthe chamfer now displays. Alsonotice that Hole 3 is a parent tothe chamfer.

18. Click Hole 3 to highlight it.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module24Capturing and Managing Design Intent

Module OverviewNow that you understand parent/child relationships, you can learn how toproperly capture and manage design intent in models. In this module, youlearn the tools available for modifying and capturing your design intent withinall aspects of the modeling process. You also become more knowledgeableabout selecting references that capture your design intent.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Handle the children of deleted and suppressed items.• Reorder and insert features.• Redefine features and Sketches.• Capture design intent in Sketches, features, parts, and assemblies.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Handling Children of Deleted and SuppressedItemsIn Pro/ENGINEER, you have three options available for how tohandle the children of suppressed or deleted items.

Child handling options include:• Suppress/Delete• Suspend• Freeze

Children Handling Dialog Box

Suspending Child Rounds

Handling a Frozen Child Component

Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items TheoryIf you try to suppress or delete an item that has children, the system highlightsthese child items in green. In the upper-left figure, the piston component isbeing suppressed, and the system highlights the piston pin and piston ringin green because they are children of the piston. In the upper-right figure,the two rounds highlighted in green are children of the round that is beingsuppressed.The system also displays a Delete or Suppress dialog box. When you clickOptions within this dialog box, the system displays the Children Handlingdialog box, as shown in the upper-left figure. The Children Handling dialogbox displays each of the child items highlighted in green. You have threedifferent options available for how to handle these children, and each childcan be handled independently:• Suppress/Delete — When suppressing a parent you can choose to alsosuppress a child item, and when deleting a parent you can choose to alsodelete a child item. If this is the desired option for all child items, you canclick OK from the original Suppress or Delete dialog box without having toconsider the options available in the Children Handling dialog box.

• Suspend — Suppresses or deletes the parent anyway, thus suspendingthe child item’s regeneration temporarily. Once the parent is suppressed or


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

deleted, the suspended child item regenerates. At this point, one of twothings will happen to the child item:– The child item may regenerate successfully. However, if the child

item is a feature, it may have different geometry; if the child item is acomponent, it may be in a different position. In the upper-right figure,the two round children were suspended. After the parent round wassuppressed, these two child rounds successfully regenerated, althoughtheir geometry is different.

– The child item may not regenerate successfully. If this occursPro/ENGINEER enters Resolve mode. The Resolve Environmentenables you to fix the issue by modifying the child item, suppressingthe child item, deleting the child item, or modifying another feature orpart. You can also Undo Changes.

• Freeze — The Freeze option is available only for assembly components.Once the parent component is suppressed or deleted, the child componentis “frozen,” or locked in 3-D space. Frozen components display in themodel tree with a special icon preceding their name. In the left image of thelower figure, the PISTON_PIN.PRT component is frozen. In addition, anychild components of the frozen component display in the model tree with aslightly different icon that includes a small square.

Frozen components must be redefined and the missing assemblyplacement references must be replaced with valid references fromcomponents that still remain in the assembly. Once this is done, thecomponent will “thaw,” meaning that it will no longer be frozen in theassembly, as shown in the lower figure.

Another method to “unthaw” frozen components temporarily is todelete the placement constraint that is missing references andadd a Fix constraint, which “fixes” the component in its currentorientation but keeps it fully constrained.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Handling Children of Deleted andSuppressed Items

ScenarioHandle the children of deleted and suppressed items.

Child_Del-Supp child_handling.asm

Task 1: Suppress PISTON.PRT and redefine PISTON_PIN.PRT afterit becomes frozen.

1. Display suppressed items in themodel tree if necessary.

2. Select PISTON.PRT, right-click,and select Delete.

3. Notice that PISTON_PIN.PRTand PISTON_RING.PRT willalso be deleted because theyare children.


5. Click Undo .

6. Select the PISTON.PRT, right-click, and select Suppress.7. Again, notice that the PISTON_PIN.PRT and PISTON_RING.PRT

are children and will therefore also be suppressed.

8. In the Suppress dialog box, clickOptions.• Edit the Status ofPISTON_PIN.PRT to Freeze,leaving PISTON_RING.PRTto be suppressed.

• Click OK.

9. Notice the suppressedcomponents and the freezesymbol on PISTON_PIN.PRT.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

10. Edit the definition ofPISTON_PIN.PRT.

11. If necessary, select the Insertconstraint to activate it.• Select the inner hole surfaceon CONNECTING_ROD.PRTto insert the pin into. The pinwas formerly inserted into thepiston.

12. Click Complete Component .13. Notice that PISTON_PIN.PRT

has “thawed.” That is, thecomponent is no longer frozenin the assembly.

Task 2: Suppress SIDE_ROUND and suspend the resulting child rounds.

1. SelectCONNECTING_ROD.PRT,right-click, and select Open.

2. Right-click on SIDE_ROUNDand select Delete.

3. Notice the two child roundfeatures.


5. Click Undo .

6. Select SIDE_ROUND,right-click, and select Suppress.

7. Again, notice that the childrounds will also be suppressed.

8. In the Suppress dialog box, clickOptions.• Edit the Status of both Roundids to Suspend .

• Click OK.

9. Notice the geometry changesto the model becauseSIDE_ROUND is no longerpresent.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Reordering FeaturesYou can reorder features in the model tree by dragging themto a new location.

• 1) Original model– Through All hole

• 2) Protrusion added– Hole no longer meets

design intent• 3) Hole reordered– Hole again meets

design intent2) Protrusion Added

1) Original Model

3) Hole Reordered

Reordering Features TheoryWhen regenerating a model, Pro/ENGINEER regenerates features one at atime, following the order in which they are displayed in the model tree. As youcreate new features, they are added to the bottom of the list in the model tree.The order of features is the sequence in which features are displayed inthe model tree. You can drag a feature within the model tree to place it justafter its parent, even though you may have added several features to it afterthe parent was created. Since you must regenerate a parent before youregenerate its children, you cannot reorder a parent to be after its children;nor can you reorder a child to be before its parents.Feature order can affect the geometry of a model. When a feature is createdit can only add or remove material from the model as the model exists at thatpoint in time. For example, in the lower-left figure the hole feature’s depth isThrough All, which drills the hole through the unseen side of the block. If youadd an additional protrusion to the block, you would need to reorder the holeafter this new protrusion if you want to retain its Through All design intent.Then the Through All depth would include the new protrusion and drill thehole through the entire block.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Reordering Features

ScenarioReorder features in a part model.

Reorder reorder.prt

Task 1: Reorder features in a part model.

1. Locate Hole 1 in the model tree.2. Notice its position in the feature

order.

3. Edit the definition of Hole 1.• Select the Shape tab.• Notice the hole depth isThrough All.


4. Start the Extrude Tool andselect Sketch 2.• Edit the depth to 6.• Click Complete Feature .

5. Select Hole 1.6. Notice that the hole does not

appear to have a depth ofThrough All, but recall that itdoes have a depth of ThroughAll at the time of creation.

A feature can onlyadd/remove material fromthe model as the modelexists at the point in time inwhich the feature is created.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. In the model tree, click and dragHole 1 to reorder it after Extrude2.

8. Select Hole 1.9. Just as before, the hole still

removes material from themodel, but because the extrudefeature now occurs before thehole feature, it removes materialThrough All.

10. Start the Shell Tool .11. Select the front face to remove it.12. Edit the thickness to 0.50.13. Click Complete Feature .

14. Notice the “boss” around thehole feature.

15. In the model tree, click and dragShell 1 to reorder it before Hole1.

16. Notice that the shell feature nowhollows out the entire model.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Inserting FeaturesYou can insert new features or components in the model treewhere desired.

• 1) Original model– One protrusion– Shell has square edge

• 2) Insert mode activated– Protrusion mirrored,

rounds created beforeshell

• 3) Insert mode cancelled– Hole on left goes

through mirroredprotrusion

– Shell hollows outmirrored protrusionand rounds

1) Original Model

2) Insert Mode Activated

3) Insert Mode Cancelled

Inserting Features TheoryThe model tree insertion indicator, shown in the model tree as InsertIndicator , indicates where features are inserted upon creation. By default,its position is always after all items listed in the model tree. You may drag ithigher or lower in the model tree to insert features between other features inthe tree. When you move the insert indicator, you enter Insert Mode and themodel is rolled backward or forward in its regeneration in response to its newposition, and all features update in the graphics window. If a feature is locatedbefore the indicator, then it is displayed in the graphics window and processedduring regeneration. If a feature lies after the indicator, then it is temporarilysuppressed. Thus, it is not regenerated or shown in the graphics window.

In models containing hundreds of features, it can be cumbersome todrag the insert indicator up to after one of the first features. Anotherway to activate Insert Mode is to click Edit > Feature Operationsfrom the main menu, click Insert Mode > Activate from the menumanager, and select the feature to insert after.

You can exit Insert Mode and return the insert indicator to its defaultlocation at the bottom of the model tree by cursoring over it, right-clicking,


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

and selecting Cancel. You are then prompted to resume the features yousuppressed when you activated Insert mode. When you choose to resumethem, Pro/ENGINEER places them after the inserted features.For example, the model in the figures is a cast metal cover to be used ona toy for children. However, a design change is needed to make anotherprotrusion with a rounded notch in the middle. Hence, we need to mirror theexisting protrusion and round the edges of the resulting notch. Additionally,these rounded edges should also be on the inside of the part to enable easierextraction from the cast.As shown in the part’s model tree, you can delete and recreate the shelland hole features after creating the necessary protrusion and rounds.Alternatively, you can use Insert mode to add the protrusion and roundfeatures before the Shell feature. Notice that this includes the round featurein the shell, which accomplishes the task of having round edges on theinside of the part.

Insert Mode works the same waywhen you are in an assembly.You may drag the Insert Indicatorhigher or lower in the model treeto insert components betweenother components in the tree.Again, when you move the insertindicator, you enter Insert Mode andthe assembly is rolled backwardor forward in its regeneration inresponse to its new position, and allcomponents update in the graphicswindow.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Inserting Features

ScenarioInsert new features in a part model.

Insert insert.prt

Task 1: Insert new features in a part model.

1. Select each of the five solidfeatures in the model tree tohighlight them in the graphicswindow.

2. In the model tree, click and dragthe Insert Indicator to beforeShell 1.

3. Notice the features that aresuppressed and therefore notcurrently regenerated.

4. Select Extrude 2 and start theMirror Tool .• Select datum plane RIGHT.• Click Complete Feature .

5. Click Named View List andselect 3D-2.

6. Start the Round Tool , pressCTRL, and select both edges ofthe notch bottom.• Right-click and select FullRound.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

7. Start the Round Tool , pressCTRL, and select a vertical edgeon the front and back of thenotch.• Edit the radius to 1.• Click Complete Feature .

8. In the model tree, select theInsert Indicator , right-click,and select Cancel.

9. Read the message in themessage window, then pressENTER to accept the defaultvalue of Yes.

10. Click Named View List andselect 3D-1.

11. Notice the hole on the leftthat goes through the mirroredprotrusion.

12. Also notice that the shell nowhollows out both the mirroredprotrusion and the newly insertedrounds.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Redefining Features and SketchesEdit Definition provides you with complete control of a feature.

Edit Definition• Datum Features• Feature Tools• Sketch Features• Pre-WildfireFeatures

Complete control of afeature• Feature Type• Size• Shape• Location• Options• References

Various Edit Definition Options

Feature Dashboard

Redefining Features and Sketches TheoryIn Pro/ENGINEER, altering the parents of a feature or sketch can drasticallyaffect the outcome of the resulting geometry. To change a parent/childrelationship, the easiest method is to use the Edit Definition option. Thisoption enables you to reselect your references using dialog boxes, thedashboard, or menu options depending on the feature you are redefining. Youcan redefine a feature or sketch by selecting it, and then either right-clickingand selecting Edit Definition, or clicking Edit > Definition from the mainmenu.For example, if you redefine a datum feature, you select new referencesusing a dialog box. If you redefine a Sketch feature, you can use the Sketchdialog box to change its placement. You can also use the References dialogbox to change references internal to the sketch. For most solid features, youcan use the dashboard to edit references; for example, selecting a differentsketch for an extrude, or selecting different edges for a round.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Controlling Features By Using Edit DefinitionThe Edit Definition functionality provides you with complete control over afeature within its tool. Consider the control that Edit Definition provides in thefollowing areas:• Feature Type — You can switch the feature type for many features. Forexample, you can edit a feature to change it from a solid feature to asurface feature.

• Size — You can increase or decrease the size of many features. Forexample, you can edit the radius value of a round feature.

• Shape — You can edit the resulting geometry shape of a model. Forexample, you can edit a feature’s Sketch, depth or angle value, or switchthe external sketch used.

• Location — You can edit the location of a feature. For example, you canedit the sketching plane specified for a Sketch feature which changes thelocation of the resulting sketch feature and therefore any features usingthat Sketch.

• Options — You can edit numerous options of a feature. For example, youcan edit the depth of a hole from Blind to Through All, or you can add anadditional side for material to be removed.

• References (Parents) — You can edit the parent references to a feature.For example, you can switch which external sketch is used in the creationof a feature, or you can specify different references to different featureswithin the Sketch References dialog box.

Following the Edit Definition WorkflowWhen you redefine, or edit the definition of, a feature or sketch, the followingoccurs:• The model regenerates back to the feature being redefined. The modeltree reflects that this has happened by removing all features that occurafter the feature being redefined. In addition, the feature being redefineddisplays a yellow icon preceding its name in the model tree, as shownhere:

• Most features being redefined display in their yellow dynamic preview color.In this state, the feature’s drag handles are displayed, enabling you to edittheir respective values. Plus the on-screen flip arrows are displayed.

• The feature’s GUI is presented. Depending upon the feature beingredefined, this could be either a dialog box or the dashboard. The GUI ordialog boxes enable you to make changes to the feature.

• Most features, once changes have been made, can be previewed solid ifdesired. This option regenerates the feature to determine whether thechanges you have made are valid.

• Once you have completed the feature, it regenerates. After this occurs, thechild features also regenerate to reflect the changes made to their parent.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Redefining Features and Sketches

ScenarioRedefine features and sketches in a part model.

Redefine redefine.prt

Task 1: Redefine features and sketches in a part model.

1. Edit the definition of RING_CUT.2. Select the Placement tab, and

notice that the Sketch is Internal.• Click Edit.

3. Edit the 1.5 dimension to -1.5.4. Click Done Section .


6. Click Remove Material totoggle it off.

7. Drag the handle from 360 to 75.8. Click Complete Feature9. Click Undo .

10. Click Named View List andselect FRONT.

11. Edit the definition ofSKIRT_CUT.

12. Select the Placement tab, andnotice that the Sketch is externalto the extrude feature.• Select an alternate externalsketch Sketch 2, from themodel tree.

13. Click Complete Feature .14. Notice the new skirt shape.15. Click Undo .


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly


17. Click Sketch Setup .18. In the graphics window,

right-click and select Placement.19. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.

20. Select datum plane RIGHTfrom the model tree as the newsketching plane.


22. Click Sketch from the Sketchdialog box.


Orientation.25. The SKIRT_CUT has been

rotated 90 degrees.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Capturing Design Intent in SketchesYou must carefully consider how to define a sketch because somany other features use sketches in their creation.

• Considerations include:– Sketch/Reference plane

selection– Reference selection– Dimension scheme– Constraints– Sketched geometry type

• Open sketch results may differfrom closed sketch results

Closed Sketch Design IntentExamples

Captured Design IntentOpen Sketch Design Intent

Examples

Capturing Design Intent in Sketches TheoryDesign intent is captured in Sketcher by selecting references and bysketching, constraining, and dimensioning entities. It is important to capturedesign intent in sketches because so many other features build up fromsketches. Consequently, you must carefully consider how to define a sketchand then capture it. You can always modify the sketch’s design intent, butit is much easier to do so when you have planned for what changes mayoccur later on.

Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in SketchesWhen you create a new sketch in Pro/ENGINEER consider the optionsavailable for capturing design intent in each of the following areas, and someof the examples listed. The decisions you make in these areas at the time ofsketch creation can affect the overall model downstream when you want tomake a change to it.• Sketch/Reference Plane — Should these selected references be defaultdatum planes or a construction plane created with an adjustable offset orangle? Perhaps the sketch plane should be on a surface created fromanother feature.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• References — Remember that when you select additional sketchingreferences or dimension to existing geometry you are selecting the parentsfor your sketch. If the references you select update, so does the sketch.Consider whether you want your sketcher references to be default datumsor another feature. In the lower-left figure, the sketch feature referencesthe angled surface of existing geometry, so if that angled surface updates,so will the sketch. Additionally, the sketch references the existing hole.Therefore, if the hole location updates, the sketch’s location must update.

• Dimensioning scheme — When dimensioning circles and arcs, should thedimension be a radius or diameter? Should the sketch be dimensioned withan X-Y scheme or a radius-angle scheme? Deciding whether the sketchmust pivot can help you determine which scheme to use. Consider whichdimensions you might want to modify at a later time if the design changes.

• Constraints — You must decide which constraints to use, and whichreference to constrain to because you are again creating parents whenselecting constraint references. How should the sketch entities react toeach other? Should they be parallel, perpendicular, or tangent? Should thesketch be symmetrical? If so, you will need a centerline. Do you want arcand circle centers to remain lined up? In the lower-left figure, the sketch’sconstruction line between each arc center is constrained to be parallel tothe angled surface. Therefore, if the angle of the existing surface changes,so too must the angle of the sketch. Similarly, if the existing hole diameteris changed, this sketch’s upper arc diameter will also change because it isconstrained to be of equal radius.

• Sketched geometry type — When sketching arcs, for example, you shoulduse the arc type that gets you your desired design intent. Remember touse construction geometry or sketched datum points to your advantage.

Open Sketches Versus Closed SketchesThere are two different techniques of creating sketch features:• Closed-section sketch - The sketched geometry forms a closed loop.• Open-section sketch - The sketch geometry does not form a closed loop.Closed-section sketches are the more robust of the two options and shouldtherefore be used whenever possible. However, your desired design intentshould ultimately dictate which type of sketch section is created. Theyellow extrude features shown in the upper-right figure are created fromclosed-section sketches, whereas the yellow extrude features created in thelower-right figure are created from open-section sketches. The geometrycreated by using an open-section sketch causes the resulting geometry tofollow the 3-D contour of a surface. The endpoints of the open-section sketchmust be constrained to the surface edge. The geometry created by using theclosed-section sketches ignores the 3-D contour of the surface and simplyextends the geometry upward.There are two specific rules regarding open-section versus closed-sectionsketches when it comes to feature requirements:• Rib features require an open-section sketch.• You must create the first extrude or revolve feature by using aclosed-section sketch.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Capturing Design Intent in FeaturesCapture design intent in your model’s features by decidingwhich feature options to use.

Internal Versus External Sketches

• Option Considerationsinclude:– Depth– Solid/Thin– Round/Chamfer

type– Hole type– Sketch or select

sweep trajectory• Internal versusexternal sketches

• Embedded datumfeatures

Embedded Datum Features

Capturing Design Intent in Features TheoryDesign intent is captured in Features by specifying the correct feature andits options. As a result, you must carefully consider which feature options tospecify to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify thefeature’s design intent, but it is much easier to do so when you have plannedfor what changes may occur later on.

Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in FeaturesWhen you create a new feature in Pro/ENGINEER, consider the optionsavailable for capturing design intent in each of the following areas. Thedecisions you make in these areas at the time of feature creation can affectthe overall model downstream when you want to make a change to it.• Depth — When creating an extrude feature, determine whether the depthshould be symmetric or defined with 2-side blind depth values. Determinewhether the depth be defined to a reference. If so, remember that thereference you select becomes a parent to the feature. Or should the depthbe Through All?


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Solid or Thin — Determine whether the feature you create should be a solidfeature in which you create a cut through, or should it be a thin feature witha defined thickness? If so, which side?

• Round/Chamfer type — Determine which type of chamfer best capturesyour design intent. Is it better to use a 45 x D or a D x D? Again,considering how the design may change in the future helps you decide.Should the round be created by selecting the edge or by selecting the twosurfaces in your model? If you think the design may change so the edgedisappears, then use the two surfaces.

• Hole type — Determine which dimensioning scheme works better in yourdesign. To the tip or to the shoulder of the hole?

• Sketch trajectory or select trajectory —When creating a sweep feature, youmust decide whether to select the sweep trajectory from existing geometryor to sketch it. Deciding whether you want the trajectory to be independentfrom the feature or built-in can help you decide.

• Internal versus external sketches — In the upper figure, notice that featureExtrude 2 was created using an external sketch, but feature Extrude 3was created using an internal sketch. Which sketch you ultimately use forfeature creation depends upon these factors:– You must use an internal sketch to create Axis Points in the sketch.– Internal sketches reduce the clutter in the model tree. As you can see in

the upper figure, there are two additional model tree entries for Sketches1 and 2 due to the fact that these were external sketches. Had Extrude1 and Extrude 2 been created with internal sketches, neither of theseentities would reside in the model tree.

– External sketches come in handy if you want to try multiple designalternatives for a feature. You can select alternate external sketches totry these design alternatives.

• Embedded datum features — Embedded datum features work well if youwant to edit the feature as all one feature. This also simplifies the tree andreduces the display clutter. In the lower figure Extrude 4 was created usingfive embedded datum features. However, embedded datum features donot work so well if you want to reuse those datums for other features.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Capturing Design Intent in PartsCapture design intent in parts with proper planning, featureselection, and feature order.

• Planning model design– 80/20 Rule

• Feature type• Feature order• Parent/child effects

Following the 80/20 Rule

Feature Order Example 1 Feature Order Example 2

Capturing Design Intent in Parts TheoryDesign intent is captured in Parts by properly planning your model designand specifying which features to use, as well as their order. Often thesame geometry result can be achieved by creating many different types orcombinations of features. As a result, you must carefully consider whichfeatures to use to properly capture your design intent. You can always modifythe part’s design intent, but it is much easier to do so when you have plannedfor what changes may occur later on.

Planning You Model DesignBefore you begin your new part model you should plan its design. As ageneral guideline, you should follow the 80/20 rule, which states that 80percent of the overall shape of the model should typically be created inthe initial 20 percent of the model’s features. The upper-right figure is anillustration of the 80/20 rule. The left image shows only the first four extrudefeatures of the muffler, while the right image displays the completed model.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Even though only the first four features are displayed, roughly 80 percentof the overall model shape is there.Here are some guidelines that you can follow when planning your part modeldesign.• Start with the feature that determines the overall size and shape of themodel. This is your base feature. The left image of the upper-right figureshows the first four extrude features of a muffler model. The first feature isan extruded rectangle, which is the base feature of this model.

• Create major geometry features that add or remove material from yourmodel. In left image of the upper-right figure, the extruded cut along thefront face of the muffler is an example of this type of major geometryfeature.

• Create minor geometry features that add or remove material. Theseinclude smaller features such as protrusions, cuts, bosses, ribs, or holes.In the upper-right figure, the smaller extruded cuts are an example ofthis type of feature in the left image, and the holes in the right image areanother example.

• Finally, add finishing features such as rounds and chamfers. In the rightimage of the upper-right figure, the rounds and shell are both finishingfeatures.

Deciding Upon Feature Type and OrderOften the same geometry result can be achieved by creating many differenttypes or combinations of features. It is up to you to decide how best tocreate the geometry so when the design is modified later on it updates in apredictable manner. For example, an extrude is common, but what if any ofthe following situations arise:• You need the profile to change along the extrude length later in the design— In this case, a blend feature may be the better option. You could initiallycreate the blend straight back, and edit the individual blend sections ata later time.

• The path of extrusion may change — In this case, a sweep may be thebetter option. You could initially create a straight sweep trajectory, andmodify it at a later time.

• You need the feature to rotate — In this case, a revolve may be the betteroption.

The feature order also has an impact later on if the design is modified. In thebottom figures, the resulting geometry is identical, but was created differently.In the left figure, the first feature extrudes the entire length, with subsequentfeatures adding or removing material. In the right figure, three extrudes werestacked up in series, with the overall length being created as the sum of thethree features. If the length must be modified later, it is easier to modify thelength of the design in the left figure.

Thinking About Parent/Child EffectsIt is important that you do not tie too many features together with parent/childrelationships if not necessary. Rather, use default datum planes. These arecommon references and you don’t have to worry about them being deleted.Using default datums also minimizes unwanted parent/child relationships.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Capturing Design Intent in AssembliesCapture design intent in assemblies by deciding which assemblytype to use, which component is assembled first, and whichconstraints are used during the assembly process.

Considerations include:• Assembly type– Static– Dynamic– Mixture

• Assembly/Sub-assemblystructure

• Choice of base model• Assembly references• Fit/Interference issues

Assembly Structure Examples

Vice Assembly

Capturing Design Intent in AssembliesDesign intent is captured in assemblies by specifying which assembly type touse, the assembly/sub-assembly structure, choice of base model, assemblyreferences used, and any fit or interference issues. As a result, you mustcarefully consider how to create your assembly to properly capture yourdesign intent. You can always modify the assembly’s design intent, but it ismuch easier to do so when you have planned for what changes may occurlater on.

Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in AssembliesWhen you create a new assembly in Pro/ENGINEER, consider the optionsavailable for capturing design intent in each of the following areas. Thedecisions you make in these areas at the time of feature creation can affectthe overall assembly model later on when you want to make a change.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• Assembly type — There are three different types of assemblies that youcan create in Pro/ENGINEER. Create the assembly type that will best fityour needs:– Static — Assemblies are created using constraints. If you choose to

create this type of assembly, determine whether some componentsneed angular or linear offsets. If so, remember to create the properconstraint types.

– Dynamic — Assemblies are created using connections. Determinewhether your assembly needs to contain components that can bedynamically moved. If so, a dynamic assembly with pin, slider, andcylinder connections may be your best option.

– Mixture — Assemblies are created with both static and dynamiccomponents.

• Assembly/Sub-assembly Structure — There are usually multiple waysto assemble components and still achieve the same assembly result.In the upper figure, notice that in one assembly example component Dis assembled into the sub-assembly SUB, while in the other example itis assembled directly to the top level. The end result may appear thesame, but may cause the assemblies to behave differently should anothercomponent’s placement be modified.

• Choice of base model — The base model is the first component assembledinto the assembly. It is important to consider which component you chooseas the base model because if all other models reference this componentit becomes difficult to remove the base model.

• Assembly references used — Remember that the assembly references youselect for placing components creates parent/child relationships betweenthese components. Make sure to select references that are more robust ifpossible, such as selecting surfaces over edges.

• Fit or interference issues — Determine what happens when you assembleall your components into the assembly and you find you have interferenceor fit issues. Remember that you can always activate components to editthem within the context of the assembly. Once the top level assemblyis activated and regenerated, the other components update. Be carefulwhen creating features in components in an assembly because you mayinadvertently select a reference from a different component, and thiscreates a parent/child relationship both between the two components andbetween the component and the assembly.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module25Resolving Failures and Seeking Help

Module OverviewWhen using features as the "building blocks" of design models, youcreate several references and parent/child relationships between them.Regeneration failures occur when Pro/ENGINEER cannot successfullyresolve a parent/child relationship, geometric situation, or a missing referencein a part or assembly model. Because the failure can occur for differentreasons, you need to be able to diagnose the problem in order to correct it.In this module, you learn the different reasons why models fail and the toolsand diagnostics available in order to fix those failing models.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand Resolve mode theory and Tools.• Analyze geometry, open-section, and missing part references failures.• Analyze missing component failures, missing component reference failures,and invalid assembly constraint failures.

• Learn to use Pro/ENGINEER’s help system.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Understanding Resolve Mode Theory and ToolsWhen a model fails regeneration the system enters Resolvemode, which provides tools and diagnostics to help you resolveor prevent the problem.

Failures occur due to:• Invalid/Impossible geometry• Missing/Broken references• Missing modelsTools and diagnostics:• Resolve menu– Undo Changes– Investigate– Quick Fix– Fix Model

• Failure Diagnostics window Resolve Menu

Failure Diagnostics Window

Understanding Resolve Mode TheoryWhen Pro/ENGINEER regenerates a model, it recreates the model featureby feature, in the order in which each feature was created, and according tothe hierarchy of the parent/child relationship between features. Occasionallyduring the model regeneration a problem occurs that causes the model to failregeneration. Regeneration can fail for any of the following reasons:• Invalid or impossible geometry• Missing or broken references between parent/child relationships• Missing modelsThe fact that a model fails regeneration is beneficial, as you would not wantto hand off problematic models.If a model fails regeneration, Pro/ENGINEER attempts to provide criticalinformation in the form of tools and diagnostics so you can decide whatsteps you need to take to resolve or prevent the problem. This is knownas Resolve mode.

The Resolve Mode EnvironmentWhen Pro/ENGINEER enters Resolve mode, the following occurs:• You cannot save the model until the problem is resolved.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

• The failing feature and all subsequent features remain unregenerated.• The message window displays a message about the failure.• The Failure Diagnostics window appears, providing you with informationabout the failing feature. The Failure Diagnostics window is shown in thelower figure.

• The resolve menu displays in the menu manager. The resolve menu usesthe traditional interface of the menu manager, and has not been updatedto the conventional Wildfire interface. The resolve menu is shown in theupper figure.

Resolve Menu ToolThe Resolve menu is one tool available for resolving or preventing theregeneration problem that has occurred, and contains five different options:• Undo Changes — Undo all the changes that caused the failure.• Current Model/Backup Model — For both Investigating and fixingthe problem, you can choose to work on the current (failed) modelor the backup model. The backup model shows all features in theirpre-regenerated state, and can be used to modify or restore dimensions ofthe features that are not displayed in the current (failed) model. You cantoggle back and forth between the current and backup model.

• Investigate — Investigate the cause of the model failure. You can list thechanges made to items, show every object referenced by the failed feature,report geometrical misalignments found during the last regeneration, androll the model back to a specified feature.

• Quick Fix — Enables you to fix the failing feature by performing standardoperations including Redefine, Reroute, Suppress, Clip Suppress, andDelete. Reroute enables you to reroute the failing feature’s references toprevent failures in subsequent features. Clip Suppress suppresses not onlythe failing feature, but all subsequent features, too.

• Fix Model — Enables you to fix other features in the model to fix thefailing feature. Using fix model enables you to create, delete, suppress, orredefine other features. It also enables you to modify the dimensions ofthe other non-failing features in the model, as well as restore all modifieddimensions to their previous values.

You must click Regenerate in the menu manager after a changeis made to the model. The icon is not found since the resolvemenu is contained in the menu manager.

Failure Diagnostics WindowThe Failure Diagnostics window is the second main tool available forresolving or preventing the regeneration problem that has occurred. Itdisplays the following options:• Overview — Displays help information on the various Resolve mode tools.• Feature Info — Displays the Feature Information for the failing featurein the Browser.

• Resolve Hints — If a resolve hint exists, the system displays this link. Clickthe link for a suggestion on how to fix the problem.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Geometry FailuresGeometry failures are caused either by geometry that has beenmade invalid, or is impossible to create.

Round Radius Too Large

Invalid geometry examples:• Round radii too small or too large• Blend start points mismatch• Sweep Radii Rule• Extrude To Next

Sweep Radius Section RadiusComparison Blend Start Points Mismatch

Analyzing Geometry Failures TheoryWhen a feature fails due to invalid or impossible geometry, Pro/ENGINEERreports this error in the message window and failure diagnostics windowas, “could not construct feature geometry.” Some examples of invalid orimpossible geometry include:• Round radii too small or too large — If a round radius becomes too big forthe geometry that is being rounded then it will fail. In the upper-right figure,the round in the left image previews properly because it is small enoughto fit on the geometry. In the right image the round becomes too large forthe size of the geometry and cannot be created. Hence, the yellow roundpreview is no longer available.

• Blend start points mismatch — If the start points between blend sectionsbecome mismatched by too high an angle, the resulting geometry twistsupon itself, which cannot occur. In the lower-right figure, the blend sectionstart points are mismatched by 90 degrees and the resulting geometrytwists. If the start points are mismatched by 180 degrees, the feature fails.

• Sweep radii — If a circular section of radius T is swept along a curvedtrajectory of radius R, the radius R must be greater than or equal to radiusT or else the resulting geometry will overlap, resulting in invalid geometry.In the lower-left figure, the circular section is swept along the curvedtrajectory, resulting in the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, thered cross-section lines in the FRONT view show that the geometry doesnot overlap. Hence, it is valid and R≥T. In the right image, however, the


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

cross-section radius T has grown, as shown by the red cross-section lines.As a result, the cross-section lines overlap, and thus the geometry overlaps.So the rule of R≥T is not valid, and the geometry cannot be created.

• Extrude To Next — If a feature is extruded to a depth of To Next, thefeature must actually pass through the selected reference. If it does not,the feature fails because the geometry cannot be created.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Geometry Failures

ScenarioResolve geometry failures in a part model.

Part_Invalid-Geom geom-failure.prt

Task 1: Resolve geometry failures in a part model by fixing the failingfeature.

1. In the model tree, select theTRAJ_1, TRAJ_2, and SWEEPfeatures to highlight them in thegraphics window.

The smallest trajectoryradius is 2, so R=2. Thesweep geometry diameteris 3, so T=1.5. Currently,R≥T.

2. Click Named View List andselect FRONT.

3. Zoom in on the right end of themodel.

4. In the model tree, right-clickTRAJ_2 and select Edit.

5. Edit the radius value from 2 to 1.

6. Click Regenerate .7. The model fails to regenerate with the edit made.8. Click Undo Changes > Confirm from the menu manager to exit

Resolve mode.

9. In the model tree, right-clickTRAJ_2 and select Edit.

10. Edit the radius value from 2 to1 again and click Regenerate

.11. Click Feature Info from the

Failure Diagnostics dialog box.12. Notice that it is feature SWEEP

failing, not TRAJ_2.13. Close the Browser.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

14. Click Investigate > ListChanges from the menumanager.

15. Notice that editing the trajectoryradius to 1 violated the R≥T rule.

16. Click Close from the InformationWindow dialog box.

17. Click Quick Fix > Redefine> Confirm from the menumanager to enable work on thefailed feature.

18. Click Section > Define from theProtrusion dialog box.

19. Edit the section diameter from3 to 2.


21. Click OK from the Protrusiondialog box, and click Yes fromthe menu manager to exitResolve mode.


Task 2: Resolve geometry failures in a part by fixing a feature other thanthe failing feature.

1. In the model tree, right-clickSWEEP and select Edit.

2. Edit the diameter from 2 to 3 andclick Regenerate .

3. Click Fix Model > Modify >Value from the menu managerto work on features other thanthe failed feature.

4. Select TRAJ_2 from the modeltree and edit the radius back to2.

5. Click Regenerate from the menumanager.

6. Click Yes from the menumanager to exit Resolve mode.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Open Section FailuresOpen section failures occur when the open section extendsbeyond the solid geometry that bounds it.

• Open section features must bebounded by other solids.

• “Could not intersect part withfeature” failure.

Open Section Sketch Failure

Open Section Versus ClosedSection Open Section Sketch Feature

Analyzing Open Section Failures TheoryMost sketches for solid features should be closed sketches. However, whenthe design intent dictates that the sketch be an open section, the resultingfeature must be bounded by other solid geometry. In the bottom figure, thehighlighted feature was extruded from an open-section sketch.However, if the depth is extended further than the bounding solid geometry,the feature fails because it is no longer bounded entirely by solid geometry,as shown in the upper figure. Pro/ENGINEER reports this error in themessage window and failure diagnostics window as, “could not intersectpart with feature.”


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Open Section Failures

ScenarioResolve an open-section failure in a part model.

Part_Open-Section open-sec_fail.prt

Task 1: Resolve an open-section failure in a part model.

1. In the model tree, right-clickLEFT_TOOTH and select Info >Feature.

2. In the Browser, scroll down to theSection Data section and noticethat the feature was created withan open section.

3. In the model tree, right-clickRIGHT_TOOTH and select Info> Feature.

4. In the Browser, in the Parentssection, notice that the feature isdependant on LEFT_TOOTH.• Scroll down to the SectionData section and notice thatthis feature was created with aclosed section.


6. In the model tree, right-clickLEFT_TOOTH and select Edit.

7. Edit the height from 9 to 11.


9. In the Failure Diagnosticswindow, click Feature Info.

10. Notice that the intersectionbetween the feature and partcould not be created, and thatthe Comments section statesthat the feature is unattached.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

12. Click Quick Fix > Redefine> Confirm from the menumanager. Notice that theopen section is visible in thefeature preview. The systemcannot create the open sectionprotrusion past the existing solidmaterial.

13. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Edit InternalSketch.

14. Click No hidden and orientto the Standard Orientation.


16. Click Concentric Arc ,select the left arc of the sketchto determine the center, andsketch a new arc, snappingits endpoints to the angledcenterlines.

17. Middle-click to stop arc creation.18. Click Done Section .

19. Click Shading .20. Click Complete Feature .21. Click Yes from the menu

manager to exit Resolve mode.

If our design intent requiredan open section sketch,this failure could have beenresolved using the FixModel option to increasethe height of the maincylinder.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Missing Part References FailuresMissing part reference failures occur when a parent feature ischanged, and the child feature can no longer find the parent’sreference.

Missing part reference failureexamples include:• Missing axes• Missing references forrounds/chamfers

• Editing a sketch– Replace function

Slot Feature Referencing Hole Axis

Round Edges Editing a Sketch

Analyzing Missing Part References Failures TheoryWhen a change is made to a parent feature it automatically updatesany children. This is beneficial functionality and shows the power ofPro/ENGINEER. However, if a change to a parent feature results in a childnot being able to find a particular parent’s reference, a failure occurs.Pro/ENGINEER reports this error in the message window and failurediagnostics window as, “Feature references are missing.”The following are common examples of why missing part reference failuresoccur:• Missing axes — In the upper-right figure, the slot sketch is dimensioned offof the hole axis. If the hole is deleted, its axis is deleted, and therefore thedimensioning reference for the slot is deleted. Thus, the slot feature willnow fail due to missing part references.

• Missing references for rounds or chamfers — Occurs if you delete orredefine a feature and remove the edge that a round or chamfer uses. In


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

the lower-left figure, the edges where the boss intersects the remainderof the part are rounded. If the boss is deleted, the edges are thereforedeleted, and the rounds will fail. Missing references can also occur ifyou insert a feature before the round or chamfer that causes the edge tobe removed. For example, if you cut material off of an extrude feature,consequently cutting the edge off that a round references, the round will fail.

• Editing a sketch — Can result in changed or removed edges and surfacesin a model. If those changed or removed edges and surfaces are parentsto other features, failures can occur. In the lower-right figure, the sketchedentity is being deleted because we want to modify the sketch. However,Pro/ENGINEER informs us that this entity is referenced by other entities.If we choose to continue and delete this entity, the child features will faildue to this reference being removed.

Using the Replace FunctionOne way to help mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketchesis to use the Replace function. The Replace function transfers referencesfrom an old entity to the new entity you have created. You can click Edit >Replace from the main menu to access Replace. You can then select thenew entity you want references transferred to, and then select the origin entitythat contains the references. Once the references have been replaced, youcan remove or modify the original entity without causing child features to fail.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Part ReferencesFailures

ScenarioResolve missing references part failures.

Part_Missing-Ref missing-ref_fail.prt

Task 1: Resolve a failure caused by missing part references.

1. Edit the definition ofBASE_PROTRUSION.

2. In the graphics window,right-click and select EditInternal Sketch.

3. Sketcher display:4. Select the right side angled line,

right-click, and select Delete.5. Read the warning message and

click Yes.6. Click 3-Point / Tangent End

Arc and sketch an arc in itsplace

7. Click Done Section .8. Click Complete Feature .9. Feature #10 fails due to missing

feature references.

10. In the Failure Diagnosticswindow, click Feature Info.

11. Notice that SIDE_ROUNDis failing because featurereferences are missing and thefeature could not be constructed.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

13. Click Quick Fix > Redefine >Confirm.

14. In the dashboard, select theSets, select Set 2, and click inthe Driving Surface collector.

15. Spin the model and select thesurface to satisfy the missingreference.

16. Click Complete Feature .17. Click Yes to exit Resolve mode.

Task 2: Transfer references using Replace to avoid a missing referencesfailure.

1. Edit the definition ofBASE_PROTRUSION.

2. In the graphics window,right-click and select EditInternal Sketch.

3. Sketcher display:4. Select the right arc and click

Mirror .• Select the vertical centerlineand deselect the mirrored arc.

5. Click Edit > Replace from themain menu.• Select the left angled line.• Select the newly mirrored arc.• Click Yes from the ReplaceEntity dialog box.

6. Click Done Section .7. Click Complete Feature .

By using Replacefunctionality, you havetransferred references tothe arc entity, thus avoidingResolve mode.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Missing Component FailuresMissing component failures occur when Pro/ENGINEER cannotfind all the components it needs to properly open an assembly.

Reasons include:• Component renamed onoperating system.

• Component renamed inPro/ENGINEER withoutassembly in session.

• Component found in a differentfolder on operating system.

Folder View of Components

Assembly and Model Tree

Analyzing Missing Component Failures TheoryIf an assembly fails regeneration due to a missing component,Pro/ENGINEER reports this failure in the message window and failurediagnostics window as, “Component model missing.” Reasons for missingcomponents in assemblies include:• The component was renamed in the operating system — Pro/ENGINEERdoes not know that the component was renamed if it was done on theoperating system. Consequently, the assembly containing this renamedcomponent fails because it is looking for the component with the old name.

• The component was renamed in Pro/ENGINEER without the assemblyin session — Again, if the assembly containing the component is not insession at the time one of its components is renamed, the assemblycontinues to look for the original name, and thus the assembly fails.

• The component was moved to a different folder. If a component ismoved from its original location, Pro/ENGINEER continues to look for thecomponent in its old location. Because the component has been moved,the assembly fails. In the upper figure, component HANDLE.PRT hasbeen moved out of the Assy_Missing-Comp folder and placed in theHandle_Folder. Because the assembly requires this component (it can beseen in the model tree in the lower figure), it fails when opened.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component Failures

ScenarioResolve a missing component failure in an assembly.

Assy_Missing-Comp missing-comp_fail.asm

Task 1: Resolve a missing component failure in an assembly.

1. Notice the failure that occurswhen opening the assembly.

2. Read the Failure Diagnosticswindow contents.

3. Notice that component HANDLEis missing.

4. In the menu manager, clickQuick Fix > Quit Retr.

5. Click Working Directory inthe Common Folders area.• Double-click Handle_Folder.Notice that this folder containsHANDLE.PRT.

6. Click Working Directory again.7. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to open it.8. Notice the assembly still fails for the same reason.

9. In the menu manager, clickQuick Fix > Find Component.• In the File Open dialogbox, double-click folderHandle_Folder.

• Select HANDLE.PRT and clickOpen.

10. Click Yes to exit Resolve mode.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. Click Folder Browser fromthe Navigator and clickWorkingDirectory .

12. Double-click folderHandle_Folder.

13. Right-click HANDLE.PRT andselect Cut.

14. Click Working Directoryfrom the Navigator, and click inthe Browser to de-select anyfiles.

15. Right-click in the Browser andselect Paste.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Missing Component ReferenceFailuresMissing Component Reference failures occur because acomponent feature is modified that removes the reference usedfor its placement or its children’s placement in an assembly.

Failure displays as:• “Failed to regeneratecomponent placement.”

• “Feature references aremissing.”

Parent/Child Relationship Graph

Model Tree and Assembly

Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures TheoryIf a component’s placement cannot be resolved in an assembly,Pro/ENGINEER reports the failure in the message window and failurediagnostics window as, “Failed to regenerate component placement” and“Feature references are missing.” This type of failure occurs when features ina component are modified that have parents or children in an assembly. If thefeature modification removes the reference used in the assembly, this causeseither the component or the component’s children to fail placement.In the upper figure, the Reference Viewer displays the parent/childrelationships for the JAW_SLIDE.PRT component in the assembly.Component LEADSCREW.PRT is a child to the jaw slide component. Inlooking at the Reference Graph, LEADSCREW.PRT is assembled to surfaceid 238 of JAW_SLIDE.PRT. As such, if the feature containing surface id 238in JAW_SLIDE.PRT were modified, it could cause the leadscrew to fail.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component ReferenceFailures

ScenarioResolve a missing component reference failure.

Assy_Missing-Ref jaw_slide.prt

Task 1: Resolve a missing component reference failure.

1. Select Hole 2.2. A leadscrew in the assembly

mates to the flat base surface ofthis hole.

3. Edit the definition of Hole 2.4. In the dashboard, select the

Shape tab.

• Click Drill Hole Profile toadd a drill point.

• Notice that the flat basesurface of the hole has beenreplaced by a drill point.

5. Click Complete Feature .6. Click Window > Close.

7. Click Working Directoryfrom the Navigator.• Double-clickMISSING-REFS.ASM toopen it.

8. Notice that the assembly failsdue to LEADSCREW.PRT.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

9. Notice in the model treethat the component failure isoccurring in the sub-assemblyJAW_SUB.ASM.

10. Also notice that the componentyou added the drill point to,JAW_SLIDE.PRT, is okay, butLEADSCREW.PRT has not beenassembled yet. This can beseen by the “x” symbol precedingthe LEADSCREW.PRT in themodel tree.

11. In the menu manager, click FixModel > Modify > Mod Part.

12. Select JAW_SLIDE.PRT. Noticethat it becomes the active model.

13. Click Feature > Redefine fromthe menu manager.

14. Expand JAW_SLIDE.PRT in themodel tree and select Hole 2.

15. In the dashboard, clickRectangle Hole Profile toremove the drill point.

16. Click Complete Feature .17. In the menu manager, click

Done/Return > Regenerate >Done from the menu manager.

18. Click Yes from the menumanager to exit Resolve mode.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint FailuresInvalid assembly constraint failures occur when constraintsfrom one set conflict with constraints from another set for agiven component.

Reasons include:• Parent components modified ordeleted

• Features in parent componentsmodified or deleted

Fix the failure:• Modify features to satisfyconstraints

• Change constraints• Suppress or freeze component Invalid Assembly Constraints

Features Modified to SatisfyConstraints Insert Constraints Disabled

Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures TheoryAssembly constraints are based on component references. A component’sreferences can change, and therefore become invalid. This can occur ifparent assembly components are modified or deleted, or if the features inparent components are modified or deleted. In the upper figure, the ends of arod are inserted into holes on each block using Insert constraints. Becausethe rod was assembled, the holes in the transparent block were movedoutward, but not the holes on the other block. Consequently, the holes do notline up, and it is impossible for the rod ends to be inserted into both holes.The result is that the rod constraints have become invalid. Pro/ENGINEERreports this error in the message window and failure diagnostics window as,“Failed to regenerate component placement.”

Fixing Invalid Assembly Constraint FailuresWhen assembly constraints become invalid, you can do one of three things:• Modify features to satisfy constraints — You can modify either the featuresin the failing component or in the other components. In the lower-left


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

figure, the holes in the other two components were moved outward soall constraints are again satisfied.

• Change constraints — You can constrain the component differently soall constraints are satisfied, or you can disable constraints. Disablingconstraints maintains the original references, but makes the constraintinactive for regeneration purposes. In the lower-right figure, the Insertconstraints for the rods were disabled. Notice that the components are stillmisaligned with respect to the holes. The disabled constraints can alwaysbe re-enabled at a later time. You can also disable constraints to test outdifferent assembly scenarios.

• Suppress or freeze the failing component — You can then either modify thepart or delete it from the assembly at a later time.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Invalid Assembly ConstraintFailures

ScenarioResolve invalid assembly constraint failures.

Assy_Invalid-Const jaw_fixed.prt

Task 1: Resolve invalid assembly constraint failures.

1. In the model tree, right-clickHole 1 and select Edit.

2. Edit the offset value from 10 to 8.

3. Click Regenerate .4. Click Window > Close.

5. Click Working Directoryfrom the Navigator.• Double-clickINVALID-CONST.ASM toopen it.

6. Notice that the first ROD.PRTfails component placement.

7. Click Quick Fix > Redefine >Done from the menu manager.

8. In the dashboard, notice that theconstraint status is “ConstraintsInvalid.”• Select the Placement tab andselect each Insert constraint.

• Placement failed becausethere is an Insert constraint atboth ends.

• Select the second Insertconstraint and clear theConstraint Enabled checkbox.

• Click Complete Component.

9. Notice that the second ROD.PRT fails component placement.10. Click Quick Fix > Redefine > Done from the menu manager.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

11. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Select the second Insertconstraint and clear theConstraint Enabled checkbox.

• Click Complete Component.

12. Notice that the JAW_SUB.ASMfails component placement.

13. Click Fix Model > Modify > ModPart.

14. In the model tree, expandJAW_SUB.ASM and selectJAW_SLIDE.PRT.

15. Double-click the bottom-righthole and edit the offset valuefrom 10 to 8.

16. Click Regenerate > Done > Yesfrom the menu manager to exitResolve mode.

17. Zoom in on the left end ofthe assembly and notice themisalignment between the rodsand head block. Recall that theInsert constraints were disabledat this end.

18. In the model tree, right-clickHEAD_BLOCK.PRT and selectActivate.

19. Double-click the bottom righthole, edit its offset from 10 to 8,

and click Regenerate .

20. Activate the top level assembly.21. Edit the definition of the first ROD.PRT and select the Placement tab.

• Select the grayed out Insert constraint and select the ConstraintEnabled check box.

• Click Complete Component .22. Repeat the same procedure for the second ROD.PRT.

The Insert constraints were re-activated to “detect” misalignmentin the future.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Using Pro/ENGINEER HelpThere are numerous types of help that you can obtain, eitherfrom Pro/ENGINEER or from links on PTC’s Online Resources.

You can get help from anyof the following locations inPro/ENGINEER:• Help Center

• What’s This? icon• Online Resources• System Information

Online Resources Support Page

Information Window Help Center Tabs

Using the Help CenterThe Help Center provides access to Pro/ENGINEER’s help system. Withinthe Help Center you can find information on specific modeling topics, as wellas tutorials, books, and quick links. You can open the Help Center by clickingHelp > Help Center from the main menu.The Help Center is subdivided into various Functional areas to help narrowdown your search regarding a given question. Once the Functional Areahas been selected, you can further filter the search within specific Modulesand Books.The Functional Areas and Modules and Books, respectively, pertaining to theIntroduction to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 4.0 are:

Functional Area Module and Book

Fundamentals Pro/ENGINEER Fundamentals

Part Modeling PartSketcher

Assembly Design Assembly

Detailed Drawings Detailed Drawings


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Once the desired Functional Area and Module and Book has been selected,you can browse for information in the Contents tab, as shown in thelower-right tab. You may also use the Index tab to type in a keyword to find,or you may type in a specific word to search for in the Search tab. The resultsof your selection display on the right side of the Help Center.

Using the What’s This IconYou can use the What’s This? icon, also known as the What’s Thisicon, to interactively get context-sensitive information on a specific topic byselecting the icon or menu item in the Pro/ENGINEER interface that you wantmore information on. Clicking the icon or menu item in the Pro/ENGINEERinterface launches the Help Center, which displays information about theitem you selected.

Using Online ResourcesYou can click Help > Online Resources from the main menu to launch thePro/ENGINEER Help dialog box and display links to various informationfound online at PTC’s Web site, as shown in the upper figure. Links to onlineresources include:• Support — Get links to contacting technical support, logging calls online,and contacting support.

• Getting Started with Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire — A tutorial-basedintroduction to creating parts, assemblies, and drawings.

• Quick Reference Card — Provides a handy quick reference for toolbars,selection, and controls.

• Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Menu Mapper — Enables you to learn thenew location of menu selections from older versions of Pro/ENGINEERsoftware.

• Tutorial for New Users — Enables you to learn solid modeling in a CADenvironment.

• Demos, Tools & Tutorials — Gives you access to additional demos andtutorials that were developed by product experts.

• What’s New in Pro/ENGINEER — Enables you to find out what is new inthe latest release of Pro/ENGINEER.

• Discussion Forums — Enables you to view posts and replies from othercustomers to their questions, as well as make posts of your own.

Getting System InformationClicking Help > System Information from the main menu launches theSystem Information dialog box, as shown in the lower-left figure. This dialogbox provides the following information:• License Information — Provides important licensing information if you everneed to log a call with Technical Support.

• Configured Modules — Displays which Pro/ENGINEER optional licenseextensions are being used.

• Machine Information — Provides information about the machine thatPro/ENGINEER is running on.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

PROCEDURE - Using Pro/ENGINEER Help

ScenarioUse Pro/ENGINEER’s various help options.

Help Create New

Task 1: Use the Help Center.

1. Click New , select Part, type HELP as the Name, and click OK.2. Click Help > Help Center from the main menu.

3. In the Pro/ENGINEER Helpdialog box, select Part Modelingfrom the Functional Areadrop-down list.• Select –Part Modeling fromthe Modules and Booksdrop-down list.

• In the Contents tab, selectEngineering Features toexpand it.

• Select Rib to expand it.• Click About the Rib Feature.

4. Scroll through the information onthe Rib feature.

5. In the Pro/ENGINEER Helpdialog box, select –Sketcherfrom the Modules and Booksdrop-down list.• In the Contents tab, selectCreating Sketcher Geometryto expand it.

• Click To Create a LineTangent to Two Entitiesand read the associatedinformation.

6. Close the Pro/ENGINEER Helpdialog box.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Task 2: Use the “What’s This?” Help Functionality.

1. Click Help > What’s This? fromthe main menu.

2. Click on the grayed out ShellTool .

3. The Help Center appears.4. Close the Pro/ENGINEER Help

dialog box.

5. ClickWhat’s This? from themain toolbar.

6. Click Insert > Sweep >Protrusion from the main menuand notice that the Help Centerappears.

Task 3: Use the Help Online Resources.

1. Click Help > Online Resourcesfrom the main menu. Note that

you can also click Homefrom the Browser.

2. Notice the various links forTutorials, the Quick ReferenceCard, Demos, DiscussionForum, and What’s New inPro/ENGINEER.

3. Click Support from the menubar at the top of the page.• Click Contacting Support> Contacting TechnicalSupport via Phone alongthe left side. If prompted,type your PTC username andpassword.

• Scroll to the bottom of the PDFfile to locate the number foryour location.

Task 4: Use System Information Help.

1. Click Help > System Information from the main menu. Notice theinformation available under the License Information, ConfiguredOption Modules, and Machine Information.



For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Module26Project

Module OverviewUsing Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire and the skills learned in this course, completethe following project design tasks.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create the PISTON_PIN.PRT.• Create the PISTON.PRT.• Create the CONNECTING_ROD.PRT.• Create the PISTON_ASSY.ASM.• Create the CRANKSHAFT.PRT.• Create the ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.• Create the IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT.• Create the FLANGE.PRT.• Create the IMPELLER.PRT.• Create the BLOWER.ASM.• Create the FRAME.PRT.• Create the ENGINE.ASM.• Create the ENGINE_BLOWER.ASM.• Create and Assembling the BOLT.PRT.• Analyze and Resolve Interferences.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

The Air CirculatorIn this project, you will create, assemble, and documentcomponents of the Air Circulator.

Create from scratch:• Part• Assembly• DrawingMinimal InstructionsCompleted Models forReference

Air Circulator

Project ScenarioACME Incorporated develops and markets several consumer, industrial, anddefense goods. The Light Industrial Division of ACME creates a number ofproducts, including industrial fans, heating, air conditioning, and pumps. Youwork for the Light Industrial Division of ACME Inc., which has just started touse Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire for its product designs.Upon returning from Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire training, you are assigned tocreate the AC-40 Air Circulator.

Minimal InstructionsBecause all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned upto this point in the course, instructions for each project step will be minimal.There will be no step-by-step "picks and clicks" given. This provides you witha chance to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed thoughthe project.

Completed Models for ReferenceBe sure to save all project models within the working subfolder of the Projectclassroom folder structure. The project folder also contains a sub-foldernamed completed. Here you will find a completed version of each model inthe project. These completed models can be used as reference if required.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Piston AssemblyThis slide illustrates the components and final piston assemblyyou will create in this project.

PISTON_PIN.PRT PISTON.PRT

CONNECTING_ROD.PRT PISTON_ASSY.ASM

Creating the Piston Pin, Piston, Crankshaft, and Piston AssemblyThis slide illustrates the piston pin, piston, connecting rod, and pistonassembly to be created in the beginning of this project.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Crankshaft, Engine Block, and DrawingThis slide illustrates the crankshaft, engine block, and drawingto be created in this project.

CRANKSHAFT.PRT ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT

ENGINE-BLOWER_MODELS.DRW

Creating the Crankshaft, Engine Block, and Engine-BlowerModels DrawingThis slide illustrates the crankshaft, engine block, and drawing to be createdin this project. These models are slightly more complicated than thepreviously created piston assembly models. The drawing will be a two sheetdrawing referencing both the crankshaft and engine_block models.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Blower AssemblyThis slide illustrates the components and final blower assemblyyou will create in this project.

IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT FLANGE.PRT

IMPELLER.PRT BLOWER.ASM

Creating the Impeller Housing, Flange, Impeller, and BlowerAssemblyThis slide illustrates the impeller housing, flange, impeller, and blowerassembly to be created in this project.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Engine Blower AssemblyThis slide illustrates the frame, engine assembly, and finalengine blower assembly you will create in this project.

FRAME.PRT ENGINE.ASM

ENGINE_BLOWER.ASM

Creating the Fame, Engine Assembly, and Engine BlowerAssemblyThis slide illustrates the frame, engine assembly, and engine blower assemblyto be created in this project.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Completing the DesignThis slide illustrates the bolts created and assembled in thisproject. The assembly will then be evaluated for interferencesand then modified as required.

BOLT PATTERN ASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY INTERFERENCE

The BoltThis slide illustrates the bolt created in this project. Bolts of different lengthsare then created using save a copy functionality.

Inserting the BoltAfter the various bolt lengths have been created, they will be insertedthroughout the assembly. Temporary interfaces along with cut and pastefunctionality will be used to quickly assemble every bolt.

Interference and Collision DetectionBefore the design is completed, you will check for interferences between thecomponents. Design modifications will be made to remove the interferencesand finalize the design.


For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Copyright

Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 4.0Copyright © 2008 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and itssubsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States andother countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and useof such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies inprinted form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal useand in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Anycopy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC.Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentationmay not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, ortransmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and noauthorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change withoutnotice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes noresponsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, containsvaluable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of theUnited States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium,disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreementexcept with written prior approval from PTC.UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVILDAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information:For Windchill products, select About Windchill at the bottom of the product page. For InterCommproducts, on the Help main page, click the link for Copyright 2007. For other products, click Help >About on the main menu of the product.Registered Trademarks of PTCAdvanced Surface Design, Advent, Arbortext, Behavioral Modeling, CADDS, CalculationManagement Suite, Computervision, CounterPart, Create Collaborate Control, Designate, EPD,EPD.Connect, Epic Editor, Expert Machinist, Flexible Engineering, GRANITE, HARNESSDESIGN,Info*Engine, InPart, INTERCOMM, IsoCompose, IsoDraw, IsoView, ITEDO, Mathcad, Mathsoft,MECHANICA, Optegra, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, PartSpeak,PHOTORENDER, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/E, Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK,Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, Product First, Product Development Means Business, ProductMakes the Company, PTC, the PTC logo, PT/Products, Shaping Innovation, Simple PowerfulConnected, StudyWorks, The Product Development Company, The Way to Product First, Wildfire,Windchill, Windchill DynamicDesignLink, Windchill PartsLink, and Windchill PDMLink.Trademarks of PTC3B2, 3DPAINT, Arbortext Editor, Arbortext Content Manager, Arbortext Contributor, ArbortextCompanion for Word®, Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher – Desktop, Arbortext Advanced PrintPublisher – Enterprise, Arbortext Publishing Engine, Arbortext Dynamic Link Manager, ArbortextStyler, Arbortext Architect, Arbortext Digital Media Publisher, Arbortext CSDB for S1000D®,Arbortext IETP Viewer for S1000D®, Arbortext Reviewer for S1000D®, Arbortext AuthoringInterface for S1000D®, Arbortext Editor for S1000D®, Arbortext Publisher for S1000D®, ArbortextProvisioning Manager, Arbortext Provisioning Reviewer, Arbortext Provisioning TransactionManager, Arbortext Parts Catalog Manager for S1000D®, Arbortext Learning Content Managerfor S1000D®, Arbortext Learning Management System, Arbortext Reviewer for Eagle, ArbortextLSA Interface, Associative Topology Bus, AutobuildZ, AutoRound, CDRS, CV, CVact, CVaec,CVdesign, CV DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, Create Collaborate Control Communicate,EDAcompare, EDAconduit, DataDoctor, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, Distributed ServicesManager, DIVISION, e/ENGINEER, eNC Explorer, Expert Framework, Expert MoldBase, ExpertToolmaker, FlexPDM, FlexPLM, Harmony, InterComm Expert, InterComm EDAcompare, InterCommEDAconduit, individual innovation. collective creativity, ISSM, KDiP, Knowledge Discipline inPractice, Knowledge System Driver, ModelCHECK, MoldShop, NC Builder, PDS Workbench,POLYCAPP, ProductPoint, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING,Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COLLABORATE, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONCEPT, Pro/CONVERT,Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW,Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM POST, Pro/FICIENCY, Pro/FLY THROUGH,Pro/HARNESS, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS,Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC ADVANCED, Pro/NC CHECK, Pro/NCMILL, Pro/NC POST, Pro/NC SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC TURN, Pro/NC WEDM, Pro/NC Wire EDM,Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PIPING,

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT,Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/TOOLMAKER,Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, ProductView, PTC Precision,PTC DesignQuest, Routed Systems Designer, Shrinkwrap, Validation Manager, Warp, WindchillMPMLink, Windchill ProjectLink, and Windchill SupplyLink.Patents of Parametric Technology Corporation or a SubsidiaryRegistration numbers and issue dates follow. Additionally, equivalent patents may be issued orpending outside of the United States. Contact PTC for further information. 5,771,392/23-June-1998;(EP)0240557/02-October-1986; 5,423,023/05-June-1990; 4,956,771/11-September-1990;5,058,000/15-October-1991; 5,140,321/18-August-1992; 5,297,053/22-March-1994;5,428,772/27-June-1995; 5,469,538/21-Nov-1995; 5,469,538/21-November-1995;5,506,950/09-April-1996; 4,310,614/30-April-1996; 5,513,316/30-April-1996;5,526,475/11-June-1996; 5,561,747/01-October-1996; 5,526,475/6-November-1996;5,557,176/09-November-1996; 5,680,523/21-October-1997; 5,689,711/18-November-1997;5,771,392/23-June-1998; 5,838,331/17-November-1998; 5,844,555/01-Dec-1998;5,844,555/1-December-1998; 5,850,535/15-December-1998; 4,310,615/21-December-1998;4,310,614/22-April-1999; 6,275,866/14-Aug-2001; 6,275,866/14-August-2001;6,308,144/23-October-2001; 6,447,223B1/10-Sept-2002; 6,473,673B1/29-October-2002;PCT 03/05061/13-Feb-2003; 6,545,671B1/08-April-2003; GB2354683B/04-June-2003;GB2354683B/04-June-2003; 6,580,428B1/17-June-2003; GB2354685B/18-June-2003;GB2354684B/02-July-2003; 6,608,623B1/19-August-2003; 6,608,623B1/19-August-2003;6,625,607B1/23-September-2003; GB2354924/24-September-2003; GB2384125/15-October-2003;GB2354686/15-October-2003; GB2353376/05-November-2003; GB2354096/12-November-2003;GB2353115/10-December-2003; 6,665,569B1/16-December-2003; (KO)415475/6-January-2004;GB2388003B/21-January-2004; GB2365567/10-March-2004; EU0812447/26-May-2004;GB2363208/25-August-2004; GB2366639B/13-October-2004; 7,006,956/28-February-2006;7,013,246B1/14-March-2006; 7,013,468/14-March-2006; (JP)3,962,109/25-May-2007.Third-Party TrademarksAdobe, Acrobat, Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator, Distiller, FrameMaker and the Acrobat logo aretrademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. I Run and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of AliasLtd. TeX is a trademark of the American Mathematical Society. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, Panther, andTiger are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD and AutodeskInventor are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of BaanCompany. BEAWebLogic Server and BEAWebLogic Platform are trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc.CATIA and CADAM are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes, S.A. The Sigma Check icon,CETOL, CETOL 6 Sigma are trademarks of Sigmetrix, LLC. MEDUSA and STHENO are trademarksof CAD Schroer GmbH. Allegro, Cadence, and Concept are registered trademarks of CadenceDesign Systems, Inc. Cognos is a registered trademark of Cognos Corporation. CYA, iArchive,HOTbackup, and Virtual StandBy are trademarks or registered trademarks of CYA Technologies,Inc. DataDirect Connect is a registered trademark of DataDirect Technologies. Documentumis a registered trademark of EMC Corporation. FileNET is a registered trademark of FileNETCorporation. Panagon is a trademark of FileNET Corporation. PDGS is a registered trademark ofFord Motor Company. JAWS is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific BLV Group, LLC inthe United States and other countries. Geomagic is a registered trademark of Geomagic, Inc. HP,Hewlett-Packard, and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM, DB2,AIX, and WebSphere are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Advanced ClusterProven,ClusterProven, the ClusterProven design, Rational Rose, and Rational ClearCase are trademarks orregistered trademarks of International Business Machines in the United States and other countriesand are used under license. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for theoperation of this software product. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. OrbixWebis a registered trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. Interleaf is a trademark of Interleaf, Inc.IslandDraw and IslandPaint are trademarks of Island Graphics Corporation. Feature-FollowingAnti-Aliasing is a trademark of LightWork Design. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.3Dconnexion is a registered trademark of Logitech International S.A. MainWin and Mainsoft aretrademarks of Mainsoft Corporation. MatrixOne is a trademark of MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphicsand Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design, AMPLE, and Design Manager aretrademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. Microsoft,ActiveX, Excel, JScript, Vista, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows 2000 Server,Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, the Windows logo, Visual Basic, the Visual Basic logo, andActive Accessibility are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the UnitedStates and/or other countries. Moldflow is a registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. Mozillaand Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation. FLEXnet, InstallShield, andInstallAnywhere are trademarks or registered trademarks of Macrovision Corporation. Netscape,Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and the Netscape N and Ship’s Wheel logos areregistered trademarks or service marks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. andother countries. OSF/Motif and Motif are trademarks of the Open Software Foundation, Inc. Oracleand interMedia are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation. Palm Computing, Palm OS,Graffiti, HotSync, and Palm Modem are registered trademarks, and Palm III, Palm IIIe, Palm IIIx,Palm V, Palm Vx, Palm VII, Palm, More connected, Simply Palm, the Palm Computing platform

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

logo, all Palm logos, and HotSync logo are trademarks of Palm, Inc. or its subsidiaries. PANTONEis a registered trademark and PANTONE CALIBRATED is a trademark of Pantone, Inc. Proximityand Linguibase are registered trademarks of Proximity Technology, Inc. Elan License Manager andSoftlock are trademarks of Rainbow Technologies, Inc. RAND is a trademark of RAND Worldwide.RosettaNet is a trademark and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks ofRosettaNet, a nonprofit organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany.IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. S1000D is a registered trademark of SaabAB Joint Stock Company. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation. SPARCis a registered trademark and SPARCStation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc. (Productsbearing the SPARC trademarks are based on an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems,Inc.) All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks ofSPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Sun, Sun Microsystems, theSun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java based marks, and “The Network is the Computer”are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in othercountries. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft America, Inc. DOORS is a registered trademarkof Telelogic AB. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. TIBCO is a registeredtrademark and TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service,TIBCO Rendezvous, TIBCO TurboXML, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in the United States and other countries. I-DEAS, Metaphase,Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, TeamCenter, UG NX, and Unigraphics are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of UGS Corp., a Siemens group company. Galaxy Application Environment is a licensedtrademark of Visix Software, Inc. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications, Inc. API Tookitis a trademark of InterCAP Graphics Systems, Inc. BEA and WebLogic are registered trademarksof BEA Systems, Inc. X Window System is a trademark of X Consortium, Inc.Third-Party Technology InformationCertain PTC software products contain licensed third-party technology:Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator, Adobe Acrobat Reader and Adobe Distiller are copyrightedsoftware of Adobe Systems Inc. and are subject to the Adobe End User License Agreementas provided by Adobe with those products. Web Help © 2004 and Macromedia RoboHelpare copyrighted software of Adobe Systems Incorporated. The Pro/ENGINEER Digital RightsManagement module uses Adobe® LiveCycle® Rights Management ES.CETOL is copyrighted software of Sigmetrix, LLC. Pro/ENGINEER Tolerance Analysis Extension -powered by CETOL Technology.I Run and ISOGEN are copyrighted software of Alias Ltd.Word, FrameMaker, and Interleaf filters. Copyright © 2000 Blueberry Software. All rights reserved.CimPro, IGES/Pro, and PS/Pro software are provided by CADCAM-E, Inc.The Arbortext Import/Export feature includes components that are licensed and copyrighted byCambridgeDocs LLC (© 2002-2007 CambridgeDocs LLC) - a division of Document Sciences. Thisfunctionality:Includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org).Redistributes JRE from Sun Microsystems. The Redistributable is complete and unmodified,and only bundled as part of the product. CambridgeDocs is not distributing additional softwareintended to supersede any component(s) of the Redistributable, nor has CambridgeDocsremoved or altered any proprietary legends or notices contained in or on the Redistributable.CambridgeDocs is only distributing the Redistributable pursuant to a license agreement thatprotects Sun’s interests consistent with the terms contained in the Agreement. CambridgeDocsagrees to defend and indemnify Sun and its licensors from and against any damages, costs,liabilities, settlement amounts and/or expenses (including attorney’s fees) incurred in connectionwith any claim, lawsuit, or action by any third party that arises or results from the use or distributionof any and all Programs and/or Software. This product includes code licensed from RSA Security,Inc. ICU4J portions licensed from IBM (see terms at http://www.icu-project.org/apiref/icu4j/).Redistributes the Saxon XSLT Processor from Michael Kay, more information, including sourcecode is available at http://saxon.sourceforge.net/.Uses cxImage, an open source image conversion library that follows the zlib license. cxImagefurther uses the following images libraries which also ship (statically linked) with cxLib: zLib,LibTIFF, LibPNG, LibJPEG, JBIG-Kit, JasPer, LibJ2K. See http://www.xdp.it/cximage.htm.Includes software developed by Andy Clark, namely Neko DTD © Copyright Andy Clark. All rightsreserved. For more information, visit http://www.apache.org/~andyc/neko/doc/index.html.Includes code which was developed and copyright by Steven John Metsker, and shipped withBuilding Parsers with Java, from Addison Wesley.Uses controls from Infragistics NetAdvantage 2004, Volume 3, © Copyright 2004 Infragistics.

VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech.File Filters © 1986-2002 Circle Systems, Inc.Certain business intelligence reporting functionality is powered by Cognos.DFORMD.DLL is copyrighted software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not bedistributed.

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

Hyphenation Copyright © 1986-1999, Computer Hyphenation Ltd. All rights reserved.RetrievalWare is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation.DataDirect Connect is copyrighted software of DataDirect Technologies.PStill software is copyright © Dipl.- Ing. Frank Siegert, 1996-2005.FAST InStream is copyright© of Fast Search & Transfer, Inc.Portions of the Mathcad Solver © 1990-2002 by Frontline Systems, Inc.Exceed and Exceed 3D are copyrighted software of Hummingbird Ltd., a division of Open TextCorporation.Rational Rose and Rational ClearCase are copyrighted software of IBM Corp. IBM Corporation doesnot warrant and is not responsible for the operation of this software product.G POST is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of Intercim.The CD-ROM Composer and CD-ROM Consumer are based on Vivace CD-Web ComposerIntegrator © 1996-1997 KnowledgeSet Corporation. All rights reserved.Xdriver and 3dxsrv are copyrighted software of 3Dconnexion, Inc, a Logitech International S.A.company.FLEXnet Publisher is copyrighted software of Macrovision Corporation.Larson CGM Engine 9.4, Copyright © 1992-2006 Larson Software Technology, Inc. All rightsreserved.LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork Design 1990–2001.MainWin Dedicated Libraries are copyrighted software of Mainsoft Corporation.Microsoft Jet, Microsoft XML, Technology "Powered by Groove", Microsoft SQL Server 2005, VisualBasic for Applications, Internet Explorer and Portions compiled from Microsoft Developer NetworkRedistributable Sample Code, including Microsoft DLL redistributables, are all copyrighted softwareof Microsoft Corporation.Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology.Fatigue Advisor nCode libraries from nCode International.NuTCRACKER Server Operating Environment is copyrighted software of MKS Inc.Oracle 8i run time, Oracle 9i run time, and Oracle 10g run time are Copyright 2002–2004 OracleCorporation. Oracle programs provided herein are subject to a restricted use license and can onlybe used in conjunction with the PTC software they are provided with.PDFlib software is copyright © 1997-2005 PDFlib GmbH. All rights reserved.Proximity Linguistic Technology provides Spelling Check/Thesaurus portions of certain softwareproducts, including: The Proximity/Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag Database. Copyright © 1997Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag. Copyright © 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology,Inc.; The Proximity/C.A. Strombertg AB Database. Copyright © 1989 C.A. Strombertg AB.Copyright © 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Editions FernandNathan Database. Copyright © 1984 Editions Fernand Nathan. Copyright © 1989, All RightsReserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Espasa-Calpe Database. Copyright © 1990Espasa-Calpe. Copyright © 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Dr.Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura Database. Copyright © 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura Copyright ©1991, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Franklin Electronic Publishers,Inc. Database. Copyright © 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright © 1994, AllRights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Hachette Database. Copyright © 1992Hachette. Copyright © 1992, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/IDEa.s. Database. Copyright © 1989, 1990 IDE a.s. Copyright © 1989, 1990, All Rights Reserved,Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc. Database. Copyright © 1984,1990 Merriam-Webster, Inc. Copyright © 1984, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology,Inc.; The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc./Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Database. Copyright© 1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. Copyright © 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright ©1994, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Munksgaard InternationalPublishers Ltd. Database. Copyright © 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. Copyright ©1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/S. Fischer Verlag Database.Copyright © 1983 S. Fischer Verlag. Copyright © 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology,Inc.; The Proximity/Van Dale Lexicografie by Database. Copyright © 1995, 1997 Van DaleLexicografie by. Copyright © 1996, 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; TheProximity/William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. Database. Copyright © 1984, 1990 William CollinsSons & Co. Ltd. Copyright © 1988, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; TheProximity/Zanichelli Database. Copyright © 1989 Zanichelli. Copyright © 1989, All Rights Reserved,Proximity Technology, Inc.Certain licensemanagement is based on Elan LicenseManager © 1989-1999RainbowTechnologies,Inc. All rights reserved.PDEFIT © 1995-2002 Dr. Klaus Schittkowski.MuPAD OEM kernel, version 3.2.1 (Mathsoft Kernel) © 2005 by SciFace Software GmbH & Co. KG.TetMesh GHS3D provided by Simulog Technologies, a business unit of Simulog S.A.HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech SoftAmerica, Inc.TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of TechnomatixTechnologies Ltd.

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

TIBCOActiveEnterprise, TIBCODesigner, TIBCOEnterpriseMessage Service, TIBCORendezvous,TIBCO TurboXML, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are provided by TIBCO Software Inc.Parasolid is copyrighted software of UGS Corp, a Siemens group company.VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidentialtrade secret information belonging to VKI.Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebExCommunications, Inc.Certain graphics-handling portions are based on the following technologies:GIF: Copyright 1989, 1990 Kirk L. Johnson. The author disclaims all warranties with regard tothis software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall theauthor be liable for any special, indirect, or consequential damages or any damages whatsoeverresulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence, or othertortious action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software.JPEG: This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.PNG: Copyright 2004-2006 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.TIFF: Copyright 1988-1997 Sam Leffler, Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Thesoftware is provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind, express, implied, or otherwise,including without limitation, any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.In no event shall Sam Leffler or Silicon Graphics be liable for any special, incidental, indirect, orconsequential damages of any kind, or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, dataor profits, whether or not advised of the possibility of damage, or on any theory of liability, arisingout of or in connection with the use or performance of this software.XBM, Sun Raster, and Sun Icon: Copyright,1987, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.ZLIB: Copyright 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.

Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine copyright © 1994-2003 Wintertree Software, Inc.Portions of software documentation are used with the permission of theWorldWideWeb Consortium.Copyright © 1994–2006 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology,European Research Consortium for Informatics and Mathematics, Keio University). All RightsReserved. http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal. Such portions are indicated at their points of use.Copyright and ownership of certain software components is with YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMSLIMITED, unauthorized use and copying of which is hereby prohibited. YARD SOFTWARESYSTEMS LIMITED 1987. (Lic. #YSS:SC:9107001)**********LAPACK libraries used are freely available at http://www.netlib.org (authors are Anderson, E. andBai, Z. and Bischof, C. and Blackford, S. and Demmel, J. and Dongarra, J. and Du Croz, J. andGreenbaum, A. and Hammarling, S. and McKenney, A. and Sorensen, D.).Certain software components licensed in connection with the Apache Software Foundation and/orpursuant to the Apache Software License Agreement (version 2.0 or earlier). All rights arereserved by the Licensor of such works, and use is subject to the terms and limitations (and licenseagreement) at http://www.apache.org. This software is provided by its Contributors AS IS, WITHOUTWARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, and any expressed or implied warranties,including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of title non-infringement, merchantability andfitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the Apache Software Foundationor its Contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequentialdamages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use,data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether incontract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use ofthis software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Software includes:Apache Server, Axis, Ant, Tomcat, Xalan, Xerces, Batik, Jakarta, Jakarta POI, Jakarta RegularExpression, Commons-FileUpload, and XML BeansIBM XML Parser for Java Edition, the IBM SaxParser and the IBM Lotus XSL EditionDITA-OT - Apache License VersionIzPack: Java-based Software Installers Generator (http://www.izforge.com/izpack/start)Jakarta–ORO (as used with Jena Software)NekoHTML and CyberNeko Pull Parser software developed by Andy Clark © Copyright, AndyClark. All rights reserved.Lucene (http://lucene.apache.org)Quartz (scheduler) Copyright 2004-200xOpenSymphony (http://www.opensymphony.com/quartz/)Jetty Copyright Mortbay.Org (http://www.mortbay.com/mbindex.html)Google Web Toolkit Copyright 2007 GoogleU3D Library Copyright 1999 - 2006 Intel Corporation

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

antlr-2.7.0.zip - ANTLR parser and lexer generator, version 2.7.0; Provided pursuantto: ANTLR 2 License http://www.antlr.org/license.html. The Boost Library - Misc. C++software from http://www.boost.org; Provided pursuant to: Boost Software Licensehttp://www.boost.org/more/license_info.html and http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt.PDFBOX – Free software provided pursuant to the BSD license at http://www.pdfbox.org/index.html- Features.Eclipse SWT is distributed under the Eclipse Public License (EPL)(http://www.eclipse.org/org/documents/epl-v10.php) and is provided AS IS by authors with nowarranty therefrom and any provisions which differ from the EPL are offered by PTC. Uponrequest PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more than the cost ofperforming this distribution.The following software is incorporated pursuant to the “BSD License” (or a similar license):iCal4j is Copyright © 2005, Ben Fortuna, All rights reserved.Dojo – Copyright 2005, The Dojo Foundation, All rights reserved.Jaxen (shipped as part of dom4j) Copyright 2003-2006 The Werken Company. All RightsReserved.XMP (eXtensible Metadata Platform) technology from Adobe - Copyright © 1999 - 2007, AdobeSystems Incorporated. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use of the above in source and binary forms, with or without modification,are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: (i) Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer; (ii)Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, andthe following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution;and (iii) Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of any other contributors maybe used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior writtenpermission. THE ABOVE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS ANDCONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHTOWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, ORPROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OFLIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IFADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.The Java Getopt.jar file, copyright 1987 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.#ZipLib GNU software is developed for the Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA, copyright © 1989, 1991. PTC hereby disclaims all copyrightinterest in the program #ZipLib written by Mike Krueger. #ZipLib licensed free of charge andthere is no warranty for the program, to the extent permitted by applicable law. Except whenotherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or other parties provide the program AS ISwithout warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the impliedwarranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the qualityand performance of the program is with you. Should the program prove defective, you assume thecost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction.May contain script.aculo.us (built on “prototype.conio.net”). Copyright © 2005 Thomas Fuchs(http://script.aculo.us, http://mir.aculo.us). Software is used under the following permissions:Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software andassociated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, includingwithout limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sellcopies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subjectto the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be includedin all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITEDTO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERSBE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THESOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.The Java™ Telnet Applet (StatusPeer.java, TelnetIO.java, TelnetWrapper.java,TimedOutException.java), Copyright © 1996, 97 Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meißner, is redistributedunder the GNU General Public License. This license is from the original copyright holder and theApplet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. You may obtain a copy of the sourcecode for the Applet at http://www.mud.de/se/jta (for a charge of no more than the cost of physicallyperforming the source distribution), by sending e mail to [email protected] or [email protected]—you

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

are allowed to choose either distribution method. Said source code is likewise provided under theGNU General Public License.The following software, which is provided with and called by certain PTC software products,is licensed under the GNU General Public License (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.txt) and isprovided AS IS by the authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty ofMERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU GPL for moredetails). Upon request PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no morethan the cost of performing this distribution:Ghost Script (http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost).Launch4j: This program is free software licensed under the GPL license, the head subproject (thecode which is attached to the wrapped jars) is licensed under the LGPL license. Launch4j may beused for wrapping closed source, commercial applications.The PJA (Pure Java AWT) Toolkit library (http://www.eteks.com/pja/en).

The following unmodified libraries distributed under the GNU-GPL: libstdc and #ziplib (each areprovided pursuant to an exception that permits use of the library in proprietary applications with norestrictions provided that the library is not modified).The following software is distributed under GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL) which is athttp://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.html and is provided AS IS by authors with no warranty therefromwithout even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE (see the GNU LGPL for more details). Upon request PTC will provide the source codefor such software for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution:eXist, an Open Source Native XML Database, is redistributed under the GNU LGPL. You mayobtain a copy of the source code at http://exist.sourceforge.net/index.html. The source code islikewise provided under the GNU LGPL.GTK+ - The GIMP Toolkit is licensed under the GNU Library General Public License (LGPL). Youmay obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.gtk.org/, which is likewise provided under theGNU LGPL.Java Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn ([email protected]), isredistributed under the GNU LGPL. You may obtain a copy of the source code athttp://www.urbanophile.com/arenn/hacking/download.html. The source code is likewise providedunder the GNU LGPL.JFreeChart is licensed under the GNU LGPL and can be found at http://www.jfree.org.OmniORB is distributed under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License – TheOmniORB Libraries are released under the GNU LGPL.

May include Jena Software © Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Hewlett-PackardDevelopment Company, LP. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS” ANDANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AREDISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANYTHEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Jena includes:Jakarta–ORO software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (described above).ICU4J software Copyright © 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation andothers All rights reserved. Software is used under the following permissions: Permission ishereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associateddocumentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including withoutlimitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of theSoftware, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that theabove copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and insupporting documentation. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENTOF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERSINCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSSOF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCEOR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USEOR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of acopyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or otherdealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

CUP Parser Generator Copyright ©1996-1999 by Scott Hudson, Frank Flannery, C. ScottAnanian–used by permission. The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regardto this software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shallthe authors or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages, or anydamages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract,negligence or other tortious action arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of thissoftware.ImageMagick software is Copyright © 1999-2005 ImageMagick Studio LLC, a nonprofitorganization dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available. ImageMagickis freely available without charge and provided pursuant to the following license agreement:http://www.imagemagick.org/script/license.php.UnZip (© 1990 2001 Info ZIP, All Rights Reserved) is provided AS IS andWITHOUTWARRANTY OFANY KIND. For the complete Info ZIP license see http://www.info-zip.org/doc/LICENSE. "Info-ZIP"is defined as the following set of individuals: Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker,Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase,Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onnovan der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov,Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Christian Spieler, Antoine Verheijen,Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, and Mike White.ICU Libraries (International Components for Unicode) Copyright 1995-2001 International BusinessMachines Corporation and others, All rights reserved. Libraries are provided pursuant to the ICUProject (notice is set forth above) at http://www-306.ibm.com/software/globalization/icu/index.jsp.The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software. This software is Copyright © 1991-1998, ThomasG. Lane. All Rights Reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEGGroup.iText Library - Copyright © 1999-2006 by Bruno Lowagie and Paulo Soares. All Rights Reserved –source code and further information available at http://www.lowagie.com/iText.jpeg-6b.zip - JPEG image compression library, version 6.2. Used to create images for HTML output;Provided pursuant to: http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/part2.Pop up calendar components Copyright © 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All RightsReserved.METIS, developed by George Karypis and Vipin Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can beresearched at http://www.cs.umn.edu/~karypis/metis.Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License Version 1.1(at http://www.mozilla.org/NPL). Software distributed under the Netscape Public License (NPL) isdistributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied(see the NPL for the rights and limitations that are governing different languages). The OriginalCode is Mozilla Communicator client code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer ofthe Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape areCopyright © 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors:Kazu Yamamoto ([email protected]), Ryoichi Furukawa ([email protected]), Tsukasa Maruyama([email protected]), Teiji Matsuba ([email protected]).The following components are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.0 or 1.1 athttp://www.mozilla.org/MPL (the MPL): Gecko and Mozilla components, Spidermonkey andCharset Detector. Software distributed under the MPL is distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUTWARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied and all warranty, support, indemnity orliability obligations under PTC’s software license agreements are provided by PTC alone (see theMPL for the specific language governing rights and limitations). The source code and modificationsthereto are available under the MPL and are available upon request.Rhino JavaScript engine, distributed with a form of the Mozilla Public License (MPL).tiff-v3.4-tar.gz - Libtiff File IO Library version 3.4: (see also http://www.libtiff.orgftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff) Used by the image EFI library; Provided pursuant to:http://www.libtiff.org/misc.html.The DITA standards, including DITA DTDs, DITA Schemas, and portions of the DITA specificationused in online help; copyright © 2006 OASIS Open. All rights reserved.Software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.(http://www.openssl.org/): Copyright © 1998 2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Thisproduct may include cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).pcre-4.3-2-src.zip - Perl Compatible Regular Expression Library version 4.3. http://www.pcre.org;Provided pursuant to: PCRE License.lpng120.zip - PNG image library version 1.2.0. http://www.ijg.org; Provided pursuant to:http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt.libpng, Copyright © 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, which is distributed accordingto the disclaimer and license (as well as the list of Contributing Authors) athttp://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt.METIS is © 1997 Regents of the University of Minnesota.Curl software, Copyright ©1996 - 2005, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. All rights reserved.Software is used under the following permissions: Permission to use, copy, modify, and distributethis software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS,WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITEDTO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORSOR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OFOR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THESOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used inadvertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use, or other dealings.Java Advanced Imaging (JAI) is provided pursuant to the Sun Java Distribution License (JDL) athttp://www.jai.dev.java.net. The terms of the JDL shall supersede any other licensing terms for PTCsoftware with respect to JAI components.Regular expression support is provided by the PCRE library package, which is open source software,written by Philip Hazel, and copyright by the University of Cambridge, England. This software isbased in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.Regular Expressions support was derived from copyrighted software written by Henry Spencer,Copyright © 1986 by University of Toronto.SGML parser: Copyright © 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997,1998 James Clark, 1999 Matthias Clasen.XML parser and XSLT processing was developed using Libxml and Libxslt by Daniel Veillard,Copyright © 2001.libWWW (W3C’s implementation of HTTP) can be found at: http://www.w3.org/Library; Copyright© 1994-2000 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, InstitutNational de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique, Keio University). All RightsReserved. This program is distributed under the W3C’s Software Intellectual Property Licenseat: http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/2002/copyright-software-20021231. This program isdistributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even theimplied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See W3CLicense http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal for more details. Copyright © 1995 CERN. "Thisproduct includes computer software created and made available by CERN. This acknowledgmentshall be mentioned in full in any product which includes the CERN computer software includedherein or parts thereof. "Perl support was developed with the aid of Perl Kit, Version 5.0. Copyright© 1989-2002, Larry Wall. All rights reserved.The cad2eda program utilizes wxWidgets (formerly wxWindows) libraries for its cross-platform UIAPI, which is licensed under the wxWindows Library License at http://www.wxwindows.org.zlib-1.2.1.tar.gz - Zip compression library version 1.2.1. http://www.gzip.org/zlib; Provided pursuantto: Zlib.h License.ATLPort copyright 1999, 2000 Boris Fomitchev is provided by the copyright holder "as is" withabsolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Permission to use or copy this software for anypurpose is granted without fee, provided the foregoing notices are retained on all copies. Permissionto modify the code and to distribute modified code is granted, provided the above notices areretained and a notice that the code was modified is included with the above copyright notice. PTCreserves the right to modify this code and may do so with out further notice.OpenCASCADE software is subject to the Open CASCADE Technology Public License Version 6.2(the "License"). This software may only be used in compliance with the License. A copy of theLicense may be obtained at http://www.opencascade.org. The Initial Developer of the Original Codeis Open CASCADE S.A.S., with main offices at 15 bis, rue Ernest Renan 92136, Issy Les Moulineaux,France. The Original Code is copyright © Open CASCADE S.A.S., 2001. All rights reserved. "TheOriginal Code” and all software distributed under the License are distributed by OpenCASCADEon an "AS IS" basis, without warranty of any kind, and the Initial Developer hereby disclaims allsuch warranties, including without limitation, any warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particularpurpose, or noninfringement (please see the License for the specific terms and conditions governingrights and limitations under the License). PTC product warranties are provided solely by PTC.Certain Pro/TOOLMAKER functions/libraries are as follows:CSubclassWnd version 2.0 - Misc. C++ software; Copyright © 2000 NEWare Software.STLPort - C++ templates; ©1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev; Provided pursuant to: STLPort Licensehttp://stlport.sourceforge.net/License.shtml.ZLib - Compression library; Copyright © 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; Providedpursuant to: ZLib License. http://www.gzip.org/zlib/zlib_license.html.Zip32 - Compression library; Copyright © 1990-2007.Info-ZIP; Provided pursuant to: Info-ZIP License http://www.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html.Inno Setup - Installer package; Copyright © 1997-2007 Jordan Russell; Provided pursuant to InnoSetup License. http://www.jrsoftware.org/files/is/license.txt.7Zip - Compression package; Copyright © 1999-2007 Igor Pavlov; Provided pursuant to 7-ZipLicense http://www.7-zip.org/license.txt.

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly

This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation andSoftware, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a)(JUN’95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. Forprocurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Governmentis subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Dataand Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227 7013 (OCT’88) or Commercial ComputerSoftware-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227 19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 01012008Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

PRINTING HISTORYDocument No. Date DescriptionT2169-360-0I 02/05/2008 Initial Printing of:

Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 4.0Order Number DT-T2169-360-0IPrinted in the U.S.A

For Educa

tional

Use O

nly